Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
Nortel GSM BSS ParameterReferenceRelease: 16.0Document Revision: 16.14
www.nortel.com
411-9001-124.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Release: 16.0Publication: 411-9001-124Document status: StandardDocument release date: 28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel NetworksAll Rights Reserved.
Sourced in Canada, France, and the United States of America.
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expresslyagreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OFANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document aresubject to change without notice.
Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, S2000, and S8000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
.
3.
ContentsNew in this release 33
PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405) 34Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411) 34MS location E911 (20365) 34Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810) 34Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859) 35BSS Packet Flow Context (22860) 35EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498) 36Edge one phase access (24620) 36BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316) 36PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742) 37Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953) 37EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954) 37GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731) 37BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718) 37MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915) 37Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293) 38Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296) 38PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377) 38Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40 Watts
(30713) 38BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300) 38BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657) 39Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756) 39
Introduction 41
Chapter 1 Introduction 431.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 431.2 Different types of configuration parameters 491.3 Description of dictionary entries 50
1.3.1 Header line 501.3.2 Main body of entries 51
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
4
Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order 53A 53
abisSpy Class 3 53absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2 53access time end 54access time start 55accessClassCongestion Class 3 55accessibilityState 55acknowledged by 55acknowledgment time 56activationObject 56activationObject 56active (passive) chain disk state 56active (passive) chain Dmux state 57active (passive) chain ECI board state 57active (passive) chain REM link state 57active (passive) chain Sic board state 57active (passive) chain sic channels state 58active (passive) chain sls board state 58active (passive) chain state 58active (passive) chain switching capacity 58active (passive) chain tcu accessibility 59active (passive) chain ute board state 59active rem link 59activeChain 59additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2 60additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2 61additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2 61additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2 62additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2 63additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2 63additional unmasked users alarms Class 2 64addresses 65adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3 65adjacentCellHandOver 66adjacentCellHandOverId 66adjacentCellReselection 67adjacentCellReselectionId 67administrativeState 68administrativeState 68administrativeState 68administrativeState 69administrativeState 69
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
5
administrativeState 71administrativeState 72administrativeState 73administrativeState 73administrativeState 73administrativeState 74administrativeState 74administrativeState 74administrativeState 74administrativeState 75administrativeState 75administrativeState 75administrativeState 75administrativeState 76administrativeState 76administrativeState 76administrativeState 76administrativeState 77administrativeState 77administrativeState 77administrativeState 77administrativeState 78administrativeState 78administrativeState 79administrativeState 80administrativeState 80administrativeState 81agprsFilterCoefficient Class 3 81agprsHysteresis Class 3 82agprsThreshold Class 3 82agprsTsSharingProtection Class 2 82agpsTimer Class 3 83aLAIntState 83alarm criteria 83alarm criteria 84alarm number 84alarm severity 85alarm state 85alarmDuration 85alarmListConverter 85alarmListFan 85alarmListFanBoard 86alarmListVCOTension 86alarmPriority 86
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
6
algoId class 2 87algorithm Used Class 2 87allocationState 88allocPriorityTable Class 3 88allocPriorityThreshold Class 3 89allocPriorityTimers Class 3 89allocWaitThreshold Class 3 90allOtherCasesPriority Class 3 90amrAdaptationSet Class 3 90amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL Class 3 91amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL Class 3 91amrDirectAllocRxLevDL Class 3 92amrDirectAllocRxLevUL Class 3 92amrDlFrAdaptationSet class 3 92amrDlHrAdaptationSet class 3 93amrFRIntercellCodecMode Class 3 93amrFRIntracellCodecMode Class 3 93amrHRIntercellCodecMode Class 3 94amrHRToFRIntraCodecMode Class 3 94amriRxLevDLH Class 3 95amriRxLevULH Class 3 95amrReserved1 95amrReserved2 Class 3 96amrUlFrAdaptationSet class 3 96amrUlHrAdaptationSet class 3 97answerPagingPriority Class 3 97architecture 97assignRequestPriority Class 3 98associatedInterface Class 0 98associatedLog 99associatedTMUPosition 99aterLapd 99atmRm 100atmRmId 100attenuation Class 2 100auditBdaStatus 100auditState 101authorised user 101availabilityStatus 101availabilityStatus 102availabilityStatus 102availabilityStatus 102availabilityStatus 103availabilityStatus 103
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
7
availabilityStatus 103availabilityStatus 103availabilityStatus 104available synchronization sources 104averagingPeriod Class 2 104
B 105backup manager addresses 105backupServer 105baseColourCode Class 3 105baseColourCode Class 2 105batteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2 106bCCHFrequency Class 3 106bCCHFrequency Class 3 108bCCHFrequency Class 2 109bckgDLLayer3WindowSize Class 3 110bdaNewBscState 110bdaSelected 111bdaState 112bdaVersionBuild 112bdaVersionNumber 113beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2 113beginning date 113beginSearchTime 114beginSearchTime 114beginSearchTime 115beginSearchTime 115beginSearchTime 115bEPPeriod Class 3 116biZonePowerOffset Class 3 116biZonePowerOffset Class 3 117bsc2GEqpt 117bsc2GEqptId 117bsc3GEqpt 117bsc3GEqptId 118bsc 118bsc 119bsc equipment name 119bscList 120bsc model 121bscNumber 121bscAlarmMask Class 3 121bscArchitecture Class 0 122bscCapacityReduction Class 3 122bscChainId 122
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
8
bscCounterList 123bscDateTime 123bscGprsActivation Class 3 123bscHighSwitchingCapacity Class 3 124bscHopReconfUse Class 1 124bscIPFirstAdr Class 2 124bscIPSecondAdr Class 2 125bscList 126bscLog 126bscLogId 126bscMdInterface 126bscMdInterfaceRef 127bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber 127bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 127bscName 128bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2 128bscQueueingOption Class 1 129bscRefList 129bscReset 130bscSitePcmList Class 2 130bscTimeSlot 131bscType Class 0 131bscUsedAdr 132bsCvMax Class 3 132bscX25PrefAdr Class 2 132bscX25SecAdr Class 2 133bscX25UsedAdr 133bsPowerControl Class 3 134bssMapT1 Class 1 134bssMapT4 Class 1 134bssMapT7 Class 1 135bssMapT8 Class 1 135bssMapT12 Class 1 135bssMapT13 Class 1 136bssMapT19 Class 1 136bssMapT20 Class 1 136bssMapTchoke Class 1 137bssSccpConnEst Class 1 137bssSccpInactRx Class 1 137bssSccpInactTx Class 1 138bssSccpRelease Class 1 138bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1 139bsTxPwrMax Class 3 139bts 141
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
9
bts 142bts equipment name 143bts list 144btsSMSynchroMode Class 2 144bts time between HO configuration Class 3 145btsDescription 145btsHopReconfRestart Class 2 145btsIsHopping Class 2 146btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 147btsReserved3 Class 3 147btsReserved4 Class 3 147btsSensitivity Class 3 147btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3 148btsSiteManager 148btsSiteManager 149btsSiteManager model 150btsSiteManagerList Class 2 150btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2 151btsWithCavity Class 2 151buildState 152
C 152callClearing Class 3 152callDropActivation class 3 153callPathObservationArea Class 2 153callPathTrace 154callPathTraceType Class 2 154callReestablishment Class 3 155callReestablishmentPriority Class 3 155capacityAlarmThreshold 155capacityTimeRejection Class 3 156cause 156cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel Class 3 157cc 157ccId 157cellAllocation Class 2 158cellBarQualify Class 3 159cellBarred Class 3 159cellDeletionCount Class 3 160cellDtxDownLink Class 3 160cellIdentity Class 3 160cellIdentity Class 3 161cellIdentity Class 2 161cellName 161cellPagingState 162
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
10
cellReselectHysteresis Class 3 163cellReselectOffset Class 3 164cellReselInd Class 3 164cellThreshold Class 2 165cellType Class 3 165cellType Class 3 165cemId 166chain 166chain 166chain 166chainId 167chainId 167chainId 167channel 168channel state 168channelReleaseOnAbisFailure 169channelType Class 2 170chanState 173chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1 174chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1 174chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1 175chosenChannelHoReq Class 1 175cic Class 0 175circuitGroupBlock Class 1 176circularFileId 177circularFileState 177clear time 177cleared by 178clearing cause 178cn 178control Node Id 178coderPoolConfiguration Class 2 for a BSC 12000HC V12, a BSC 12000HC V15
and a BSC 3000 V15, and class 3 for a BSC 3000 V14 179coderPoolList 179codingScheme Class 2 180command classes 180command line 180command number 181commandFile 181commandFile 181comment 182comment 182comments 182computeSyntheticCounters 182
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
11
concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3 183concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3 183concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3 184concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3 184concentric cell Class 2 185condition 186configRef Class 3 187configRefList 188configurationType 188confusion Class 1 188counter list 189counter list filename 189counterId 189counters 189counters 189cpueNumber Class 0 190cpueOccurrence 190cRC Class 0 191cRC Class 2 191creator 192criteriaEventType 192cSS7LocalSubSystemNumber Class 0 192cSS7RemoteSubSystemNumber Class 0 193CTU cable 193current log size 193current synchronization mode 194currentChannelHorqd Class 1 194cypherModeReject Class 1 194
D 195dARPPh1Priority class 2 195data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2 195data non transparent mode Class 3 195data non transparent mode Class 3 196data transparent mode Class 3 196data transparent mode Class 3 197data14-4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3 197date 197date 197date 198date 198date 198day intervention 198day to be purged 199dDTIIntState 199
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
12
degradedCause 199degradedCause 199delayBetweenRetrans Class 2 200delivery 200deltaUtc 202detectionFunction 202directedRetry Class 3 202directedRetryModeUsed Class 3 202directedRetryPrio Class 3 203directory 203display Data Configuration 204display Data Information 204distHreqt Class 3 204distributionActivation Class 3 204distributionDuration Class 3 205distributionTime Class 3 205distributionQualityThreshold Class 3 206distWtsList Class 3 207diversity Class 2 208dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 208dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 208dlMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 208dlMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 209dlMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3 209dlMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3 209dlMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3 210dlMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3 210drxTimerMax Class 3 210dtxMode Class 3 211duplex link state 211duration 212dwAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime) 212dynamicAgprsAllowed Class 2 212
E 213early classmark sending Class 3 213edgeDataServiceType Class 2 213edgeFavor Class 3 213eDGEMixity Class 3 213efd 214efdType 214egprsIrULActivation Class 3 215egprsServices Class 3 215emergencyCallPriority Class 3 216emergencyCallRestricted Class 3 216
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
13
emergencyThreshold Class 3 217eMLPPThreshold Class 3 217enableRepeatedFacchFr Class 2 217encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1 218encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1 218encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1 218encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1 219encryptionAlgorSupported Class 0 219encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1 219end date 220end date 220end of probative Phase Type 220end time 221end time 221endAlarmFilter 221endAlarmThreshold 222endAlarmThreshold 222endCounterThreshold 223endSearchTime 223endSearchTime 223endSearchTime 224endSearchTime 224endSearchTime 225endSessionCriteriaDuration 225endSessionCriteriaType 225enhancedTRAUFrameIndication 226enhCellTieringConfiguration 226equipment identity 228equipment processor number 228error concealment unit Class 2 228errorCorrectionMethod Class 3 229estimatedSiteLoad Class 3 229exclusive interval of codano 229exclusive list of codano 230executableSoftware 230executableSoftwareId 230executableSoftwareName 230extCommsInt 231extended cell Class 2 231extendedTimingAdvanceWindow 232external alarm configuration Class 2 232external battery cabinet Class 2 234externalTime 234extUtbfNoData Class 3 235
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
14
F 235facchPowerOffset Class 2 235Family 235faultNumber 238fERThreshold1 Class 3 238fERThreshold2 Class 3 239fERThreshold3 Class 3 239fERThreshold4 Class 3 240fhsRef Class 2 240filteredTrafficCoefficient Class 3 241floor 241flowControlMaxDelay 241flowControlMaxRate 242fnOffset class 2 242forced handover algo Class 3 242frAmrPriority Class 2 243frequencyHoppingSystem 243frPowerControlTargetMode Class 3 244frPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3 244fullDlKa Class 3 244
G 245geographical coordinates 245geographical coordinates 246gprsAvgParam Class 3 246gprsCellActivation Class 3 246gprsNetworkModeOperation Class 3 247gprsPcuCrossConnectList Class 2 247gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2 248gprsPermittedAccess Class 3 248gprsPreemption Class 3 248gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3 249gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 249gprsState 249gprsState 249gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3 250gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3 250gsmToUmtsReselection Class 3 251
H 252handOver from signalling channel Class 3 252handOverControl 253hardware configuration Class 2 253hardwareRef Class 2 255hardwareRef Class 2 255hardwareRef Class 2 255
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
15
hexa text 255highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval 256hoMargin Class 3 256hoMarginAMR Class 3 256hoMarginBeg Class 3 256hoMarginDist Class 3 257hoMarginRxLev Class 3 257hoMarginRxQual Class 3 257hoMarginTiering Class 3 258hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3 258hoPingpongCombination Class 3 258hoPingpongTimeRejection Class 3 260hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2 260hoSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3 261hoTraffic Class 3 261hoTraffic Class 3 261hrAmrPriority Class 2 262hrCellLoadEnd Class 3 262hrCellLoadStart Class 3 263hrPowerControlTargetMode Class 3 263hrPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3 264
I 264identifier 264identifier 265identifier 265identifier 265iem 265iemId 266iMSIAttachDetach Class 2 266in 266inactivity timeout 266inclusive interval of codano 267inclusive list of codano 267incomingHandOver Class 3 267inhibitRequest 267inId 268initialMCSDL Class 3 268initialMCSUL Class 3 268interBscDirectedRetry Class 3 269interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 269interCellHOExtPriority Class 3 269interCellHOIntPriority Class 3 270interferenceType Class 3 270interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc 270
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
16
interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts 272interferer cancel algo usage Class 2 274internal DMUX alarm state 274internal DMUX state 276internal PCM states 277internal switching matrix 277interOmuEtherlinkOper 277intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3 278intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 278intraCell Class 3 278intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3 279intraCellQueueing Class 3 279intraCellSDCCH Class 3 279
J 280job 280jobResult 280jokerPerMainTarget Class 3 280
L 281label 281language 281lapdConcentration 281lapdLink 282lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 283lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 283lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0 284lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2 284lapdTerminalNumber Class 0 285layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1 286lcsType Class 0 286level to process 287lightning protection Class 2 287line 287locationAreaCode Class 3 288locationAreaCode Class 3 288locationAreaCode Class 2 288log 288logFullAction 289login command type 289longTbfLossThroughput Class 3 289longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3 290lRxLevDLH Class 3 290lRxLevDLP Class 3 290lRxLevULH Class 3 291lRxLevULP Class 3 291
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
17
lRxQualDLH Class 3 291lRxQualDLP Class 3 292lRxQualULH Class 3 292lRxQualULP Class 3 292lsaPcmList Class 3 293lsaRc 294lsaRcId 294lsaRc Reference 295
M 295machine name 295machine name 295mainNetworkBand Class 0 295maio Class 2 296managedObjectClass 296managedObjectInstance 297manager address type 297manager addresses 297managerServer 297manufacturerIntervention 298marking type 298masterBtsSMId class 2 298max log size 298maxAdjCHOARMPerBts 299maxBscPerNetwork 299maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3 299maxBtsPerBtsSM 299maxBtsPerNetwork 299maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 300maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3 300maxDwAssign Class 3 300maxFileSize Class 2 300maximum acknowledgment time 301maximum alarm number 301maximum clear time 302maximum event time 302maximum MD notification number 302maximum OMC notification number 303maximum reception time 303maxLapdChPerBtsSM 303maxNbrConsMess 303maxNbOfCells Class 2 304maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 304maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtended
Conf 304
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
18
maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (n3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 305
maxNumberRetransmission Class 3 305maxPcmCPerBtsSM 305maxPcmCPerTranscd 306maxRACH Class 3 306maxRowCount 306maxSigLPerSigLS 307maxTeiPerLapdCh 307maxTranscdBPerTranscd 307maxTranscdPerBsc 307maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 308maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3 308md 308md notification number 308mdArchive 309mdConfirm 309mdFileName 309mdGranularityPeriod 309mdGranularityPeriod 310mdGranularityPeriod 311mdId 312mdLog 312mdObjectList 312mdObjectList 313mdObjectList 313mdScanner 313mdScannerType 314mdScannerType 314mdScannerType 314mdScannerType 315mdScannerType 315mdStorageDuration 315mdTransferMode 316mdWarning 316measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2 316microCellCaptureTimer Class 3 317microCellStability Class 3 318minimum acknowledgment time 318minimum alarm number 318minimum clear time 319minimum event time 319minimum MD notification number 319minimum OMC notification number 320
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
19
minimum reception time 320minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain Class 3 320minNbOfTDMA Class 2 321minNbrGprsTs Class 3 321minTimeQualityIntraCellHO Class 3 321missDistWt Class 3 322missRxLevWt Class 3 322missRxQualWt Class 3 323mms 323mmsId 323mmsUsage 324mobileAllocation Class 2 324mobileCountryCode Class 3 324mobileCountryCode Class 3 325mobileCountryCode Class 1 325mobileCountryCode Class 2 326mobileNetworkCode Class 3 326mobileNetworkCode Class 3 326mobileNetworkCode Class 1 327mobileNetworkCode Class 2 327modeModifyMandatory Class 3 327monitoredObjectClass 328monitoredObjectInstance 328monitoredSpecificProblemsList 329month 329msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3 329msCapWeightActive Class 2 329msLeakRate 330msPowerClassToggle Class 3 330msRangeMax Class 3 330msTxPwrMax Class 3 331msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2 331msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3 332msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3 333multi band reporting Class 3 334multiple site 334multipleVocoders Class 1 335muxNumber Class 3 335
N 336n3103 Class 3 336n3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf) 336nACCActivation Class 3 336nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 336nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 337
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
20
nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 337nbOfFramesForFER Class 3 337nbOfRepeat Class 2 338nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3 338nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3 339nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) 339nCapacityFRRequestedCodec Class 3 339nCHPosition Class2 340networkColourCode Class 3 341networkColourCode Class 2 341networkIndicator Class 1 342new name 342new password 1st try 342new password 2nd try 343new power control algorithm Class 3 343next execution time 344nFRRequestedCodec Class 3 344nHRRequestedCodec Class 3 345night intervention 345noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2 345noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2 346notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3 346notification number 347notification type 347numberOfJokerDS0 Class 2 347number of records 348number of large reuse data channels Class 3 348numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts 348numberOfPwciSamples Class 3 349numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3 349numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3 351numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3 352numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3 352numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3 352nUsfExt Class 3 353nwExtUtbf Class 3 353
O 353objectClass 353objectInstance 354object Filter List 354objects 355objects assigned 355observation type 355observation type 356
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
21
observed counters 356observed object class 356occupationState 356offsetLoad Class 3 357offsetNeighbouringCell Class 3 357offsetPriority Class 3 359oMC notification number 359omu 359omuId 360on error 360onlyExtUtbf Class 3 360onePhaseAccess Class 2 360onePhaseDnMsCapability Class 3 361operationalState 361operationalState 362operationalState 363operationalState 363operationalState 364operationalState 364operationalState 365operationalState 366operationalState 366operationalState 366operationalState 367operationalState 367operationalState 368operationalState 368operationalState 369operationalState 369operationalState 370operationalState 370operationalState 371operationalState 371operationalState 371operationalState 372operationalState 372operationalState 373operationalState 374operationalState 374operationalState 375operationalState 375operationalState 376operationalState 376operationalState 377
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
22
operationalState 378operationalState 378otherServicesPriority Class 3 379output classes 379output classes 380owner 380
P 380packetAckTime Class 3 380packetFlowContext Class 3 381packetSiStatus Class 3 382pagingOnCell Class 3 382pan Class 3 382panDec Class 3 (pan) 382panInc Class 3 (pan) 383panMax Class 3 (pan) 383parameter(s) 384partialRecordCriteriaType Class 2 384partialRecordCriteriaEventType 385partialRecordCriteriaNbEvent 385partialrecordCriteriaTimer 385particular intervention 385password 385password 385password duration 386pcmCircuit 386pcmCircuit 388pcmCircuitBsc 389pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager 389pcmCircuitId 389pcmCircuitId Class 2 390pcmCircuitId Class 2 390pcmCircuitId Class 2 391pcmErrorCorrection Class 2 391pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) 391pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2 392pcmType Class 3 (BSC 12000) or Class 0 (BSC 3000) 392pcu 393pcuCellState 393pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2 394pcusn 394pcuSNName 394penaltyTime Class 3 395perceived severity 396periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 396
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
23
periodicity 396pfcActivation Class 2 396pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 397pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 397pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 397pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 398pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 398pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 398pfcFlowControlActivation Class 2 399pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs Class 3 399pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate Class 3 400pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold Class 3 400pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold Class 3 401pfcPreemptionRatioGold Class 3 401pfcPreemptionRatioSilver Class 3 401pfcRtDowngradeAllowed Class 3 402pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold Class 3 402pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold Class 3 402pfcT6 Class 3 403pfcT8 Class 3 403pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl Class 3 403pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl Class 3 404plmnPermitted Class 3 404pODType 404pointCode Class 1 404pointCode Class 1 405port Ethernet operational 405port Ethernet status 405port 0 X25 status 406port 1 X25 status 406portChosen Class 2 407portUsed 407positionInShelf 407powerBudgetInterCell Class 3 408powerClass 408powerControl 408powerControlIndicator Class 3 409powerDownlink (algorithm Used) class 2 409powerIncrStepSize Class 3 409powerIncrStepSizeUpLink Class 3 410powerIncrStepSizeDownLink Class 3 411powerRedStepSize Class 3 411powerRedStepSizeDownLink Class 3 412powerRedStepSizeUpLink Class 3 412
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
24
powerUplink (algorithm Used) Class 2 413preemptionAuthor Class 3 413preemptionConfiguration Class 3 413pRequestedCodec Class 3 414preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3 414priority Class 2 414privateMmsOmuRef 415privilegedCell Class 3 415probable cause 416processor identity 418processorLoadSupConf Class 3 418pwciHrequave Class 3 419
R 420rACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3 420radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3 420radioAllocator Class 2 421radioLinkTimeOut Class 3 422radioSiteMask Class 2 423radioSiteMaskOffset Class 2 424radioSiteName 425radResSupBusyTimer Class 3 426radResSupervision Class 3 426radResSupFreeTimer Class 3 426range 427reception time 427record reference 427redundantPcmNumber 428redundantPcmPresence Class 2 428refPeriod 428refPeriod 428relatedSoftwares 429relay 429remoteSsuState 430repetition rate 430report range 430report template 431report type 431reportObjLevel 431reportTypeMeas Class 2 432resetCircuitRepeat Class 1 432retransDuration Class 2 432retry on error 433rlf1 Class 2 433rlf2 Class 2 434
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
25
rlf3 Class 2 434rLCPolling Class 3 435rmpConfState 435rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3 436routingArea Class 2 436rowPosition 436runCallClear Class 3 437runHandOver Class 3 437runPwrControl Class 3 437rxLevAccessMin Class 3 437rxLevDLIH Class 3 438rxLevDLPBGT Class 3 438rxLevHreqave Class 3 439rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3 439rxLevHreqt Class 3 439rxLevMinCell Class 3 440rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg Class 3 440rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation Class 3 441rxLevULIH Class 3 441rxLevWtsList Class 3 441rxNCellHreqave Class 3 442rxQualAveBeg Class 3 442rxQualDLIH Class 3 443rxQualHreqave Class 3 443rxQualHreqt Class 3 443rxQualULIH Class 3 443rxQualThresholdDistribution Class 3 444rxQualWtsList Class 3 444
S 444sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition 444sIkATerResource 445sacchPowerOffset Class 2 445sacchPowerOffsetSelection Class 2 445sapi 445scannerId 446scannerId 446sCCPRoutingIndicator 446securedLoopActivation Class 2 447selfAdaptActivation Class 3 447selfTuningObs Class 3 448sequenceNumber 448serial number 448serial number 449servingFactorOffset Class 3 449
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
26
session context saving mode 449sGSNRelease Class 3 450shelfNumber 450short message 450sicBoardsInt 451signallingLinkId 451signallingLinkResState 452signallingLinkSet 453signallingPoint 453signallingPointType 453signallingTerminalNumber Class 2 454sigPowerOverboost Class 3 454sigPReserved2 Class 3 454site 455siteGsmFctList Class 2 455siteName 456slc Class 2 457small to large zone HO priority Class 3 457smoke detector Class 2 458smsCB Class 3 458software 459softwareLabel 460source indicator 460specific problems 460speechMode Class 3 461speechMode Class 3 461speechOnHoppingTs Class 3 462speechVersionAsscomp Class 1 462speechVersionHoperf Class 1 462speechVersionHoreq Class 1 462speechVersionHorqd Class 1 463standard indicator AdjC Class 3 463standard indicator AdjC Class 3 463standardIndicator Class 2 464standbyStatus 467start date 467start time 468start time 468startAlarmFilter 468startAlarmThreshold 469startAlarmThreshold 470startCounterThreshold 470startTime 471startTime 471
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
27
stopTime 471stopTime 471subChanId 472subject 472suffix 472summary 473suspendResumeActivation Class 3 473supportingTransceiverEquipment 473sw8kRm 474sw8kRmId 474sWVersionBackUp 474sWVersionFallBack 475sWVersionNew 475sWVersionRunning Class 2 476synchronized Class 3 476synchronizing PCM 477syntheticFaultNumber 477systemInfoType2 Class 2 477system state 478
T 478t3101 Class 3 478t3103 Class 3 478t3107 Class 3 479t3109 Class 3 479t3111 Class 3 480t3122 Class 3 480t3168 Class 3 480t3172 Class 3 481t3192 Class 3 481target Bda 481tcu2gGroup 482teiBtsSiteManager Class 2 482teiLapdLink 483teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2 483teiTranscoder Class 2 484temporaryOffset Class 3 484terminal name 485terminal profile 485text 485text 486text 486tFH or RWM Class 2 486tGMMKeepAlive Class 3 486thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 487
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
28
thresholdInterference Class 2 487thresholdType 488timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3 489timerGcchNotif Class 3 489timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3 489timeSlotNumber 490timeSlotNumber Class 2 490timeSlotNumber 490tmu 491tmuId 491tnOffset class 2 492tNwExtUtbf Class 3 492traceConstraintList 492traceControl 493traceDayAccessed 493traceFileName 494traceInfoRequested 494traceReference 494traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2 494transceiver 495transceiver 495transceiver equipment class Class 2 496transceiver zone Ref Class 2 497transceiverEquipment 497transceiverEquipment 498transceiver equipment class 499transceiverZone 499transcoder2GEqptId 500transcoder3GEqptId 500transcoder 501transcoder 501transcoder 502transcoderAlarmList 502transcoderAlarmMask Class 3 502transcoderArchitecture 502transcoderBoard 503transcoderBoard 503transcoderBoardIntState 503transcoderId Class 2 504transcoderId Class 2 504transcoderIntPcmIntState 504transcoderMatrix 505transparentSiteAttrib2 Class 2 507transparentTeiAttrib2 Class 2 507
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
29
tResumeAck Class 3 507trm 508trmArchipelagoCalls 508trmId 508tSCBNumber 508tSCBUse 509tsConfiguration 509tSuspendAck Class 3 510tUsfExt Class 3 510txPowerMaxReduction Class 2 510type 511type 511type 512type 512type 512type of data to be purged 513type of display 513
U 513ulBepPeriod Class 2 513ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 513ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 514ulMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 514ulMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 514ulMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3 515ulMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3 515ulMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3 515ulMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3 515UMTS access min level Class 3 516UMTS reselection ARFCN Class 3 516UMTS reselection offset Class 3 516UMTS search min level Class 3 517unequippedCircuit Class 1 517unit 517unknownNCellWarning Class 3 518unmasked users alarms Class 2 518upAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime) 519upgradeStatus 519uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2 520uplinkMappingFreq Class 2 520uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Class 2 520uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3 521uplinkPowerControl Class 3 521uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA Class 3 521uplinkReply Class 3 521
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
30
uplinkReplyTimer Class 3 522uRxLevDLP Class 3 522uRxLevULP Class 3 523uRxQualDLP Class 3 523uRxQualULP Class 3 523usageState 524usageState 524use default list 525user name 525user profile 525username 525username 526usfGranularity Class 3 526
V 526version Class 2 526voiceBroadcastService Class 3 527voiceGroupCallService Class 3 527vSWR meter Class 2 527
W 528workstation name 528wPSManagement Class 3 528wPSQueueStepRotation Class 3 528
X 529X25 port 0 operational 529X25 port 1 operational 529xSCBConfiguration Class 0 530xSCBNumber 530xSCBUse 530xtp 531
Z 532zI bss 532zI bss 532zone frequency hopping Class 2 533zone frequency threshold Class 2 533zone Tx power max reduction Class 2 534
Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution 535A.1 New V16 parameters 535A.2 New V15 parameters 536A.3 New V14 parameters 539
Appendix B Parameters per feature 543B.1 AMR based on traffic 543B.2 AMR Optimizations 543B.3 BSC/TCU 3000 543
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
31
B.4 BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing 544B.5 BSC 3000 switching increase capacity 544B.6 BSC overload management 544B.7 Dualband cell management 544B.8 EDGE dynamic allocation 544B.9 EDGE traffic management 545B.10 EDGE link adaptation 545B.11 GSM-R V12 545B.12 GSM-R V15 546B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12) 546B.14 GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I) 548B.15 GPRS (TF1121 - V12) 548B.16 GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access 548B.17 GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume 549B.18 PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC 549B.19 Network Synchronization 549B.20 BTS Synchronization 549B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering 549B.22 Handover for traffic reasons 550B.23 Handover decision (adjacent cell priority and load) 550B.24 General protection against pingpong handover 550B.25 Intracell handover enhancements 550B.26 AR 264 550B.27 Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs 550B.28 Call drop analysis 550B.29 Extended CCCH 551B.30 CPU/BIFP load sharing 551B.31 Distribution on Radio measurements 551B.32 Extended UL TBF 551B.33 Broadcast of PSI 13 551B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support 551B.35 Fast power control at TCH assignment 552B.36 Data Backhaul Evolution 552B.37 Disabling TBF Keep Alive 552B.38 PCM error correction 552B.39 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block 552B.40 Uplink mapping 552B.41 WPS public access bandwidth protection 552B.42 WPS queuing management 552B.43 BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement 553B.44 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS 553B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context 553B.46 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading 554B.47 Optimized Agprs cell allocation 554
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
32
B.48 EDGE Dynamic Agprs 554B.49 Switch Interference Matrix 554B.50 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure 554B.51 PM1270 - TDMA based counters 554B.52 Tx power offset for signalling channels 554B.53 Tx power overboost for signaling channels 554B.54 U-TDOA support on the BSS 555B.56 Smart Power Management 555
Appendix C PCUSN components 557
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
33.
New in this releaseThe following section detail what is new in Nortel GSM BSS ParameterReference for the V16.0 release.
Features• PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405)
• Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411)
• MS location E911 (20365)
• Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810)
• Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859)
• BSS Packet Flow Context (22860)
• EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498)
• Edge one phase access (24620)
• BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316)
• PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742)
• Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953)
• EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954)
• GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731)
• BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718)
• MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915)
• Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293)
• Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296)
• PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377)
• Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40Watts (30713)
• BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
34 New in this release
• BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657)
• Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756)
PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405)This feature provides observation counters on a TDMAbasis. The tunednetwork analysis enables the operator to detect local QoS anomalies andadjust network parameters.
See impact of this feature in the following location: updated themonitoredObjectClass parameter.
Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411)This feature provides an interference matrix, which allows an operatorto evaluate cell overlaps. With this information, an operator can detectwhich neighboring cells causes interferences and optimize inter-cellsfunctionality.
The network calculates automatically the interference matrix and allowsthe operator to improve the network’s view and the frequency planning.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts and interferenceMatrixRunningOnBscparameters.
MS location E911 (20365)This feature introduces a standard BSS based solution for MS location.Each operator is now able to choose its configuration, in accordance withthe network architecture.
See impact of this feature in the following location:
• modified the lcsType and pcmType parameters
• eotdAgpsTimer has been renamed agpsTimer
• added semantic controls to the following parameters:bssSccpConnEst, bssSccpInactRx, bssSccpInactTx, bssSccpRelease,bssSccpSubSysTest, pcmType, lcsType, signallingLinkId, lsaPcmList
Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810)This feature improves the BTS behavior upon an Abis link failure.When the TRXs of a BTS detect an Abis PCM failure, the BTS turns off thepower amplifier. The broadcasting on BCCH and SACCH is stopped. Assoon as the TRXs of the BTS detect the Abis PCMre--activation, the BTSturns on the power amplifiers.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
Features 35
See impact of this feature in the following location: added the newchannelReleaseOnAbisFailure parameter.
Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859)This feature is an extension of the GPRS/EDGE standard. When NACC isactivated, the network is able to assist the MS for cell re-selection duringongoing TBF.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added thenACCActivation and packetSiStatus parameters.
BSS Packet Flow Context (22860)PFC provides QoS classification of flows in the BSS. This sharp QoSdescription is common to GSM and UMTS.
See impact of this feature in the following location:
• added the following new parameters:
— packetFlowContext
— pfcActivation
— pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection
— pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection
— pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection
— pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection
— pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection
— pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection
— pfcFlowControlActivation
— pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs
— pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate
— pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold
— pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold
— pfcPreemptionRatioGold
— pfcPreemptionRatioSilver
— pfcRtDowngradeAllowed
— pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold
— pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold
— pfcT6
— pfcT8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
36 New in this release
— pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl
— pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl
• removed the following parameters:
— admissionCtrlBronze
— admissionCtrlGold
— admissionCtrlSilver
— dwQoSCriterion
— minTargetThroughput
— minThroughputBronze
— minThroughputGold
— minThroughputSilver
— peakThroughputLimitation
— preemptionRatioGold
— preemptionRatioSilver
— targetThroughputStep
— upQoSCriterion
— voicePreemptionBronze
— voicePreemptionGold
— voicePreemptionSilver
EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498)Incremental redundancy (IR) defines the retransmission process of datablocks that were not successfully decoded after the first transmission,combining them until they are properly decoded.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added theeGPRSIrUlActivation parameter.
Edge one phase access (24620)This feature reduces the uplink TBF establishment time, and consequentlyincreases the data throughput from an end-user point of view.
See impact of this feature in the following location: modified theonePhaseAccess parameter.
BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316)This feature allows operators to download new software to a BTS whilethis BTS carries GSM/GPRS calls on a live network.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
Features 37
See impact of this feature in the following location: added thebckDLLayer3WindowSize parameter.
PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742)An evolution of the data configuration is needed because of the increase ofthe BSC 3000 Agprs connectivity.
See impacts of this feature in the following locations: modified thebscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefListparameters.
Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953)This feature provides a better control on cell distribution on Agprs PCM,and maximized performances.
See impact of this feature in the following location: Added theprivilegedCell parameter.
EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954)This feature allows to reserve Joker bandwidth on the Agprs for a givenTDMA.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added theminNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain parameter.
GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731)This feature aims at a better monitoring and better diagnoses (Edge andGPRS).
See impact of this feature in the following location: modified the followingdegradedCause parameter of the transceiver object.
BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718)This feature adds information on specific objects (trm, lsa) in order toenhance the customer visibility on IN and TCU nodes.
See impact of this feature in the following location:
• added the trmArchipelagoCalls and aterLapd parameters
• modified the following parameters: coderPoolList, coderPoolConfiguration, CTU cable, numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts
• removed the lapdLinkCallPLoad parameter
MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915)This feature describes the impacts of the introduction of the increasedAgprs connectivity between each BSC3000 and PCUSN.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
38 New in this release
See impact of this feature in the following location: updated thebscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefListparameters.
Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293)This feature improves the downlink robustness of signalling channels(FACCH and SACCH). New parameters define dedicated power controltargets for uplink and downlink AMR CODEC.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added the followingnew parameters: facchPowerOffset, sacchPowerOffsetSelection, sacchPowerOffset, hrPowerControlTargetModeDl and frPowerControlTargetModeDl
Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296)This feature secures the handover procedure in poor radio conditions byretransmitting the FACCH frames in DL after 40 ms, that is, without waitingfor the mobile acknowledgement.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added theenableRepeatedFacchFr parameter.
PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377)An evolution of the data configuration is needed because of the increase ofthe BSC 3000 Agprs connectivity.
See impact of this feature in the following location: modified thebscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefListparameters.
Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40Watts (30713)
This feature allows operators to remotely identify Radio Module types forservice purposes (BTS output power configuration). Three types of RM areavailable: Radio Module (RM), Medium Power Radio Module (MPRM) andHigh Power Radio Module (HPRM).
See impacts of this feature in the following locations: modified thefollowing parameters: hardware configuration, bts equipment name.
BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300)This feature provides configurations for the 4-way Tx coupler (the H4module).
See impact of this feature in the following location: updated the btsequipment name parameter.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
Other changes 39
BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657)This feature introduces 60W Radio Modules with three TRX per modules,in the 850 MHz and the 900 MHz bands.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added the valueHigh Power Radio Module with 3 TRX per module to the description ofhardware configuration parameter.
Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756)This features describes the high speed enhancements to all frequencies ofNortel GSM Access portfolio (900, 1800, 850 and 1900 MHz) for GSM-R.
See impact of this feature in the following location: added thehighSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval parameter.
Other changesSee the following sections for information about changes that are notfeature-related:
• Removed information on BSC 12000 due to EOL (End Of Life) (v16.01)
• Replaces all occurrences toBSC 2G with BSC 12000HC (v16.01)
• Updated availabilityStatus parameter(v16.01)
• Updated operationalState parameter (v16.01)
• Updated pcmCircuitId parameter (v16.01)
• Updated timeSlotNumber parameter updated (v16.01)
• Removed hoCombination parameter and updated Section A.2 NewV14 parameters (v16.01)
• Removed allocBitmap and dLPwrValue parameters (v16.01)
• Added tcu2gGroup and pcuCellstate parameters (v16.01)
• Removed extUplinkTbActivation parameter (v16.01)
• Removed lapdLinkResources parameter (v16.01)
• Updated monitoredObjectClass parameter (v16.01)
• Updated parameters (v16.02)
— bsTxPwrMax
— mobileCountryCode
— early classmark sending
• Updated parameters (v16.03)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
40 New in this release
— signallingLinkSet
— dtxMode
— nUsfExt
• Added Attention precaution to show parameter range evolution foramrReserved1 (v16.04)
• Added sigPowerOverboost parameter (v16.04)
• Added uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA parameter (v16.04)
• Updated parameters (v16.05)
— siteName
— cRC
— pcmType
— bscName
— cellName
— radioSiteName
— pcuSNName
• Updated parameter availabilityStatus with value range "unknown"(v16.07)
• Added detail about semantic checks to description about parametergsmToUmtsReselection (v16.08)
• Removed Class 2 identifier that was in the parameter description aboutbscRefList (v16.08)
• Modified teiTranscoder class 2 parameter checks to differentiatebetween 2g and 3g (v16.08).
• Added information on external alarms for the BTS 6000 in externalalarm configuration class 2 parameter (16.09).
• Added note about configuration information in the microCellCaptureTimer and microCellStability parameters (16.09).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
41.
IntroductionThe Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference is a guide that describes allGSM BSS network element parameters that the user can access usingthe OMC-R.
ATTENTIONFor a BSC 3000, there are no class 1 parameters; all these parameters are nowclass 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have not changed.
PrerequisitesUsers must be familiar with networking principles.
They must also be familiar with the following manuals:
< 00 > : Nortel GSM BSS Documentation roadmap
< 01 > : Nortel GSM BSS Overview
< 06 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Fundamentals
< 07 > : Nortel GSM BSS Fundamentals — Operating Principles
< 16 > : Nortel GSM TCU 2G Fundamentals
< 22 > : Nortel GSM BSC 12000HC Fundamentals
< 32 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting
< 34 > : Nortel GSM BSS Configuration — Operating Procedures
< 125 > : Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management — ObservationCounters Dictionary
< 128 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Objects and Faultmenus
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
42 Introduction
< 129 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Configuration,Performance, and Maintenance menus
< 130 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Security,Administration, SMS—CB, and Help menus
<133>: Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management — ObservationCounters Fundamentals
Navigation• Chapter 1 “Introduction ” (page 43) contains general information on
BSS operating parameters.
• Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order” (page 53) describesall the operating parameters listed in alphabetical order, and explainstheir use.
• Appendix A “Objects and parameters evolution” (page 535) lists newconfiguration parameters and objects by release.
• Appendix B “Parameters per feature” (page 543) presents BSSparameters per feature.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
43.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Network configuration objects and their parametersThis dictionary summarizes all the GSM BSS parameters used to define allthe objects managed on the OMC-R. An object model is used to describeeach managed network element. Each object is defined in terms of itsparameters (also called attributes), and its relationships with other objects.A containment tree is used to depict the relationships among theseobjects (see Figure 1 "Object main tree structure" (page 43) to Figure 4"Network subtree objects" (page 45)). For more information on objects andparameters, refer to NTP < 07 >, for parameters listed per object, referto NTP < 128 >.
ATTENTIONFor a BSC 3000, there are no more class 1 parameters; all these parametersare now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have notchanged.
Figure 1Object main tree structure
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
44 Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 2omc subtree objects
Figure 3md subtree objects
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 45
Figure 4Network subtree objects
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
46 Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 5bsc 2G subtree objects
Figure 6bsc 3000 subtree objects
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 47
Figure 7bsc 3000 subtree objects
Figure 8btsSiteManager subtree objects
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
48 Chapter 1 Introduction
Users can create, modify, and delete objects using commands and actionsdisplayed in the menus of the OMC-R Browser window (see Figure 9"Menus in the OMC-R browser window" (page 48)). Parameters are widelyused in all commands and actions.
For more information on commands, refer to NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >.
Figure 9Menus in the OMC-R browser window
For CT2000 and datafill purposes, the following remarks must be takeninto consideration:
• If not indicated, the parameters are considered mandatory in all cases.For example, if a parameter is marked as Not Mandatory at the OMC-Rlevel, the user does not need to employ it in CT2000, there will not beany value in the command files to create the associated object.
• A parameter is dependant of an OMC feature only when indicated.For any parameter associated with an OMC feature, if the feature is
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
1.2 Different types of configuration parameters 49
active at OMC-R then the parameter is mandatory at object creationotherwise it is not. Example: a parameter marked as "cell Tiering"dependant will only be used when the cellTiering feature is active atthe OMC-R level.
• A parameter is considered product-dependant only when indicated andto be used only when the product is used in the network. For example,a parameter marked "BSC 3000" dependant is mandatory when theobject to create/modify belongs to the "BSC 3000" architecture.
• CT2000 is an offline, multi-release CM OAM tool. The CT2000 V3phased with BSS V15 can also configure sub-BSS releases V14.2 andV14.3. Throughout this document, the user will be able to distinguishwhether a parameter present in CT2000 DRF interface needs to befilled or not, depending upon the actual network configuration.
1.2 Different types of configuration parametersThere are two types of configuration parameters: customer andmanufacturer parameters.
• Customer parameters:
— addressing parameters, which are relative to objects (for example:bsc number)
— design parameters, which are relative to contract characteristics(for example: configRef, SiteName)
— optimization parameters, which are relative to network tuning (forexample: cellReselectHysteresis)
— operating parameters, which are relative to network operation (forexample: cellBarred)
• Manufacturer parameters:
— system parameters, which can seriously affect system operation,and which must be under the control of the manufacturer (forexample: runPwrControl)
— product parameters, which are incompatible with the current systemrelease (for example: sWVersionbackup)
New configuration parameters are summarized in Appendix A “Objects andparameters evolution” (page 535).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
50 Chapter 1 Introduction
1.3 Description of dictionary entriesEach parameter is described separately and arranged in alphabeticalorder.
Dictionary entries fall into two parts:
• the header line
• the main body, composed of several fields
1.3.1 Header lineThe header line contains some or all of the following information (seefollowing figure):
• the name of the OMC-R parameter
• the class of the parameter (if any)
• the BSS version from which it applies
Figure 10Header line
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
1.3 Description of dictionary entries 51
1.3.2 Main body of entriesThe main body contains up to nine fields:
• Description: parameter definition
• Value range: displayed in square brackets and the unit if anyExample: [2 to 300] seconds
• Object: object name(s) in which the parameter is defined
• Default value: value which allows to deactivate the function
• Type: parameter type. The five accepted values are the following:
type meaning is handled by theConfigurationManagement application
is handled by anyother applications(4)
DD Dynamic data(1)
X X (5)
DI Internal data (2) X
DP Permanent data(3)
X X (6)
DS Static data X
Id Identifier X X (7)
(1) : Dynamic parameters (DD) are not stored in databases. Theyare managed by the BSC applications, and they can be consulted onoperator request.(2) : Internal parameters (DI) are stored in the OMC-R operationdatabase (BDE) and are not sent to Network Elements. They supplyadditional information on how an object is configured at a given time.They can be consulted on operator request and some of them can alsobe modified.(3) : Permanent parameters (DP) are stored in the applicationdatabase (BDA) and in the operation database (BDE). Most of themare mandatory and they are defined with the object that uses them.They are managed by the operator.(4) : Fault Management, Performance Management, CommandFunctions, etc.(5) : parameter displayed in command output(6) : parameter entered by users(7) : parameter which is either entered by users, or displayed incommand output
• Condition: It indicates the necessary conditions in which theparameter can be used.
• Checks: Semantic checks performed by the OMC-R are indicated withthe Create [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
52 Chapter 1 Introduction
• Feature: Field introduced from V12. It indicates the reference of theFeature that impacts the parameter description.
• Restrictions: Applicable restrictions are indicated with the Create [C],Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.
• Remark: optional field containing comments.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
53.
Chapter 2 Parameters listed inalphabetical order
For a BSC 3000, there are no more class 1 parameters; all theseparameters are now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parametershave not changed.
AabisSpy Class 3
Description : Whether measurement reports from the BTS and themobiles are forwarded to the BSC in order to spy on theAbis Interface.
The number of measurement reports on SICD and SICD8vis limited only for BSC 2G.
Value range : [in progress / not in progress]
Object : bts
Default value : not in progress
Type: DP
absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2
Description : Radio frequency used in the network frequency band by aradio time slot that does not obey frequency hopping laws.
Setting this attribute forbids the radio time slot to obeyfrequency hopping laws.
The frequency of the radio time slot that carries a cellBCCH in a TDMA frame (channelType = "mainBCCH","mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH") isnot managed by users. When the parent bts object is
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
54 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
unlocked, the system automatically assigns the cellbCCHFrequency to the concerned channel object andupdates it whenever it is changed.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 1023] / [0 / 55] (GSM-R).
Object : channel
Condition : To define if the TDMA does not hop
Type : DP
• [C/M] :The attribute is undefined when theradio time slot is authorized to hop or itschannelType is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH".
• [C/M] :The attribute is defined when the radiotime slot is not authorized to hop andits channelType is "tCHFull", "sDCCH","sdcch8CBCH", or "cCH".
• [C/M] :When defined, the frequency is one ofthose allotted to the parent bts object(cellAllocation list).
• [M] :Concentric cell: When defined, thefrequency is not used by the channel objectsrelated to the transceiver objects allotted tothe other cell zone.
Checks :
• [C/M]:If the frequency hopping is not used, theabsoluteRFChannelNo attribute indicatesa radio frequency number which is locatedbetween [0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to’Rgsm.’
access time end
Description : Time of the day after which the user is not allowed to log in.It is after access time start.
Value range : [<time> (18:00)]
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] :access time end is after access time start.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 55
access time start
Description : Time of the day after which the user is allowed to log in.
Value range : [<time> (09:00)]
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] :access time start is before access timeend.
accessClassCongestion Class 3
Description : List of access classes that are not authorized in a cellduring TCH congestion phase (class 10 not included).
Value range : [0 to 9] User classes[11 to 15] Operator classes
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V9
accessibilityState
Description : MSC accessibility state
[reachable / congested / unReachable]
• reachable.................The remote signaling point iswithin reach.
• congested.................80% of the BSC pool ofbuffers handling outgoingMSC messages is full.
Value range :
• unReachable......The remote signaling point isout of reach.
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DD
acknowledged by
Description : To select alarms acknowledged by a given user. Enter theuser’s name as defined in the user’s profile.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
56 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
acknowledgment time
Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
activationObject
Description : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC-R.
Value range : [bscId range]
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
• [C]:The bsc object is created.Checks :
• [C]:The callPathTrace object is not created for thebsc object. The Call path tracing function isunique in a given BSS.
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
activationObject
Description : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC-R.
Value range : [bscId range]
Object : traceControl
Type : DP
• [C]:The bsc object is created.Checks :
• [C]:The traceControl object is not created for thebsc object. The Call tracing function is uniquein a given BSS.
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
active (passive) chain disk state
Description : Chain disk state
Value range : [Working, Degraded, Partially degraded, Not significant]
Object : bsc
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 57
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain Dmux state
Description : State of passive equipment of chain controlled by ECIboard via alarm loops.
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain ECI board state
Description : Chain ECI board state
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain REM link state
Description : Used BSC/OMC-R link state
Value range : [Working / Degraded / Partially degraded / Not significant]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V11
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain Sic board state
Description : Chain SIC board state
Value range : [Number, card type (CCS7, SICD, SICX), internal state(working, fault)]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
58 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain sic channels state
Description : Chain SIC channel state (LAPD and SS7 channel state)
Value range : [num card / type Card (Lapd sic, ss7 sic, X25 sic) / sicboard port number / state Card (working/fault)]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain sls board state
Description : SLS board state
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain state
Description : Chain state
Value range : [nominal state, deteriorated state]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain switching capacity
Description : Chain switching capacity
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 59
active (passive) chain tcu accessibility
Description : Chain TCU state
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active (passive) chain ute board state
Description : DDTI, BSCB, TSCB, and ALA board state
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
active rem link
Description : BSC/OMC-R link used.
Value range : [rem link 0, rem link 1]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
activeChain
Description : Identifier of the BSC active chain.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
60 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Description: Allows a return to the initial receiver processingfor either peculiar cell configurations or both ofthem.In a first step, the parameter is a simple switch,but more than one bit should be allocated tohandle later extensions (automatic recognitionof configurations requiring the initial receiverprocessing).
Value range: 0/1 (0 : disabled, 1: enabled)
Object: transceiver
Default value: disabled
Type: DP
Release: V17
Note: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
It is visible only in GPRS.
additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:
• BTS 18000
• S12000
• S8000 BTS with BCF
• S8000 BTS with CBCF
• S8002 BTS with CBCF
• S2000 H/L BTS
• e-cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 0 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 61
Type : DP
Release : V12
additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:
• BTS 18000
• S12000
• S8000 BTS with BCF
• S8000 BTS with CBCF
• S8002 BTS with CBCF
• S2000 H/L BTS
• e-cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 1 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Type : DP
Release : V12
additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:
• BTS 18000
• S12000
• S8000 BTS with BCF
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
62 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• S8000 BTS with CBCF
• S8002 BTS with CBCF
• S2000 H/L BTS
• e-cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 2 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Type : DP
Release : V12
additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:
• BTS 18000
• S12000
• S8000 BTS with BCF
• S8000 BTS with CBCF
• S8002 BTS with CBCF
• S2000 H/L BTS
• e-cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 3 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 63
additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:
• BTS 18000
• S12000
• S8000 BTS with BCF
• S8000 BTS with CBCF
• S8002 BTS with CBCF
• S2000 H/L BTS
• e-cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 4 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Type : DP
Release : V12
additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:
• BTS 18000
• S12000
• S8000 BTS with BCF
• S8000 BTS with CBCF
• S8002 BTS with CBCF
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
64 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• S2000 H/L BTS
• e-cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 5 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Type : DP
Release : V12
additional unmasked users alarms Class 2
Description : Configuration of the new user (unprotected) external alarmloops controlled by the BTS (added to the already existingunprotected external alarms, see parameter "unmaskedusers alarms"). These additional alarms are detected bythe RECAL board of the main cabinet. When an alarm isunmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitoredby the BTS.
There are 24 additional user (unprotected) alarms on theS8002 BTS, 14 alarms on the S8000 Outdoor BTS, and 20alarms on the S8000 Indoor BTS.
A user alarm is used when an external item of equipment isinserted in the BTS (a microwave terminal for instance) anddoes not require a new DLU.
Value range : [All alarms maskedAlarm 1 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 2 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 3 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 4 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 5 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 6 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 7 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 8 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 9 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 10 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 11 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 12 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 13 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 14 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 15 unmasked
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 65
Alarms 1 to 16 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 17 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 18 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 19 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 20 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 21 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 22 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 23 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 24 unmasked]
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM-R V12
Type : DP
Release : V12
addresses
Description : Definition of the OMC-R user(s) to whom the message isaddressed.
Select the all option to send the message to all OMC-Rusers.
Select the users option to send the message to selectedOMC-R users. Enter their names as defined in their profiles[case sensitive], separated by the "&" character.
Object : user message - Answer / New message
Type : DP
adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3
Description : Identifier of the adjacentCelHandOver object that describesthe neighbor cell towards which a directed retry will betriggered in BSC mode.
Value range : [0 to 31]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The preferential umbrella cell must refer to anexisting adjacentCellHandOver object instance.
• [C/M]:When the function "directed retry" is madeby interrogation of the BTS, the preferentialumbrella cell must not be indicated.
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
66 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
adjacentCellHandOver
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that defines aneighbor cell of a serving cell for handover managementpurposes. A bts object may reference up to thirty-twoobjects of this type.
Value range : [0 to 31]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : Id
• [C]:The associated bts object is created and theadjacentCellHandOver object is not created forthat object.
• [C]:The number of adjacentCellHandOverobjects created for a bts object is limited tomaxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configurationdata).
• [C/M]:The (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency,networkColourCode) combination is unique inthe set including a serving cell and its neighborcells.
• [C/D]:If the related BSC application database is built,the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M/D]:The adjacentCellHandOver object is created.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No mdScanner object refers to theadjacentCellHandOver object (no observationis running on that object).
Checks :
• [D]:At least one adjacentCellHandOver objectshould be created for the bts object.
Release : V8
adjacentCellHandOverId
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that definesre-selection management parameters for a serving cell.A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of thistype.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 67
Type : DP
Release : V14
adjacentCellReselection
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that definesre-selection management parameters for a serving cell.A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objects of thistype.
Value range : [0 to 31]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : Id
• [C]:The bts object is created and theadjacentCellReselection object is notcreated for that object.
• [C]:The number of adjacentCellReselectionobjects created for a bts object is limited tomaxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configurationdata).
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M/D]:The adjacentCellReselection object is created.
Checks :
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
Release : V8
adjacentCellReselectionId
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that definesre-selection management parameters for a serving cell.A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of thistype.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
68 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
administrativeState
Description : Activation state of an alarm criteria.
An alarm criteria is created in unlocked state.
The OMC-R Fault Management function ignores theinactive criteria when processing notifications.
Value range : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : atmRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A bsc object is created in locked state.
Object : bsc
Type : DP
• [M]:If mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode are defined for the bsc object, they matchthose of all dependent bts objects.
• [M]:The lapdLinkOMLRef attributes of alldependent transcoder objects refer to lapdLinkobjects using the same lapdTerminalNumberin the BSC.
The following check is only performed when the bsc objectis unlocked:
Checks :
• The dependent software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a softwareversion downloaded to the BSC disk.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 69
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A bscMdInterface object is created in unlocked state.
When the object is locked, the BSC involved in theBSS/OMC-R link described by this object cannotcommunicate with the OMC-R.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The concerned bsc object is unlocked.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
A bts object is created in locked state.
When the object is unlocked, the described cell will beworking if the carrier TDMA frame (or BCCH frame)is successfully configured in the BTS and at least<minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames (including the carrierframe) are operating.
Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]
Object : bts
Type : DP
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M]:It is not possible to change from"shuttingD own" to "unlocked" orfrom "locked" to "shuttingDown".
• [M]:It is not possible to change to"shuttingDown" if the applicationdatabase of the related BSC is notbuilt.
The following checks are only performed when the btsobject is unlocked:
Checks :
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
70 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• The associated handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the bts object.
• The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCodeattributes match those of the parent bsc object whenthey are defined for that object.
• The frequencies in the cellAllocation list comply withthe standardIndicator attribute value.
• The minNbOfTDMA attribute value is less than orequal to the number of transceiver objects created forthe bts object.
• Cavity cell: The number of dependent transceiverobjects equals the number of frequencies in thecellAllocation list.
• Eight channel objects are created for each dependenttransceiver object if the cell works in normal mode,four channel objects are created for each dependenttransceiver object if the cell works in extended mode.
The following apply:
• Only one of them has a channelType equalto "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".
• If the smsCB attribute of the bts object is "used", oneof them has a channelType equal to "sdcc8CBCH" or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".
• Concentric cell:
— Two transceiverZone objects are created for thebts object.
— Each dependent transceiver object refers to atransceiverZone object (transceiver zone Ref isdefined).
— All channel objects describing the cell BCCH orcommon channels (channelType = "cCH") dependon transceiver objects allotted to the outer zone.
— If frequency hopping is allowed in a zone (zonefrequency hopping), it is allowed in the cell(btsIshopping).
— The frequencies used by the transceiver objects ina zone are separate from the frequencies used bythe transceiver objects in the other zone.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 71
Releasing a bts object by shutting down sustains the callssupported by the described cell. The system actions areas follows:
• Radio resources remain allocated until the calls end.
• Once a TDMA frame is released, a CLEAR CONFIGREQUEST message is sent to the partneredTRX/DRX.
• When all calls are terminated, the cell is released(administrativeState = "locked" and operationalState= "disabled") and the concerned TRX/DRXs andTDMA frames are unreachable (availabilityStatus ="{dependency}".
Notes : • It is recommended to bar direct access to the cellbefore initiating a soft release (cellBarred = "barred"),to prevent off-call mobiles from listening to the cellduring the soft release phase, so they can immediatelyre-select another cell for receiving or sending calls.
• It is recommended also to forbid incoming handovers inthe cell (incomingHandOver = "disabled"), to removethe cell from the list of eligible cells and, thus, avoid itsselection if the BTS receives such a request.
• In order to speed up the soft release process, theForce HandOvers command can be used first toredirect the traffic currently handled by the serving celltowards its neighbor cells.
• If a hard lock request is sent during the soft releasephase, all the calls supported by the cell areimmediately released by the BSC.
• If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A btsSiteManager object is created in locked state.
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
72 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.Checks :
The following checks are only performed when thebtsSiteManager object is unlocked:
• The scheduled time slot (pcmTimeSlotNumber) ismasked in the btsSiteManager object radioSiteMask.
• The radioSiteMask of all btsSiteManager objectssharing a same PCM link in the BSS are dissociatedand their scheduled time slots are different and maskedin their radioSiteMask.
• The bscSitePcmList list includes at least two items ifthe btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresenceattribute is "true".
• All pcmCircuit objects referenced in the list(pcmCircuitBsc components) are created for theparent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface.
• One of them identifies a PCM link with a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference in the range [0 to 3] for clocksynchronization.
• The greatest bts object identifier must be lower thanthe maxNbOfCells value of the parent btsSiteManagerobject.
• The configRef attribute defines a DLU file downloadedto the BSC disk.
• The dependent software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a softwareversion downloaded to the BSC disk.
• If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of dataand the generation of the associated messages.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlockthe object to start collecting data in the related BSC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 73
In that case, data collecting is stopped in the related BSC.However, current messages are stored by the BSC andnotified to the OMC-R agent.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Notes : • If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object,the BSC continues to send the current trace messagesto the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued.
• If trace data collecting is stopped by locking theobject or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, itis automatically restarted whenever the callPathTraceobject is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-sessioncriterion defines a period of time that elapsed, datacollecting will restart for the entire period.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : cc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : cem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : controlNode
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
74 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the transmission of theassociated messages to the OMC-R manager.
The administrativeState of an efd object is set by the userat object creation time and can be changed with the Modifycommand.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : efd
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : g3BscEqp
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : hardware transcoder 3G
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : iem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 75
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : interfaceNode
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : Activation state of a repeated job
A job object is created in unlocked state.
When a job is set inactive, it is not run.
Value range : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)]
Object : job
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The job is not running.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. It is set by the OMC-R agent.
Value range : [locked (= restored log) / unlocked (= current log)]
An unlocked log object describes a current log on theOMC-R agent disks. A locked log object describes a logrestored on the disks.
Object : log - Display
Type : DP
Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : lsaRc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
76 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the generation ofprocessed alarms when out-of-range conditions are met.
The administrativeState of an mdWarning object is set bythe user at object creation time and can be changed withthe Modify command.
A change of state is effective when the OMC-R is restarted.Whatever the state of the object, the related notificationsare always forwarded to the OMC-R manager.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : mms
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : omu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A pcmCircuit object is created in locked state.
Object : pcmCircuit
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 77
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A pcu object is created in locked state.
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Release : V12
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A signallingLink object is created in locked state.
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : sw8kRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : tmu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
78 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of dataand the generation of the associated messages.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data in the related BSC.
Object : traceControl
Type : DP
Notes : • If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object,the BSC continues to send the current trace messagesto the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued.
• If traced calls are not terminated when the object islocked, all trace information related to those calls will belost, unless partial record generation was requested.In that case, only data that are not yet recorded will belost.
• Trace data collecting is automatically restarted in theBSC whenever the traceControl object is unlocked.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]
A transceiverEquipment object is created in locked state.
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M]:It is not possible to change from "shuttingDown" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to"shuttingDown".
• [M]:It is not possible to change to "shuttingDow n"if the application database of the related BSCis not built.
Checks :
The following checks are only performed when thetransceiverEquipment object is unlocked:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 79
• The lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLink RSLRef attributesof the transceiverEquipment object refer to lapdLinkobjects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in theparent BSC.
• The related software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a softwareversion downloaded to the BSC disk.
Releasing a transceiverEquipment object by shutting downsustains the calls supported by the described TRX/DRXand the partnered TDMA frame. The system actions whichmay be carried out are the following:
• To carry out a soft release. This action does notautomatically cause a handover. By carrying out thisaction, the operator must wait for the end of the comsbefore the TRX/DRX changes to "blocked".
• To carry out a forced handover. A forced handover onthe bts object will cause the DRX/TRX to change to"blocked" more quickly.
• If the TDMA frame affected by this operation has priorityover other frames in the BSS, the BSC re-configuresthat frame on a different TRX/DRX and immediatelytransfers the current calls handled by the TRX/DRXbeing released.
• When all calls are transferred or terminated, theTRX/DRX is released (administrativeState ="locked" and operationalState = "disabled"), and thepartnered TDMA frame is unreachable if it has not beenreconfigured (availabilityStatus = "{dependency}".
Note : If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase,all the calls handled by the TRX/DRX are immediatelyreleased by the BSC.
If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A transcoder object is created in locked state.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
80 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.Checks :
The following checks are only performed when thetranscoder object is unlocked:
• All transcoder objects created for the same parentbsc object refer to lapdLink objects that use the samelapdTerminalNumber in the BSC.
• <maxTranscdBPerTransed> dependenttranscoderBoard objects are created for thetranscoder object.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A transcoderBoard object is created in locked state.
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DP
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.Checks :
The following check is only performed when thetranscoderBoard object is unlocked:
The related software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a software versiondownloaded to the BSC disk.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : trm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 81
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]
An xtp object is created in locked state.
Object : xtp
Type : DP
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M]:It is not possible to change from "shuttingDown" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to"shuttingDown".
• [M]:It is not possible to change to "shuttingDown"if the application database of the related BSCis not built.
Checks :
The BSC will refuse to unlock a terrestrial traffic circuit thatcould break the OMC channel connection down.
Releasing an xtp object by shutting down sustains the callsupported by the described terrestrial traffic circuit. Thesystem actions are as follows:
• Any further attempt of the MSC to allocate the terrestrialcircuit is refused.
• When the call is completed, the terrestrial circuitis released (administrativeState = "locked" andoperationalState = "disabled").
Notes : • All terrestrial circuits supported by a given PCM link canbe softly released at the same time. If the PCM linksupports a signaling link, it remains operating.
• If a hard lock request is sent during the soft releasephase, the call supported by the terrestrial circuit isimmediately released by the BSC.
agprsFilterCoefficient Class 3
Description : The load of each cell considered in dynamic AGPRSalgorithm is filtered with a forgetting factor given byagprsFilterCoefficient.
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : bts
Default value : 0 (deactivates the feature in the cell at the PCU level).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
82 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V14
agprsHysteresis Class 3
Description : Not used.
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Note : For a BSC version later than V15, agprsHysteresis is notavailable at the OMC-R.
Type : DP
Release : V14
agprsThreshold Class 3
Description : Not used.
Value range : [not used]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Note : For a BSC version later than V15, agprsThreshold is notavailable at the OMC-R.
Type : DP
Release : V14
agprsTsSharingProtection Class 2
Description : Protection Timer in case of BSC overload.
Value range : [0 to 255] seconds
Object : pcu
Default value : 0.
Note : Values from 0 to 9 are assimilated by PCU like 10.
Note : For a BSC version later than V15, agprsTsSharingProtection is not available at the OMC-R, and PCU automaticallyset it to 10.
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 83
agpsTimer Class 3
Description : Duration of an A-GPS location.
Value range : [0 to 255] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 0 second
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional.
aLAIntState
Description : The internal state of the BSC ALA board.
Value range : [working / fault]
• working .... The board is correctly configured.
• fault ... The board configuration was unsuccessful.
Object : bsc and hardware BSC 12000HC
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
alarm criteria
Description : Active alarm configuration.
Value range : [day configuration / night configuration / specificconfiguration / reference configuration]
The active configuration is the alarm criteria configurationcurrently used by the OMC-R Fault Management functionfor fault processing.
The names given to the alarm operating configurations(day / night / specific) only serve to identify them. Anyconfiguration may be activated at any time by users, butonly one can be active at a time.
Object : omc
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
84 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Notes : • When the OMC-R is started up or the active server isswitched over, the OMC-R activates the configurationthe name of which corresponds to the time of the daythat start-up or switchover occurs. The following apply:
— The daytime configuration is activated when theevent occurs between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.(static configuration data).
— The nighttime configuration is activated when theevent occurs between 6:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m.(static configuration data).
• The active configuration can be forced by users atany other time. If a problem occurs while loading theselected configuration, the OMC-R uses the referenceconfiguration and sends a warning message to the user.
alarm criteria
Description : Identifier of an alarm criterion on the OMC-R.
Value range : [0 to 99 999] (manufacturer configuration)
Users can lock / unlock alarmcriteria which IDs are lower than100 000.
Users can create / modify / delete criteria, which IDs aregreater than or equal to 100 000.
Object : alarm criteria
Type : Id
• [C]:The alarm criteria identifier is in the range [100001 to 2 147 483 646].
• [C]:The alarm criteria does not exist in the operatorconfigurations.
Checks :
• [M/D]:The alarm criteria exists in the operatorconfigurations.
alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a given number.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 85
alarm severity
Description : To select alarms according to the severity.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [critical / major / minor]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
alarm state
Description : To select alarms according to the acknowledgement state.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [acknowledged / unacknowledged]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
alarmDuration
Description : Alarm hold duration when a counter is involved.
Value range : [0 to 345600] second
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
alarmListConverter
Description : State of the TCU converters
Value range : [working / failed]
Object : transcoder
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
alarmListFan
Description : State of the TCU fans
Value range : [working / failed]
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
86 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
alarmListFanBoard
Description : State of the TCU fan boards
Value range : [working / failed]
Object : transcoder
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
alarmListVCOTension
Description : State of the TCU VCO voltage.
Value range : [working / failed]
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
alarmPriority
Description : Alarm processing priority.
Value range : [CLEARED / critical / indeterminate / major / minor /warning]
There are six defined priority levels which provide anindication of how it is perceived that the capability ofthe managed object has been affected. The followingdefinitions are used:
• CLEARED: ......The cleared severity levelindicates the clearing of oneor more previously reportedalarms. This alarm clearsall alarms for this managedobject that have the sametype, probable cause, andspecific problems.
• critical: .........The critical severity levelindicates that a serviceaffecting condition hasoccurred and an immediatecorrective action is required.
• indeterminate: ....The indeterminate severitylevel indicates that theseverity level of the serviceaffecting condition cannot bedetermined.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 87
• major: ..........The major severity levelindicates that a serviceaffecting condition hasdeveloped and a deferredcorrective action is required.
• minor: ..........The minor severity levelindicates the existence of anon-service affecting faultcondition and that a correctiveaction should be taken inorder to prevent a moreserious fault.
• warning: .........The warning severity levelindicates the detection of apotential or impending serviceaffecting fault, before anysignificant effects have beenfelt. An action should betaken to further diagnose andcorrect the problem in orderto prevent it from becoming amore serious service affectingfault.
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
algoId class 2
Description : Definition of the speech algorithms used in a TCB.
This parameter is a component of the algorithm Usedattribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [full rate / enhanced full rate]
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : full rate
Type : DP
Release : V8
algorithm Used Class 2
Description : Speech processing algorithm parameters used in the SPUprocessors of a TCB.
Value range : algoId = [full rate / full rate & enhanced full rate],powerDownLink = [-15 to +15] dB,powerUpLink = [-15 to +15] dB.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
88 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• algoId ..........speech algorithms used
• powerDownLink ...power gain on the downlink
• powerUpLink .....power gain on the uplink
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The algoId component contains "full rate".
• [C/M]:The algoId component also contains "enhancedfull rate" if the parent transcoder object versionattribute value is "TCB_2".
Release : V8
allocationState
Description : TDMA frame allocation state
Value range : [available / not available / not significant]
• available .................The SACCH FILLINGmessages containing theSYS INFO 5 and 6 have beenacknowledged by the BTS.
• not available ....The SACCH FILLINGmessages containing theSYS INFO 5 and 6 have notbeen acknowledged by theBTS.
• not significant ....The SACCH FILLINGmessages containing theSYS INFO 5 and 6 have notbeen sent to the BTS by theBSC.
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
allocPriorityTable Class 3
Description : Table of conversion of the 18 external priorities (14 areGSM external priorities) to 13 internal priorities. (SeeDefault value below.)
Value range : [0 to 7] (BSS V14 and V12) "0" defines the highest priority,[0 to 12] (BSS V15) "0" defines the highest priority.
Object : bts
Feature : WPS queuing management (22463)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 89
Default value : BSS V15: 0 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0BSS V12 or V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type : DP
allocPriorityThreshold Class 3
Description : Number of free TCHs needed for processing a TCHallocation request with an internal priority higher than 1.
These channels are reserved to allocation requests with amaximum internal priority (priority 0).
The TCH allocation is performed according to thisalgorithm:
Number of freeTCH = 0
1 ≤ Number of freeTCH ≤
allocPriorityThreshold
Number of free TCH> allocPriorityThreshold
TCH request ofpriority 0
- queueing ifdefined or- reject
TCH allocated TCH allocated
TCH request ofpriority >0
- queueing ifdefined or- reject
- queueing if definedor- reject
TCH allocated
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
allocPriorityTimers Class 3
Description : Table of timers defining the maximum queuing time of TCHallocation requests (public and WPS requests), accordingto the internal priority.
Value range : [List of 8 elements for BSS V12 and V14]: [0-255] seconds[List of 13 elements for BSS V15]: [0-255] seconds
Object : bts
Feature : WPS queuing management (22463)
Default value : For BSS V15: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28 28 28 28 28For BSS V12 and V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
90 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
allocWaitThreshold Class 3
Description : Table of thresholds defining the maximum number of TCHallocation requests queued (public and WPS), according totheir internal priority.
Value range : [List of 8 elements for BSS V12 and V14]: [0-63][List of 13 elements for BSS V15]: [0-63]
Object : bts
Feature : WPS queuing management (22463)
Default value : For BSC V15: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5For BSS V12 and V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type : DP
allOtherCasesPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "othercases".
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when anSDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
amrAdaptationSet Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for theadaptation mechanism.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance in unlocked.
Value range : Int [0 to 3]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 91
Note : This parameter is available for all BSCs 3000 andapplicable to versions earlier than V15.1.1.
Note : For a V15.1.1 BSC, amrAdaptationSet is replacedby the following parameters: amrDlFrAdaptationSet,amrDlHrAdaptationSet, amrUlFrAdaptationSet, andamrUlHrAdaptationSet. Refer to these entries in thisdictionary. amrAdaptationSet is however present at theOMC-R.
amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL Class 3
Description : Downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocationin the inner zone.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : Int [-110 to -47]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -80 to -79 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • 057CO01- amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL >=concentAlgoIntRxLev whereconcentAlgoIntRxLev is intRxLev inthe ConcentAlgoData sequence ofconcentAlgoData attribute.
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL Class 3
Description : Uplink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation inthe inner zone.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : Int [110 to 48]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -80 to -79 dB
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
92 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrDirectAllocRxLevDL Class 3
Description : Downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : Int [-110 to -47]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -80 to -79 dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrDirectAllocRxLevUL Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the downlink RxLev threshold fordirect AMR TCH allocation.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : Int [-110 to -47]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -80 to -79 dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrDlFrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for thedownlink AMR full rate adaptation mechanism.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 3]
Type : DP
Feature : AMR Optimizations
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 93
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
amrDlHrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for thedownlink AMR half rate adaptation mechanism.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 3]
Type : DP
Feature : AMR Optimizations
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
amrFRIntercellCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intercell quality handoverfrom a RR channel.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : [12.2 / 10.2 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 4.75
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrFRIntracellCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intracell quality handoverFR to FR.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
94 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Value range : [12.2 / 10.2 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 4.75
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrHRIntercellCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intercell quality handoverfrom an HR channel.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : [7.4 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 4.75
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrHRToFRIntraCodecMode Class 3
Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intracell quality handoverfrom AMR HR to FR.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : [7.4 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 6.7
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 95
amriRxLevDLH Class 3
Description : This attribute is the downlink RxLev threshold in case ofAMR FR intracell handover.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : [-110 to -47]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -75 to -74 dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amriRxLevULH Class 3
Description : This attribute is the uplink RxLev threshold in case of AMRFR intracell handover.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.
Value range : Int [-110 to -47]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : - 75 to - 74 dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrReserved1
Description : See information contained in the Attention paragraphbelow.
Value range : [0 to 2]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V16
Note 1: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
96 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
ATTENTIONParameter range evolution for amrReserved 1 is as follows:
• 0: RATSCCH procedure enabled (default value)
• 1: RATSCCH procedure disabled - initial Full Rate ACS is optimistic
• 2: RATSCCH procedure disabled - initial Full Rate ACS is pessimistic
amrReserved2 Class 3
Description : AMR L1m deactivation for:
AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality inter-cellhandover and AMR power control mechanism.
This parameter is available at the OMC-R level, managedby all NRPs, except the AMR activation NRP and thisparameter is not managed by the CT2000 and the SDO.
Value range : [0 to 3]
Deactivations for this parameter are:
Value 0 (default): AMR L1m algorithms are used.
Value 1: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality intercell handover are deactivated, but the AMR power controlis activated.
Value 2: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality intercell handover are activated, and the AMR power control isdeactivated.
Value 3: AMR FR intracell handover, AMr quality inter cellhandover and the AMR power control are deactivated.
Object : handOverControl
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
amrUlFrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for theuplink AMR full rate adaptation mechanism.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 3]
Type : DP
Feature : AMR Optimizations
Default value : 0
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 97
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
amrUlHrAdaptationSet class 3
Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for theuplink AMR half rate adaptation mechanism.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 3]
Type : DP
Feature : AMR Optimizations
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1
answerPagingPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "reply topaging".
This priority is used in signaling mode on TCH only.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
architecture
Description : Architecture of the OMC-R agent in terms of servers. It isprovided by the OMC-R agent.
The standard configuration is "one active with one passive"and the basic configuration is "one active without passive".
Value range : [dual servers but passive not runningdual servers runningsingle server running]
Object : md - Display
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
98 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
assignRequestPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "immediateassignment".
This priority is used when radio resource allocationqueueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorizedin the BSS (refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in theDictionary).
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
associatedInterface Class 0
Description : Interface on which a LAPD link is used.
Value range : [Abis / Ater / Agprs]
A LAPD link used on the Abis interface carries BTSsignaling.
A LAPD link used on the Ater interface carries TCUsignaling.
A LAPD link used on the Agprs interface carries PCUsignaling.
Object : lapdLink
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The value is whether "Abis" or "Agprs" ifthe lapdConcentration attribute value is"disabled".
• [C]:The value is whether "Abis" or "Ater" ifthe lapdConcentration attribute value is"enabled".
• [C]:The "Agprs" value is only allowed for PCUlapdLink interface from V12 BSCs.
Restrictions : • [M] :This attribute cannot be modified.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 99
associatedLog
Description : Identifier of the log object that describes the associatedrecords on the OMC-R agent disks.
For an mdScanner object, this attribute is displayed providedmdLog = "logged".
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : callPathTrace, mdScanner, traceControl - Display
Type : DI
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
associatedTMUPosition
Description : Gives the number of the TMU hosting the active associatedcore process (hardware slot position).
Value range : [Shelf Number (0 or 1) and Slot Number (from 1 to 15) ofthe TMU]
Object : btsSiteManager, signallingLinkSet, transcoder and pcu
Feature : BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing - stage 1(139111).
Default value : None
Type : DD
Release : V13
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
aterLapd
Description : ATER LAPD distribution and status.
Value range : List of ATER LAPD descriptions [pcmAterId, tsAterId,lapdIsPresent, lapdIsOpened], with:pcmAterId: 0 to 65535tsAterId: 0 to 65535lapdIsPresent: yes / nolapdIsOpened: yes / no
Object : lsaRc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement
Type : DD
Release : V16
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
100 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
atmRm
Description : The ATM RM (ATM Resource Module), which provides aSONET OC-3c (Optical Carrier level 3c) interface to allowdirect connection between the Interface Node and theControl Node.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : atmRm
Type : DP
Release : V13
atmRmId
Description : Identifier of the ’atmRm’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : atmRm
Type : DP
Release : V13
attenuation Class 2
Description : Attenuation due to coupling system losses. This valuedepends on the BTS configuration.
Value range : [0 to 14] dB
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : Depends on the equipment.
Type : DP
Release : V9
Note : If the attenuation parameter is set [0 to 14], then theDLU attenuation is replaced by the OMC attenuationparameter.
auditBdaStatus
Description : Synthetic result of a BDA audit
Value range : [no difference / some differences (see list below) / manydifferences (see partial list below)]
The information is stored in sessions logs.
• no difference ......Object instances in BDA andBDE are identical.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 101
• some differences ...Less than ten object instancesare different in BDA and BDE(they are listed in the sessionlogs).
• many differences ..More than ten objectinstances are different inBDA and BDE (the first tenare listed in the session logs).
Object : bsc
Type : DI
auditState
Description : Whether an audit is in-progress in the BSC. Access toa BSC are blocked whenever an audit of its applicationdatabase is in-progress (Audit BDA command).
This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directlymodified by users.
When an audit is in-progress in a BSC, all configurationcommands involving the BSS are forbidden.
Value range : [inProgress / notInProgress]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
authorised user
Description : List of the users authorized to copy, display and run thecommand file. Enter their names as defined in their profilesand use the "&" character to separate them.
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinationsfor these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus,operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {disabled} / {failed} ]
Object : bsc, bscMdInterface, lapdLink, pcmCircuit, signallingLink,transcoder
transcoderBoard.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
102 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DD
Note : The availabilityStatus parameter is only available forlapdLink OML and lapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinationsfor these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus,operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {disabled} / {failed} / {unknown}]
Object : btsSiteManager, transceiver, transceiverEquipment,
Type : DD
Note : If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
The "enabled" state for a bts object is a transitorystate that follows a soft release request. Refer to theadministrativeState entry related to the bts object in theDictionary.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed} /{unknown}]
Object : bts
Type : DD
Note : If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Value range : {notInstalled}/{}/{failed}/{dependency}/{}]
Object : atmRM, cc, cem, controlNode, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc,mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A 103
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
The "logFull" state applies to a log object that describesan observation or trace log, and indicates that the savingmessage directory on the OMC-R agent disks is full. Referto the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [{} / {logFull}]
Object : log
Type : DD
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Value range : [{} (the associated observation is running) / {offDuty} (theassociated observation has ended)]
Object : mdScanner
Type : DD
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinations:administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DD
Release : V12
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinations:availabilityStatus and operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DD
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
104 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinations:administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState,and usageState.
A state change notification is issued after the soft release.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : xtp
Type : DD
available synchronization sources
Description : Available synchronization sources gives all thesynchronization signals detected by the BTS, regardlessof the BTS current synchronization mode and of thesynchronization mode selected at the OMC.
This parameter is used in response of the "Display DataInformation" (normal) action.
Value range : [Abis synchronization only / Abis + external synchronizationsource coming from a master BTS / Abis + GPS connectiondetected]
Object : bts
Feature : BTS synchronization
averagingPeriod Class 2
Description : Number of SACCH multi-frames over which theinterference levels are averaged. This averaging will beperformed immediately before the transmission of theRESOURCE INDICATION message.
This attribute, together with the "thresholdInterference"attribute, allows users to manage interferences in radiocells. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 255] SACCH frame (1 unit = 480 ms on TCH, 470 mson SDCCH)
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 20
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 105
Bbackup manager addresses
Description : Backup addresses of the OMC-R manager that receives themessages. They are provided by the manager.
Object : efd - Display
Type DI
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
backupServer
Description : Name of the backup OMC-R agent server if any. It isprovided by the OMC-R agent.
In a mono-server configuration with redundancy, thisattribute is not filled in.
Object : md - Display
Type : DP
baseColourCode Class 3
Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a neighbor cell. The(BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
baseColourCode Class 2
Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a serving cell. It isbroadcast on the cell SCH and is used to distinguish cellsthat share the same BCCH frequency.
The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.
The information is broadcasted on the cell SCH.
Several BCCs may be assigned to a same BTS. Hence,different codes can be allotted to cells that may haveoverlapping areas (adjacent cells).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
106 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a 6-bit code: bits6-5-4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3-2-1 = BCC (Basestation color code). At cell level, the NCC bits can be used toincrease BCC color possibilities when the NCC is not needed.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination isunique in the set including a serving cell and itsneighbor cells.
• [M]:Modification of bCCHFrequency, baseColourCode and networkColourCode is forbidden whileinterference matrix is running.
batteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2
Description : Whether BRC (Battery Remote Controller) board is presentor not.
Value range : [0, 1]
• 0: Not present
• 1: present
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V15
bCCHFrequency Class 3
Description : Radio frequency allocated to a neighbor cell BCCH in thenetwork frequency band.
The information is broadcast on the serving cell SACCH.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 974] for GSM-R,[975 / 1023] / [0] for GSM-R (EGSM BCCH),[1 / 55] for GSM-R (PGSM BCCH).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 107
Note : The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm.
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
• [M]:The bCCHFrequency value must be setaccording to the standardIndicator attribute.
• [C/M]: For an adjacentCellHandOverNortel objectinstance, the bCCHFrequency can take one ofthe following values:[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[0 to 124] or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),
[0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] (GSM-R).
• [C]:Cannot create a new instance of adjacentCellUTRAN if the number ofdifferent bCCHFrequency parameters inadjacentCellHandOver object is equal to 32.The purpose of this check is to forbid UTRANneighbour cell creation if 32 different BCCHfrequencies are already declared for GSMneighbour cells.
• [C]:Cannot set the bCCHFrequency parameteron an adjacentCellHandOver object toa 32nd different value in the subset ofadjacentCellHandOver instances belonging tothe same upper bts if at least one instance ofadjacentCellUTRAN is created. The purposeof this check is to forbid existence 32 differentBCCH frequencies on the GSM neighbourcells under the same GSM cell if at least oneUTRAN neighbour cell is declared.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
108 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [M]:Modification of bCCHFrequency, baseColourCode and networkColourCode is forbidden whileinterference matrix is running.
• [C]:Customer should not validate IM activationon a cell with 32 instances of adjacentCell(existing IM control) or with 31 instancesof adjacentCell with 31 different values ofbCCFFrequeny parameter if at least oneinstance of adjacentCellUTRAN is created. Thepurpose of this check is to warn customer onIM activation if at least one UTRAN neighbourcell is declared and the cell already has realneighboring cells with 31 different BCCH.
bCCHFrequency Class 3
Description : Radio frequency used for selection and re-selectionmanagement.
The information is broadcast on the serving cell BCCH.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 974] for GSM-R,[975 / 1023] / [0] for GSM-R (EGSM BCCH),[1 / 55] for GSM-R (PGSM BCCH).
Note : The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm.
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The bCCHFrequency value must be setaccording to the standardIndicator attribute.
Checks : • [C/M]:For an adjacentCellReselection object instance,the bCCHFrequency can take one of thefollowing values:[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[0 to 124] or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] for GSM-R.
Note : An adjacentCellReselection object can use the same BCCHas the serving cell to which it is associated. This allowsa mobile to immediately recover the cell on which it was
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 109
"camping" after being switched off, then switched back on,and is especially useful in the selection process.
bCCHFrequency Class 2
Description : Radio frequency allocated to a cell BCCH (BroadcastControl CHannel) in the network frequency band.
The information is broadcast on the cell SACCH.
The BCCH frequency is automatically assigned to theradio time slot carrying the cell BCCH when the cell isbrought into service (absoluteRFChannelNo attribute ofthe channel object describing the carrier TDMA frame TS0).It is broadcast to the radio time slot whenever modified.
The BCCH is used by the BTS for broadcasting cell relatedsystem information to MS, such as frequency band andlist of frequency channels used, authorized servicesand access conditions, list of neighbor cells, and radioparameters (maximum transmission strength, minimumreception strength, etc.).
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 974] for GSM-R, if at least one of the cell allocationERFCN is in the [955 / 974] range, the BCCH must be alsoincluded within this range.[975 / 1023] / [0] (GSM-R (EGSM BCCH)),[1 / 55] (GSM-R (PGSM BCCH)).
Note : The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm.
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The BCCH frequency is included in thecellAllocation list.
• [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
• [M]:For a dualband cell, the bCCHFrequencyattribute must be in the primary band offrequencies.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
110 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bckgDLLayer3WindowSize Class 3
Description : Anticipation window size to be used in the context of BTSbackground downloading. It is used by SPR for BTS Abisdownloading.
Value range : [1..8]
Object : bsc
Default value : 1
Feature : BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading
Type : DP
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
bdaNewBscState
Description : Current bsc state related to the new BDA
Value range : [ready for on-line reset / running on-line reset / waiting foron-line build / waiting for software change / waiting for Bdachange / running software change / running Bda change /waiting for end of probative phase / { }]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Remark : This attribute is modified by the OMC-R agent whenprocessing "end of probative phase", "Activate New BDA","On line reset BDA", or "On-line reset cancel" actions orreceiving an unsolicited message sent by the BSC.
This attribute is NULL { } as long as the BSC has not beenconnected to the OMC-R agent.
Note : For a V10 BSC, this attribute is always NULL { }.
The different states are obtained according to the following:
• "ready for on-line reset": This state is reached after thefollowing occurrences:
— BSC complete restart
— "end of probative phase" or BDA "new" activation orreset on-line cancel succeeded
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 111
— partial or complete spontaneous BSC restart
— BSC operating command aborted
• "running on-line reset": BSC reset on-line is beingexecuted
• "waiting for on-line build": BSC reset on-line hassucceeded
• "waiting for software change": "BDA version" reseton-line has succeeded
• "waiting for Bda change": "BDA edition" reset on linehas succeeded
• "running software change": BSC Type 5 EFT activationis being executed
• "running Bda change": BSC BDA "new" activation isbeing executed
• "waiting for end of probative phase": BSC Type 5 EFTactivation has succeeded
Release : V11
bdaSelected
Description : Current BSC Application Database (BDA)
Value range : [running / new]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Remark : This attribute is modified by the MD-R when processing"On line reset BDA" actions or receiving a BSCspontaneous event.
This attribute is set "running" at the bsc object instancecreation
For a V10 BSC, this attribute is never modified and itsvalue is "running".
Note : The different states are obtained according to the following:
• "new": BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change
• "running": BSC upgrades without prototype BDAchange
Release : V11
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
112 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bdaState
Description : Whether the BSC application database (BDA) is built.No transactions with a BSC can be implemented prior tobuilding its application database.
When a bsc object is created or following a user Off linereset BDA command, the value of this attribute is "notbuilt".
This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directlymodified by users. It is updated by the system after a userBuild BDA command.
Value range : [built / not built / inconsistency]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
bdaVersionBuild
Description : Version number of the BSC application database forrebuilding purposes.
When the BSC is initialized or following a user Off linereset BDA command, the value of this attribute is "0" (BDAnot built). The BSC then sends a "build database request"message, indicating that its database is defective andneeds rebuilding.
By issuing a Build BDA command, the user informs theOMC-R that the BSC database must be regenerated.
Value range : [1 to 254]
Object : bsc - Build BDA
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:If the command follows a BSC architecturechange, the new architecture complies with theinformation in the last "build database request"message received from the BSC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 113
bdaVersionNumber
Description : Current version number of the BSC application database."0" means that the BDA is not built.
Once the user has built or rebuilt the BDA, this attribute isassigned the bdaVersionBuild value sent with the userbuild command.
If the BDA is being regenerated following an On line resetBDA command, this attribute gives the user the versionnumber of the BDA currently used by the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 254]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2
Description : Whether the optional equipment Battery Remote Controller(BRC) is present or absent in S8000 outdoor or S8002.
Value range : [Present, Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V15
beginning date
Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date andthereafter.
Do not fill in if information produced from the start isdisplayed.
Value range : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss]
Object : Call monitoring - Display SDO
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:beginning date is on or before end date.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
114 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reportsto cumulate.
Observation data accumulating starts with the informationcontained in the last observation message collectedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredendSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : Display custom report
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
• [A]:The defined period is less than or equal to sixhours.
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reportto edit default is the current date and time).
The report displays the information contained in the lastobservation message generated in the requested period oftime. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in theDictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Display raw report
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
Note : If no permanent observation has been received within thespecified period, a message is displayed.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 115
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the availablepermanent observations to list (default is the current dateand time).
The first listed report is the last observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : List available permanent observations
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the available temporaryobservations to list (default is the current date and time).
The first listed report is the last observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : List available temporary observations
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observationmessages to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime).
The last listed message is the first observation messagegenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
116 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
bEPPeriod Class 3
Description : When EDGE is activated in the cell, the field is present andindicates the BEP filter averaging period to the MS.
Value range : 0 to 15
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : Values 11 to 15 are reserved in tge 3GPP specification andshall not be used. 10 is the recommended value.
biZonePowerOffset Class 3
Description : Power offset between the inner TRXs and the outerTRXs of the adjacentCellHandOver object of a dualband,dualcoupling, or concentric cell.
Offset added in calculation formula to draw up thelist of eligible cells for handover towards a dualband,dualcoupling, or concentric cell inner zone to take intoaccount the difference of propagation models between thetwo bands of the cells and the difference of transmissionpower between TRXs of the two zones due to either BTSconfiguration or coupling.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : If main band = 850MHz 3dBIf main band = 1900MHz -3 dB
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : This parameter is only available for S8000 or e-cell BTSDRX transceiver architecture.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 117
biZonePowerOffset Class 3
Description : Power offset between inner and outer TRXs of thehandOverControl object of a dualband, dualcoupling, orconcentric cell.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Default value : If main band = 850MHz 3 dBIf main band = 1900MHz -3 dB
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is only available for S8000 or e-cell BTSDRX transceiver architecture.
• zoneTxPwrMaxReduction (inner zone)
Release : V12
bsc2GEqpt
Description : Identification and dynamic data describing the hardwareconfiguration of BSC 12000HC, as well as an externalalarm and actions on equipments related to it.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : bsc2GEqpt
Type : DP
Release : V13
bsc2GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the ’bsc2GEqpt’ object class. This identifieris allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The onlyvalue allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 12000HC.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : bsc2GEqpt
Type DP
Release : V13
bsc3GEqpt
Description : Identification and dynamic data describing the hardwareconfiguration of a BSC 3000 (global point of view).
Value range : [0 to 0]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
118 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bsc3GEqpt
Type : DP
Release : V13
bsc3GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the ’bsc3GEqpt’ object class. This identifieris allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The onlyvalue allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : bsc3GEqpt
Type : DP
Release : V13
bsc
Description : Identifier of a bsc object on the OMC-R.
The bsc reference is part of all BSS configuration objectidentifiers.
In all MMI commands, a bsc object can be referenced byname (bscName).
When a bsc object is created and the referencedbscMdInterface object is unlocked, the system attempts toestablish the BSS/OMC-R link connection.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : bsc
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The number of BSCs managed by an OMC-Ris limited to maxBscPerNetwork (staticconfiguration data).
• [C]:The referenced bscMdInterface object(bscMdInterfaceRef) is created.
• [D]:The BSC application database has been resetby an Off line reset BDA command (bdaState= "not built").
• [D]:No mdScanner, traceControl, or callPathTraceobject refers to the bsc object (no observationor trace function is active in the BSC).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 119
bsc
Description : Identifier or name of a bsc object on the OMC-R.
It defines the parent bsc object.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : adjacentCellHandover, adjacentCellReselection, bts,btsSiteManager, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem,handOverControl, lapdLink, multiple site, pcmCircuit,powerControl, signallingLink, signallingLinkSet, signallingPoint, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment,transceiverZone, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The bsc object is created.
bsc equipment name
Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BSC or TCUprocessor.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [ddti / ala / eci / sicx / sicd / swm / cpue / O.M.N.communication / cabling and PCM cross connect / css7 /cpu486Se / sup / LAPD channel / signalling link / sls / tdti/ tuc / internal PCM--TCU/ tcb / swe / swc / sw16 / tscb /msw / sic lapd (8 channels) / 2nd generation of TCB board/ bscb / CPUE pentium 120 / mmu / mmu ide / cpum133 /cpue133 / sup2 / sls2 / pcu element/]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Remark : "css7" identifies the BSC CCS7 boards; "signalling link"identifies the SS7 signalling links defined in the BSS andcontrolled by the CCS7 boards.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
120 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bscList
Description : List of the BSCs simultaneously monitored for further dataprocessing by the SDO machine. Fill in the list with BSCreference numbers or names, up to maxBscPerNetwork.
Do the following to create the list:
• To add a BSC, fill in the bscNumber field with thereference number of the BSC on the OMC-R and clickAdd.
• To remove one or more BSCs, select the lines thatdisplay their reference numbers and click Remove.
When the list is complete, click the option matching thedesired command, as follows:
• Start: ...........starts collecting call monitoringdata in the selected BSCs.
• Stop: ............stops collecting call monitoringdata in the selected BSCs.
• Transfer: .........transfers the BSC selecteddata files to the OMC-R.
• Processing: .......copies and processes theselected data files in the SDOmachine. A set of resultantASCII data files is produced, itis identified as the Level 1 set.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : Call monitoring - Commands (SDO)
Type DP
Checks : • [A]:The number of BSCs in the list is limited tomaxBscPerNetwork (static configurationdata).
• [A]:Each BSC occurs once in the list.
Notes : • The user must make sure that the BSCs in the list arecreated on the OMC-R since no checks are performedby the system.
• Processing: The call monitoring data files aremeant to exist in the "/MD/ftam/bsc" directory on theOMC-R agent disks. For each BSC in the list, allfiles saved in that directory whose name begins with"SDO_CM_BSCnnn" will be processed: "nnn" is the
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 121
BSC reference number on the OMC-R (if bsc = 5, thennnn is read "005"). See NTP < 07 >.
• The bscList needs not be defined when selecting theQuery command which displays the activity state of theCall monitoring function in all the BSCs connected tothe OMC-R.
bsc model
Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BSC.
Value range : [bsc 12000 / bsc 3000]
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Note : bsc30000 is the value that must be used for this parameterin case of a BSC 3000.
bscNumber
Description : Identifier [1 to 255] or name of a BSC to add to thebscList.
Fill in this field and click Add to add the BSC to the list.Refer to the bscList entry in the Dictionary.
Object : Call monitoring - Commands (SDO)
Type DP
bscAlarmMask Class 3
Description : Configuration of the eight external alarm loops managedby the BSC ALA board. The alarm loop number "32+n" ismonitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0).
Value range : 8 bit register numbered 0 to 7
bscAlarmMask = x x x x x x x x| |alarm 39 alarm 32
Object : bsc
Default value : 11111111
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
122 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bscArchitecture Class 0
Description:
Architecture of the BSC
This attribute, together with the bsc object bscType attribute andthe related software object sWVersionRunning attribute, definesthe dimensioning constraints.
Value range:
[bsc6000 / bsc12000 / bsc30000]
• bsc30000 is the value that must be used for this parameterin case of a BSC 3000.
Object : bsc
Type : DP
bscCapacityReduction Class 3
Description : This attribute allows to reduce the traffic on the BSC inorder to protect the MSC against high traffic load.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked
Value range : Int [0 to 9]
Object : bsc, signallingPoint
Type : DP
Release : V14
bscChainId
Description : BSC processing chain(s) to reset.
The consequences are as follows:
• activeChain: ......The active chain is resetand becomes passive, andthe passive chain becomesactive. Class 1 DPs are notre-configured.
• passiveChain: .....The passive chain is reset if itcan be reached.
• bothChain: .......Both chains are reset and theBSC is restarted. Class 1 DPsare re-configured.
Value range : [activeChain / passiveChain / bothChain]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 123
Object : bsc - Kill chain
Type Id
bscCounterList
Description : Identifier of the bscCounterList object defined with regardsto the bsc object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : bscCounterList
Type : Id
Release : V11
bscDateTime
Description : Current BSC reference date and time.
This attribute is set by a user Synchronize bsc clockcommand, which broadcasts the current OMC-R agent dateand time to the concerned BSC.
It is also updated by the OMC-R agent in the followingconditions:
• A user Set command on the md object is run, whichchanges its externalTime attribute.
• The BSS/OMC-R link is established.
• The BSS/OMC-R link is reestablished after abreakdown.
• The statutory time is modified.
The OMC-R agent sends an alarm notification to theOMC-R manager when the time difference with a BSCdrifts too much.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
bscGprsActivation Class 3
Description : Flag used to activate the GPRS at BSC level.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bsc
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
124 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
bscHighSwitchingCapacity Class 3
Description : This parameter on the BSC enables the DS512 feature.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bsc
Feature : BSC 3000 switching increase capacity (24436)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V15
bscHopReconfUse Class 1
Description : Whether frequency hopping reconfiguration is authorized inBTSs that use cavity coupling.
When frequency reconfiguration is authorized, it allows toautomatically reconfigure the hopping sequence whenevera frequency is lost or recovered in the BTS.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bsc
Default value : True
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:It can be "true" provided the btsHopReconfRestart of one of the related bts objects is also"true".
Release : V8
bscIPFirstAdr Class 2
Description:
Indicates the first BSC IP address used for a ’bscMdInterface’object instance.
IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on thenetwork used.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 125
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range:
[7 to 15] String
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in afirst address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.
• [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in asecond address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.
Release : V13
Note : For a BSC 12000HC, this parameter is available but it is notused.
bscIPSecondAdr Class 2
Description:
Indicates the second BSC IP address used for a’bscMdInterface’ object instance.
IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on the networkused.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range:
[7 to 15] String
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in afirst address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.
• [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in asecond address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.
Release : V13
Note : For a BSC 12000HC, this parameter is available but it is notused.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
126 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bscList
Description : This attribute indicates for which BSC(s) the units ofsoftware has been downloaded. This attribute is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot bemodified by the Manager. This attribute is updated bythe MD-R when a "sWDownload" command is performedsuccessfully.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 41]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Release : V13
bscLog
Description : bscLog modelizes the management of the BSC internal logfiles.
Value range : [bscVers13 +Inf]
Object : bscLog
Type : DP
Release : V13
bscLogId
Description : Identifier of the ’bscLog’ object class.
This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation.
This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevantfor BSC 3000.
Value range : [bscVers13 +Inf]
Object : bscLog
Type : DP
Release : V13
bscMdInterface
Description : Identifier of a bscMdInterface object defined with regard to themd object.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bscMdInterface
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 127
Type : Id
Checks : • [D]:No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterfaceobject.
bscMdInterfaceRef
Description : Identifier of the bscMdInterface object that describes theBSS/OMC-R link involving the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bsc
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterfaceobject.
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber
Description : Release number of the BSC/OMC-R interface. It is provided bythe BSC when the BSS/OMC-R link is physically established.
If the release number does not match the software versionrunning in the BSC (sWVersionRunning attribute of the relatedsoftware object), the BSC issues a start-of-fault message.
Value range:
[11 to 99]
Object : bsc - Display
Type : DI
Restrictions: • [C/M]:
This attribute is not managed by users.
bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3
Description : Enables or disables dynamic barring of access class at thebsc level.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bsc
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
128 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bscName
Description :
Reference name of a bsc object on the OMC-R.
It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.
Valuerange :
[30 characters max.]
Object : bsc
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a BSC is unique to the OMC-R.
Release : V13
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with aletter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX,BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters areprohibited.
The valid symbols are:
- letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z
- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
- minus sign: -
- undescore: _
- space
bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2
Description : List of BSC-PCU PcmCircuit.
Value range:
BSC 12000HC: [1 to 12] values in the range [0..167]BSC 3000 V15: [1 to 24] values in the range [0..167]BSC 3000 V16, E1 PCM: [1 to 32] values in the range [0..167]BSC 3000 V16, T1 PCM: [1 to 36] values in the range [0..167]
Object : pcu
Feature : 18749 (PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC),(step 1: up to one full PCUSN shelf per BSC).
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:All the referred pcmCircuit object instances of thisattribute must exist.
• [C/M]:The referred pcmCircuit object instances must beof pcmAgprs type (pcmType attribute).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 129
• [C/M]:The referred pcmCircuit object instances mustnot be already referred to another pcu objectinstance on the same BSC.
Release : V12
bscQueueingOption Class 1
Description : Whether radio resource allocation requests are queued inthe BSC when no resources are available.
If no resource is available when an allocation requestis received and queueing is not allowed, the allocationrequest is refused immediately.
Value range : [allowed (MSC driven) / forced (O&M driven) / not allowed]
• allowed ..........Resource allocation requestqueueing depends on the typeof operation and indicativeitems provided with themessages received from theMSC.
• forced ...........Resource allocation requestqueueing depends on the typeof operation only.
• not allowed .......Resource allocation requestqueueing is forbidden.
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : forced
Type : DP
Note : Allocation requests for immediate assignments andinter-bss, intra-bss, and inter-bts handovers are neverqueued. Only TCH resource requests (assignmentsrequest and intraCell handover) are queued dependingon the priority of the demand and the number of requestpresent in the queue.
bscRefList
Description : List of the bsc objects managed by a pcuSN object.
Value range : V15: [0 to 12] values in the range [1 to 255]V16, E1/T1 PCM: [0 to 18] values in the range [1 to 255]The BSS system does not take into account the valuerange [17 to 18] for an E1 configuration.
Object : pcusn
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
130 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Release : V12
bscReset
Description : Requests a control node reset.
Value range : [0 to 1]
Object : bsc3GEqpt
Type : DP
Release : V13
bscSitePcmList Class 2
Description:
List of the PCM links allotted to a site on the Abis interface,up to maxPcmCPerBtsSM. Each link is identified by a(pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) pair that definesit on BSC end and BTS end.
The Abis interface connects a BTS to a BSC through PCM linksthat are identified by the boards to which they are connected onboth ends of the interface, that is DDTI boards on BSC end andDTI boards on BTS end.
The following rule is applied:
• A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i in the BSC has apcmCircuitBsc reference equal to "2i" or "2i+1" with regardto the BSC (each board manages two links at a time). Referto Nortel GSM BSC Reference Manual.
• The same PCM link connected to DTI board no.j in the BTShas a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference equal to "j" withregard to the BTS (each board manages one single link).Refer to Nortel GSM BTS Reference Manuals.
The number of pairs in the list sets the number of links allotted tothe radio site.
Value range:
list (1..6) of (pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager)pairs.
Refer to pcmCircuitBsc and pcmCircuitBtsSiteManagerentries for more information on their value ranges.
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 131
Checks : • [C]:The number of PCM links allotted to a siteis limited to maxPcmCPerBtsSM (staticconfiguration data).
• [C/M]:The list contains at least one pair, two if thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresenceattribute is "true".
• [C/M]:Each pair is unique in the list.
• [C/M]:Each pcmCircuitBsc reference matches apcmCircuit object created for the parent bscobject and assigned to the Abis interface(pcmType = "pcmAbis").
• [M]:If a pcmCircuitBsc reference is changed,the current link is not used by any dependenttransceiverEquipment object.
bscTimeSlot
Description : PCM link (pcmCircuitId) and timeslot (timeSlotNumber)used by the radio timeslot on the Abis interface. The PCMlink is identified on BSC end [0 to 47].
The information is displayed provided that theparent transceiver object is working. Refer to theoperationalState entry for this object in the Dictionary.
Value range : pcmCircuitId [0 to 47]timeSlotNumber [1 to 31 (E1 PCM) or 24 (T1 PCM)]
Object : channel
Type : DD
bscType Class 0
Description : Type of the BSC. It defines the BSC configuration in termsof equipment boards.
See the table listing BSC configuration types in NTP < 07>.
Value range : [type1 / type2 / type3 / type4 / type5]
Object : bsc
Default value : type5
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:number of SICD(8V) ports available in theBSC: See NTP < 07 >.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
132 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [M]:number of PCM links connected to the BSC:See NTP < 07 >.
• [M]:number of sites managed by the BSC: SeebtsSiteManager entry in the Dictionary.
• [M]:The lapdTerminalNumber attributes of thedependent lapdLink objects comply with thenumber of SICD(8V) ports available in theBSC.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
bscUsedAdr
Description : BSC address actually used. This attribute is managed bythe MD-R. Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
Value range : [X25 / IP]
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Release : V13
bsCvMax Class 3
Description : Number of packets left to transmit divided by the number ofUL TS allocated to the MS.
Value range : [1 to 15]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Remark : bsCvMax is broadcasted in the system information.
Release : V12
bscX25PrefAdr Class 2
Description : X.25 priority address used by the BSC.It corresponds to the subscriber’s number in the X.25network.
Value range : [15 decimal figures max.]
Object : bscMdInterface
Default value : $BSC{bscId}_X25P
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 133
Checks : • [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a preferential address for another bscobject instance.
• [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a secondary address for another bscobject instance.
Note : For a BSC 3000, this parameter is available and visible onthe OMC-R MMI, but it is not used.
bscX25SecAdr Class 2
Description : X.25 address used by the BSC as backup. It is identical tothe priority address when there is no redundancy.It corresponds to the subscriber’s number in the X.25network.
Value range : [15 decimal figures max.]
Object : bscMdInterface
Default value : $BSC{bscId}_X25S
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a secondary address for another bscobject instance.
• [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a preferential address for another bscobject instance.
Note : For a BSC 3000, this parameter is available and visible onthe OMC-R MMI, but it is not used.
bscX25UsedAdr
Description : X.25 outgoing address currently used by the BSC.
This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the addressselected by the system when the connection is establishedby bringing the link into service.
Value range : [15 decimal figures max.]
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
134 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bsPowerControl Class 3
Description : Whether BTS transmission power control is allowed at celllevel.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : powerControl
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
bssMapT1 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on transmission of BLOCK or UNBLOCK by theBSC and canceled on receipt of BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEor UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 5
Type : DP
bssMapT4 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on transmission of RESET and canceled onreceipt of RESET ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Onelapse, the BSC sends RESET.
Value range : [5 to 600] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 60
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 135
bssMapT7 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on transmission of HANDOVER REQUIREDand canceled on receipt of HANDOVER COMMAND,RESET, RESET CIRCUIT, CLEAR COMMAND orHANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT.
Value range : [2 to 120] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 7
Type : DP
bssMapT8 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. It is greater than t3103 for all BTSobject instances attached to the BSC.
It is started on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND andcanceled on receipt of CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSCor HANDOVER FAILURE sent by MS.
Value range : [0 to 255] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 15
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:bssMapT8 > t3103 for all BTS objectsdependent on the BSC object.
bssMapT12 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. This timer is used with a Phase IMSC only.
It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUITACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
136 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
bssMapT13 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on receipt of RESET sent by the MSC. Onelapse, the BSC sends RESET ACKNOWLEDGE to theMSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 32
Type : DP
bssMapT19 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. This timer is used with a PhaseII MSC only.
It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUITACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Release : V8
bssMapT20 Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on transmission of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCKor CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceledon receipt of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEor CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent bythe MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 137
bssMapTchoke Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handovermanagement procedure.
It is started by the BSC when the last neighbor cell in thelist is rejected. On timer elapse, the BSC asks the MSC toprovide a new list of eligible cells.
Value range : [1 to 255] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 4
Type : DP
bssSccpConnEst Class 1
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handovermanagement procedure.
It is set on transmission of CONNECTION REQUESTand canceled on receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM orCONNECTION REFUSED.
Value range : [5 to 360, by steps of 5] seconds
Object :signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)
signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpConnEst parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.
bssSccpInactRx Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(iar) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPinactivity detection procedure.
It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTIONCONFIRM or on receipt of any other message during theconnection and canceled on receipt of any message.
Value range : [2 to 30] minutes
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
138 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object :signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)
signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)
Default value : 11
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpInactRx parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.
bssSccpInactTx Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(ias) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPinactivity detection procedure.
It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTIONCONFIRM or on transmission of any other messageduring the connection and canceled on transmission of anymessage.
Value range : [1 to 15] minutes
Object : signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)
signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpInactTx parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.
bssSccpRelease Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(rel) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPmanagement procedure.
It is set on transmission of RELEASE and canceled onreceipt of RELEASED COMPLETE or RELEASED.
Value range : [1 to 20] seconds
Object : signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)
signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)
Default value : 10
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 139
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpRelease parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.
bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(state info) triggered by the BSC in theSCCP management procedure.
It is set on transmission of SST and canceled on receipt ofSSA.
Value range : [5 to 60, by steps of 5] seconds
Object : signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)
signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)
Default value : 30
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpSubSysTest parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.
bsTxPwrMax Class 3
Description : Maximum theoretical level of BTS transmission power ina cell.
The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the AbisCELL MODIFY REQUEST message.
• For concentric cells, dualband cells and dualcouplingcells:The value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier is equal tothe value of bsTxPwrMax added to the value of DLUattenuation (depending on the coupling equipment type,that is for instance D, H2D, H4D, etc.) or Attenuationon the btsSiteManager (if Attenuation has a value), andreduced of the value of “Zone Tx power max reduction”of the transceiverZone.
For PA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifiermust be between 31dB and 44dBm. This value range isvalid for Radio Module (RM).
For HePA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifiermust be between 34dB and 47dBm. This value range is
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
140 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
valid for High Power Radio Module (HPRM).
For MePA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifierbetween 33dB and 46dB. This value range is valid forMedium Power Radio Module (MPRM).
• For mono zone cells:
The value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier is equal tothe value of bsTxPwrMax added to the value of DLUattenuation (depending on the coupling equipment type,that is for instance D, H2D, H4D, etc.) or Attenuation onthe btsSiteManager (if Attenuation has a value).
Value range : [2 to 51] dB
Note : The recommended value is 43 dB.
Object : powerControl
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:For a normal cell, the use of the block edgechannels must induce a cell power limitationto 40 dB for PCS networks, and 42 dB forGSM 850 networks.
• [M]:For a concentric cell, the use of the blockedge channels in the large zone and inthe small zone must induce a cell powerlimitation to 40 dB for PCS networks and 42dB for GSM 850 networks (’bsTxPwrMax -zoneTxPwrMaxReduc’)
• [M]:For a dualband cell and, the use of theblock edge channels in the large zoneand in the small zone must induce acell power limitation to 40 dB for PCS- GSM850 networks and 42 dB forGSM850 - PCS networks (’bsTxPwrMax -zoneTxPwrMaxReduc’)
• [M]:For a dualcoupling cell, the use of theblock edge channels in the large zoneand in the small zone must induce acell power limitation to 40 dBm for PCSnetworks and 42 dBm for GSM850 networks(’bsTxPwrMax - zoneTxPwrMaxReduc -bizonePowerOffset’)
Note : Some bsTxPowerMax values are not compatible with theeffective power output by the BTS.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 141
Remark : For a GSM 1900 network (standardIndicator of bts objectset to ’pcs1900’), the MD-R checks the following:
bsTxPwrMax < 32 (dB)
when an edge frequency is defined for the cell (i.e. if thevalue is included in the cellAllocation attribute values).
The use of edge frequencies leads to a cell powerreduction. The list of edge frequencies is described in theMD-R configuration file, MD/base/config/boundEdge.cfg.This file is can be configured off-line. To update thedatabase according to the list of edge frequencies, use theshell /MD/install/shell/cm_configBde.sh.
bts
Description : Identifier of a bts object defined with regard to abtsSiteManager object.
All channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objectsin a BSS are identified with regard to a bts object thatdefines the covering cell.
In all MMI commands, a bts object can be referred to bythe sequence "siteName.cellName" where siteName andcellName identify the covering site and the cell respectivelyby name.
Value range : [0 to 5]
Object : bts
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The number of cells managed by an OMC-Ris limited to maxBtsPerNetwork (staticconfiguration data).
• [C]:The maximum number of cells controlled by aBSC is as follows:
BSC 12000HC
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
120 120 160 160 160
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
142 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C]:The number of cells attached to a radio site islimited to maxNbOfCells (attribute of the parentbtsSiteManager object).
• [C]:The software object related to the parentbtsSiteManager object is created.
• [C]:The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode attributes match those of the parent bscobject if they are defined for that object (cellCGIs must comply).
• [C/M]:The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute isdefined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) anddirected retry handovers are processed in BSCmode (directedRetryModeUsed).
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent btsSiteManager object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager object is locked, and thebts object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line resetBDA command.
• [D]:No adjacentCellHandOver object refers to thebts object (the described cell is not used as aneighbor cell of another serving cell).
• [D]:No mdScanner object describing a temporaryobservation refers to the bts object (noobservation is running on the described cell).
• [D]:No traceControl or callPathTrace object refersto the bts object (no tracing is running on thedescribed cell).
Note : All cells covered by a given radio site must be created innumerical ascending order and deleted in the reverse order.
bts
Description : Identifier or name of a bts object.It defines the associated bts object.
Value range : [0 to 5]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection,channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl,powerControl, software, transceiver,
transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 143
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The bts object is created.
bts equipment name
Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BTSequipment.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [[BTS main power / converterB/ converter C/converterA/CSW1 / CSW2 / CSW1M/ TX / SYN /SYNO /ALAT / ALATO / DCC / DTI / RX splitter / TX splitter/ antenna / column system RX / converter D / columnsystem TX / door contact / door contact (S4000/S2000E)/ fan system / RX fan / TX fan / cabinet fan / fans rack/ MWT system / exchanger system / rectifier system(S4000/S2000E) / rectifier system 1 (S4000/S2000E)/ rectifiers groups / distribution system / fuses system /breakers / battery system / temperature system / smokedetector / CSWM/SYNC/ALCO/DSC/PCMI / GTW /PCM0 / PCM1 / rectifier 48V / converter F / converterBCF / battery disconnected switch /cooler system /LNA/ VSWR / user system / distribution box / battery cabinet/ main breaker / diu / external alarm / external alarm(S4000/S2000E) /VGA/ DLNA/MNU/DCU/RX/ DBF /AMNU / DCU4 / DRX / FPRX / Lightning Protection / BCFCabinet door / BCF Cabinet fan / SBCF / PA / AC powersupply / DC power supply / transmit antenna / cabinethigh temperature alarm/ cabinet low temperature alarm/ EXTERNAL CONTACT ACCESS / drxmain receptionchain / drx diversity reception chain / splitter output / highpower module / splitter / low power RF module / rf supplymodule / CMCF / PCM / CPCMI / RECAL / rx splitterM / rxsplitter D / combiner h4 lna / combiner h4 vswr / txFilter /combiner rx filter lna / combiner d vswr / rxMainConnector/ rxDivConnector / dacsCooler / compact dacs cooler/ compact distribution / PMNU / RDRX / PMOD / BTSSynchronisation / PSU / Heatsink / Preventive lightningprotection / Battery / External Environment / SLTI / SALCO/ not protected alarm / internal temperature / externaltemperature / Remote Tunable Cavity Combiner / Cavity/battery monitored / blower tray / S12000 rectifier / smokedetector (S4000/S2000E) / S12000 smoke detector /S12000 lightning protection / S12000 battery disconnected/ S12000 cooler / Edge High PA / Edge DRX / Edge PA /CMCF phase 1 /CMCFphase2 /CMCFphase 3 /DRXND3/ICM/ IFM/ABM / RM/ RM_PA / RM_TRX / HPRM / HPRMPA / HPRM TRX / MPRM / MPRM_TRX / MPRM_PA /TRX MAIN RECEPTION CHAIN / TRX DIV RECEPTION
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
144 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
CHAIN / DDM / DDM MAIN LNA / DDM DIV LNA / DDM1 VSWR / DDM 2 VSWR / DDM_H2 / DDM_H2 MAINLNA / DDM_H2 DIV LNA / DDM_H2 1 VSWR / DDM_H2 2VSWR / TX FILTER / TX FILTER VSWR / TX FILTER H2 /TX FILTER H2 VSWR / SICS / ECU / TRX / H4]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
bts list
Description : List of the cells involved in broadcasting the shortmessage. Enter the (bsc, btsSiteManager, bts ) referenceof each bts object.
Object : short message - Start broadcast
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:Each bts object in the list is created.
• [A]:Each bts object in the list is assigned aCBCH, that is there is one channel objectin the set of transceiver objects dependenton the bts object whose channelType is"bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH".
• [A]:No more than five short messages are beingbroadcast in the cells at that time.
btsSMSynchroMode Class 2
Description : Type of site synchronization.
Object : btsSiteManager
Value range : [normal / master / slave / gpsBurstSync, gpsTimeSync /masterGpsBurstSync / masterGpsTimeSync]
Type : DP
Feature : Network Synchronization
Default value : normal (synchronized on Abis link)
Checks : • [C/M]:slave, gpsBurstSync or gpsTime Sync valuesare allowed only if btsModel is S8000 CBCF,S12000, or BTS 18000.
• C/M]:master, masterGpsBurstSync or masterGpsTimeSync values are allowed only if btsModel isS8000 CBCF or S12000.
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V.15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 145
bts time between HO configuration Class 3
Description : Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be usedat bts level when processing handovers.
Refer to bts object btstimeBetweenHOConfiguration andadjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongTimeRejectionattributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.
Value range : [0 / 1]
Object : bts
Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821- V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V9
btsDescription
Description : BTS configuration description (BTS type, configuration,coupling system, etc.) corresponding to the transcriptionof configRef attribute.
Value range : [chain of characters]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DI
Release : V10
Note : It designates the maximum configuration of the configReffile loaded on one of the BTSs. But it does not necessarilycorresponds to the configuration of the btsSiteManagerobject concerned.
btsHopReconfRestart Class 2
Description : Whether hopping frequency reconfiguration is authorized onTX restart in a cell.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:If the attribute value is "true", the bscHopReconfUse attribute of the parent bsc object is also"true".
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
146 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
btsIsHopping Class 2
Description : Whether frequency hopping is allowed in a cell.
Value range : [hopping / noHopping / hoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8) /noHoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8)]
Object : bts
Default value : Hopping
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:If frequency hopping is allowed, theGSM "fhMgt" function is defined in thesiteGsmFctList attribute of the parentbtsSiteManager object.
• [M]:If it is disabled, no channel object dependent onthe bts object is authorized to obey frequencyhopping laws.
Note : The "xxxWithCarrierFilling" configuration means that the BTScovering the cell must use a TX for BCCH filling purposes.The following apply:
• The BSC sends the information to the BTS in the AbisCELL CONFIGURATION REQUEST message.
• If the BTS does not have a redundant TRX/DRX, one ofthe operating TRX/DRXs is assigned to that purpose andthe partnered TDMA frame is unreachable (refer to theoperationalState entry for the transceiver object in theDictionary).
• When this TRX/DRX is malfunctioning, the BTSre-configures the other TRX/DRXs. Users are thenwarned by the system, by means of a notification.
The "noHoppingWithCarrierFilling" configuration can be usedin all BTSs, regardless of the coupling mode. The followingapply:
• Hybrid coupling: All cell TX configurations provide BCCHfilling.
• Cavity coupling: Only the TX that transmits the cell BCCHfrequency is configured to provide BCCH filling.
The "hoppingWithCarrierFilling" configuration can only beused in BTSs that use cavity coupling. The following apply:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 147
• Hybrid coupling: The BTS refuses the configuration.
• Cavity coupling: All cell TX configurations provideself-frequency filling.
btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3
Description : Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at thebts level.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V9
btsReserved3 Class 3
Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the largefrequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for datacommunications.
Value range : [-16 to +16]
Object : bts
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
btsReserved4 Class 3
Description : Attribute reserved for future use.
Value range : [-32768 to 32767]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V12
btsSensitivity Class 3
Description : Target power needed for BTS decoding. This parameterhas an influence on the power control efficiency.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
148 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : The power control function used is the Open Loop Control.
btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3
Description : Minimum power needed for BTS decoding in the inner zoneof a dual-band cell.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
btsSiteManager
Description : Identifier of a btsSiteManager object defined with regard toa bsc object.
All bts, channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipmentobjects in a BSS are identified with regard to abtsSiteManager object that defines the covering radio site.
In all MMI commands, a btsSiteManager object can bereferred to by name (siteName).
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The maximum number of radio sites controlledby a BSC depends on its type and architecture(numbers in ordinary brackets apply to a BSCthat does not concentrate BTS LAPD signaling).
BSC 12000HC
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
28(7)
60(15)
92(23)
124(31)
147(39)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 149
• [C]:The software object related to the parent bscobject is created.
• [C]:The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef)is created for the parent bsc object and assignedto the Abis interface.
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the referenced pcmCircuit objects(bscSitePcmList) are created for the parentbsc object and assigned to the Abis interface(pcmType = "pcmAbis").
• [C/M]:The bscSitePcmList list contains at leasttwo pairs if the btsSiteManager objectredundantPcmPresence attribute is "true".
• [C]:If one of the pcmCircuit objects in the listdescribes a PCM link that is shared with anothersite in the BSS, the radioSiteMask of the twobtsSiteManager objects are dissociated.
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
btsSiteManager
Description : Identifier or name of a btsSiteManager object. It defines theparent btsSiteManager object.
It defines the parent btsSiteManager object.
By definition, a radio site (btsSiteManager object) is relatedto a BSC, a radio cell (bts object) is related to a radiosite, a TRX/DRX (transceiverEquipment object), a TDMAframe (transceiver object) and its radio time slots (channelobjects) are related to a radio cell.
In all MMI commands, the objects dependent on abtsSiteManager object can be identified at BSC or sitelevel, whichever is the most convenient to users.
Value range : [0 to 499]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
150 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, bts,channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, powerControl, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment,transceiverZone.
Type : Id
Note : The maximum number of sites supported by a BSC 3000is 500. The system accepts values between 0 and 499(inclusive).
btsSiteManager model
Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BTS.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [s2000 inDoor / s2000E inDoor / s2000E outDoor / s4000inDoor / s4000C inDoor / s4000 outDoor / s4000 smart /s8000 inDoor / s8000 outDoor / s2000 Low Power O1 /s2000 Low Power O2 / s2000 Low Power S11 / s2000 HighPower O1 / s2000 High Power O2 / s2000 High PowerS11 / s8000 inDoor CBCF / s8000 outDoor CBCF / s2000Low Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 Low PowerEnhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 Low Power EnhancedPackaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power Enhanced PackagingO1 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000High Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High PowerEnhanced Packaging S11 / e-CELL / s8002 outdoor CBCFO2 / s12000 inDoor / s12000 outDoor / BTS18000 inDoor/ BTS18000 outDoor]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
btsSiteManagerList Class 2
Description : List of btsSiteManager objects attached to a multiple siteobject
Value range : [0 to 146]
Object : multiple site
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:Each btsSiteManager object is unique in thelist and created for the parent bsc object.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B 151
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and thereferenced btsSiteManager objects arelocked.
Note : The order in which the btsSiteManager objects are entered inthe list must match the BTS chaining order, beginning withthe BTS closest to the BSC.
btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2
Description : Minimum number of frequencies working in a cell to allowfrequency hopping reconfiguration.
If this attribute defines the nominal number of cellfrequencies, the reconfiguration process is deactivated. Referto the btsHopReconfRestart entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [1 to 64]
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:This number is less than or equal to the numberof transceiver objects created for the bts object.
Release : V8
btsWithCavity Class 2
Description : Whether the bts object instance uses a transceiverequipment with cavity.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : false
Feature : Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs (PR1179 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
152 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
buildState
Description : Whether BSC application database building is in-progress.Commands on all objects related to the bsc concernedobject are refused while the BDA is being built.
When the bsc object is created, the value of this attribute isenforced to "notInProgress". It is unknown to the BSC andcannot be directly modified by users.
It is changed to "inProgress" by the system after auser Build BDA command on the bsc object as long asdatabase building is in-progress. It is then changed back to"notInProgress" when the operation is complete.
Value range : [inProgress / notInProgress]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
CcallClearing Class 3
Description : Maximum distance between MS and BTS before a call iscleared.
It is greater than msRangeMax.
This distance defines the cell maximum coverage area.
Value range : [2 to 135] km (non-extended mode),[2 to 120] km (extended mode).
Object : bts
Default value : 35 in non-extended mode, 90 in extended mode
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:callClearing > msRangeMax (attribute of thehandOverControl object associated with the btsobject).
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 35 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is"false".
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is"true".
• 7 km for urban
• 35 km for rural
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 153
callDropActivation class 3
Description : Activation of cell call drop data retrieval of cell call drops atOMC-R.
Object : bts
Value range : [Disabled (0) / traffic drops (1) / signaling drops (2) / traffic +signaling drops (3)]
Type : DP
Feature : Call drop analysis
Default value : 0
Checks : • [C/M]:callDropActivation parameter cannot beset to a value different from 0 in more than80 cells per BSC. Call drop analysis featurecannot be activated on more than 80 cells ata time
• [C/M]:Call drop analysis feature cannot be activatedon the cell if interference matrix is still runningon this cell. This semantic checks forbidsactivation of interference matrix and call dropanalysis features at the same time on a cell.
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
callPathObservationArea Class 2
Description : List of up to thirty-one same-type objects observed.Enter each object reference according to the type (bts,transceiverEquipment, xtp).
Value range : [list of objects belonging to the same class]
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:All observed objects belong to the same class.
• [M]:The callPathTrace object is locked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
154 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
callPathTrace
Description : Identifier of a callPathTrace object defined with regard to themd object.
This object describes the Call path tracing function of a BSS(follow-up of calls using one or more common resources in theBSS).
A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : callPathTrace
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The callPathTrace object is not created for themd object.
• [C/M/D]:The application database of the related BSCis not being built.
• [C/M/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the BSS/OMC-R link is establishedand no audit is running in the BSC.
• [D]:The callPathTrace object is created.
Release : V8
callPathTraceType Class 2
Description : Type of information stored by the BSC.
The information stored with respect to the type is detailed inNTP < 07 >.
If the request cannot be fulfilled, the BSC attempts to storeanother type of information, using the following rule: radio>>> hand over >>> radio.
Value range : [basic / hand over / radio]
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The callPathTrace object is locked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 155
callReestablishment Class 3
Description : Whether call re-establishment in a cell is allowed when theradio link is broken off for propagation reasons.
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH.
On receipt of a CHANNEL REQUIRED message withcause "call re-establishment", the BSC attempts to allocatea TCH in one of the cells where call re-establishment isallowed. Then, if no TCH is available the BSC attempts toallocate a SDCCH.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : not allowed
Type : DP
callReestablishmentPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "callreestablishment".
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when anSDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
capacityAlarmThreshold
Description : Filling threshold of the message saving partition onthe OMC-R agent disks, beyond which a notification istriggered.
The size of the saving partitions is indicated in the systemcommissioning files.
This attribute is significant when the object describes acurrent log; it has no meaning when the object describes arestored log.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
156 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
When the threshold is reached, the OMC-R agent initiatesthe following actions:
• A notification is sent to the OMC-R manager.
• For a current alarm log, old messages are deletedto make room in the partition. If all saved messagesare of today’s date, further notifications are not savedand the operationalState of the log object is forced to"disabled".
• For a current observation or trace log, theoperationalState of the log object is forced to"disabled" and its availabilityStatus is forced to"logFull".
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]. "2147483646" defines a 100%threshold (the partition is full).
Object : log - Display
Type : DP
Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
capacityTimeRejection Class 3
Description : Minimum time between one intracell HO and the nextcapacity intracell HO.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : Int [0 to 120] seconds
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V1 4
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
cause
Description : To select messages according to one or more causesassociated with a fault number. Refer to Nortel GSM BSSand OMC Maintenance Manuals.
This parameter is a component of the specific problemsfilter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 19070980]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 157
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel Class 3
Description : Used to activate the CCCH management at BTS level.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V14
cc
Description : The Communication application module Controller, whichis the ATM switch implementing the ATM network used asthe Control Node backplane. This board also provides ATMon OC-3 (Optical Carrier level 3) connectivity towards theInterface Node.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : cc
Type : DP
Release : V13
ccId
Description : Identifier of the ’cc’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : cc
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
158 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
cellAllocation Class 2
Description : List of no more than 64 frequencies allotted to a cell in thenetwork frequency band.
By definition, all cells covered by a given radio site use thesame frequency band defined by the type of the network(standardIndicator). All cells declared as neighbor cells of aserving cell use the same frequency band as the serving cell.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (PCS 1900 network),[0 to 124 / 955 to 1023] (GSM-R network),[0 to 124 / 975 to 1023] (extended GSM network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[99 / 1023] / [0 / 55] (GSM-R network).
Note : The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm.
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:Each frequency occurs once in the list andcomplies with the type of the network (refer tothe standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary).
• [C/M] :GSM 900 / GSM-R / Extended GSM networks:The number of frequencies in the list is limitedto 64.
• [C/M] :GSM 1800/1900/850 network: The numberof frequencies in the list depends on the gapbetween the lowest and the greatest definedfrequencies.
Maximum gap betweenfrequencies
Number of frequencies
between 257 and 512 [2 to 18]
between 129 and 256 [2 to 22]
between 113 and 128 [2 to 29]
between 1 and 112 [2 to 64]
• [C/M]:The cell BCCH frequency (bCCHFrequency)is part of the list.
• [C/M]:For dualband networks, the number offrequencies must be inferior or equal to 64 byfrequency band.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 159
• [M]:The frequencies allotted to the radio time slots(channel objects) of the set of TDMA framesrelated to the cell are part of the list.
• [C/M]:An element of the list of cellAllocationparameter can take one of the followingvalues:[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network)[512 to 810] (GSM 1900),[0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] (GSM-R network),[0 to 124 or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM network)[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network).
cellBarQualify Class 3
Description : Cell selection priority used in the C2 algorithm in Phase II.
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH.
Value range : [true (low priority) / false (normal priority)]
Object : bts
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
cellBarred Class 3
Description : Whether direct cell access are barred to mobiles.
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH.
During a call, it is transmitted on a signaling link.
If the attribute value is changed to "barred", all in-progresscalls can continue but the BSC will direct further mobilecalls to another cell.
Value range : [barred / not barred]
Object : bts
Default value : not barred
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
160 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Remark : Even when cell access are barred to MSs, the cellmay be indirectly accessible if incoming handovers areallowed (incomingHandOver attribute of the associatedhandOverControl object).
cellDeletionCount Class 3
Description : Number of consecutive "Measurement Result" messageswhich, if not received from a given neighbor cell, will causeall previously stored information related to that cell to bedeleted.
From V12, this number corresponds to the number ofmissing measurement reports after which this neighborcell is no more eligible. The measurements related tothis neighbor cell are not deleted as far as less than 10consecutive measurements are missing.
Value range : [0 to 31]
Object : bts
Default value : 5 in rural environment, 2 in microcell environment
Type : DP
Note : Any entered value superior than 10 is taken into accountas 10 value.
cellDtxDownLink Class 3
Description : Whether the use of discontinuous transmission inBTS-to-MS direction is allowed in a cell.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Remark : The dtxMode attribute allows users to control the use ofdiscontinuous transmission on the uplink. Refer to thisentry in the Dictionary.
cellIdentity Class 3
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifying in a location area, aneighbor cell of the current cell.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 161
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
cellIdentity Class 3
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) identifying in a location area, aneighbor cell of the current cell.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
cellIdentity Class 2
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) identifying a serving cell in a locationarea.
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area.
It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes fourfields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC),mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode(MNC).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
cellName
Description : Reference name of a bts object on the coverage site. It iscase sensitive.
Value range : [30 characters max.]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
162 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a cell is unique to the coveringradio site.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with aletter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX,BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters areprohibited.
The valid symbols are:
- letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z
- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
- minus sign: -
- undescore: _
- space
cellPagingState
Description : Processing mode of the paging requests in the cell.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed / not significant]
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC.
• allowed ..........The operationalState of thetransceiver object describingthe TDMA frame no.0 carryingthe BCCH is "working" andSYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 havebeen acknowledged by theBTS.
• not allowed .......The operationalState of thetransceiver object describingthe TDMA frame no.0 carryingthe BCCH is "working" andSYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 have notbeen acknowledged by theBTS.If no message has beenacknowledged by the BTS,the notification 1256 "Nonresponse to SYS INFO 1, 2, 3,4 or 2bis" is issued.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 163
• not significant ....The operationalState of thetransceiver object describingthe TDMA frame no.0 carryingthe BCCH is not "working".
Object : bts
Type : DD
cellReselectHysteresis Class 3
Description : Hysteresis to re-select towards a cell:
• when the MS is in GSM - IDLE mode and re-selects acell with a different LA (Location Area)
• when the MS is in GMM stand by state and re-selects acell with a different LA (Location Area) or a different RA(Routing Area)
• when the MS is in GMM ready state and re-selects adifferent cell
A mobile can select a cell in another location area providedthe re-selection parameter value of that cell overstepsthe re-selection parameter values of all the cells in thesame location area as the current camping cell by at leastcellReselectHysteresis dB.
The information is broadcast on the cell BCCH.
The re-selection criterion (C1) formula is: C1 = (A - Max(B,0)) where A and B are as follows:
A = average level of the received signal - rxLevAccessMin
B = msTxPwrMaxCCH - Maximum RF output power of theMS
The re-selection criterion (C2) formula is given with thecellReselectOffset entry.
Value range : [0 to 14, by steps of 2] dB
Object : bts
Default value : 6 dB
Type : DP
Note : The greater the value of cellReselectHysteresis, thelater a new cell in another location area is selected. Thisprevents from switching back and forth two location areas.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
164 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
cellReselectOffset Class 3
Description : Encouragement to re-select a cell (C2 criterion) for phase2 MS.
The re-selection criterion (C2) formula is:
C2 = C1 + cellReselectOffset - temporaryOffsetx H (penaltyTime - T)
• C1 is defined with the cellReselectHysteresis entry.
• T is a timer that is started when the cell is placed by theMS on the list of most suitable cells to receive the calls,and is stopped when the cell is no longer on the list.
• H(penaltyTime - T) equals 0 when penaltyTime < Tand penaltyTime ≥ T.
In the case when penaltyTime = 640, re-selection criterionformula becomes:
C2 = C1 - cellReselectOffset
Value range : [0 to 126, by steps of 2] dB
Object : bts
Feature : AR 264
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : The value given to this attribute allows to more or lessencourage the mobiles to re-select the cell.
cellReselInd Class 3
Description : Whether cell re-selection criterion (C2) use is authorized.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : True
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 165
cellThreshold Class 2
Description : Needed number of transceiver object instances that mustbe in enabled state so that the cell is working.
The value of this attribute must be less than or equal to thenumber of TDMA frames created for this cell
This attribute can be modified only if the bts object instanceis locked.
This attribute can be modified only if the bsc objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [f1 to 16]
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
cellType Class 3
Description : Type of the adjacent cell.
Value range : [normalType / umbrellaType / microType]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : normalType
Type : DP
cellType Class 3
Description : Type of the serving cell.
Value range : [normalType / umbrellaType / microType]
Object : bts
Default value : normalType
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute isdefined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) anddirected retry handovers are processed in BSCmode (directedRetryModeUsed).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
166 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
cemId
Description : Identifier of the ’cem’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : cem
Type : DP
Release : V13
chain
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain.
It identifies the chain whose software markers aredisplayed.
Value range : [A / B]
Object : software-bsc - Display markers
Type : DD
chain
Description : To select messages originating from a BSC processingchain.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
chain
Description : Managed object class representing the Display chaininformation.
Value range : [chain A / chain B]
Object : Display chain information - bsc
Type : Id
Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 167
chainId
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain.
It identifies the chain whose characteristics are displayed.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type : Id
Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.
chainId
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain.
The consequences of the command are as follows:
• If the chain is active at the time the BSC receives theorder, it is reset and the operations are switched overto the passive chain.
• If the chain is passive when the BSC receives the order,it is reset if it can be reached.
To determine which chain is currently active in a BSC, runa Display all command on the concerned bsc object: theactiveChain attribute identifies the active chain.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]
Object : bsc - Suicide chain
Type : Id
Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.
chainId
Description : Identifier of the ’chain’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation. The valueallocated by the MD-R is located between 0 and 1. Thisattribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant forBSC 12000HC.
Value range : [0 to 1]
Object : chain
Type : DP
Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
168 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
channel
Description : Identifier of a channel object (radio time slot).
In all MMI commands, a channel object can be referred toby the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiver.channel",where siteName and cellName respectively identify thecovering site and cell by name.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : channel
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The number of channel objects dependent on atransceiver object is limited to eight.
• [C/M]:If the channel object does not obey frequencyhopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo isdefined unless it carries the parent cell BCCH,and fhsRef and maio are undefined.
• [C/M]:If the channel object obeys frequency hoppinglaws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is undefined,and fhsRef and maio are defined.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line resetBDA command.
channel state
Description : Type and resource state of the logical channels multiplexedon the radio time slot.
Value range :
Type: [BCCH / RACH / PCH AGCH/ SDCCH/4 / SDCCH/8 / TCH(full rate) / CCH],
Resource state: [not created / disabled /working / free / busy / blocking/ working, blocked / blocking,removing / disabled, blocked/ free, blocked / removing /available / working not CBCH /disabled not CBCH / workingCBCH / disabled CBCH]
• available ........The channel is allocated, notblocked, and free.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 169
• busy ............The channel is allocated, notblocked, and busy.
• disabled .........The channel is not configured.
• working, blocked ..The channel is allocated andblocked.
• disabled, blocked..The channel is not allocatedand blocked.
Object : channel - Display channel state
Type : DD
Notes : • The types of logical channels that can be multiplexed ona radio time slot depend on its channelType. Refer tothis entry in the Dictionary.
• The resource state of SDCCH no.2 is "disabled" if aCBCH is defined.
• A radio channel is blocked or released by means of auser Modify channel state command.
• A radio channel is allocated when the TDMA frame isconfigured (in the Abis way) and its radio time slots aremapped onto an Abis interface PCM link.
channelReleaseOnAbisFailure
Description : Channel Release on Abis Failure feature is enabled ordisabled.
The Channel release policy feature is allowed on the BTSS8000 CBCF and BTS S12000.
The feature is allowed for BTS model which contains thestring:
• “8000”
• ”12000”
except for BTS model:
• ”BSS_btsModelS8000inDoor (CBCF)
• ”BSS_btsModelS8000outDoor (CBCF)
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Feature : Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure
Default value : disabled
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
170 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Note : • The recommended value is disabled.
• This parameter is mandatory.
• [C/M]: A spare of the “TRX container” (IEITDMATranspAttr2 = 0x52) is used on bts objectto activate the feature.
Spare 5 attribute ofTDMACONFIGCONTAINERofTDMACONFIG message
8 7 6 5 4 3 1
IEI = TD_S PARE5_IEI
0 1 0 0 1 1 0
High part of spare5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Low part of spare5 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 n/a
Default value = 0x0000
Bit 2 (from1 to 8) of the lowpart of spare 5 parameter cantake the values:
0: Channel release policy after the ABIS failure is notactivated
1: Channel release policy after the ABIS failure isactivated.
channelType Class 2
Description : Type of logical channel supported by a radio TS.
Value range : [tCHFull / sDCCH / mainBCCH / mainBCCHCombined /bcchsdcch4CBCH / sdcch8CBCH / cCH (V12) / pDTCH(V12)].
An SDCCH is only allocated to a mobile during call setup.Once the call is established, the SDCCH is released and aTCH supports the call, serving traffic and signaling needs.
A CBCH (Cell Broadcast CHannel) configuration enables useof the Short Message Service -Cell Broadcast (SMS-CB) in acell when a radio time slot of a TDMA frame related to the cellsupports that type of channel. The CBCH can be combinedwith an SDCCH/8 or a BCCH+SDCCH/4. It takes the placeof SDCCH no.2 in all cases.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 171
If the time slot carries a cell BCCH, its type sets the cellBCCH configuration (combined or not combined).
Object : channel
Feature : Extended CCCH (TF184 - V12)GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : None
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:If the type is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH", the channel objectidentifier is [0] and the object is not authorized tohop.
• [C/M]:The type "cCH" can only be used if TS 0 carriesa BCCH logical channel ("main BCCH", "mainBCCH combined").
• [C/M]:The only allowed association of (BCCH + CCCH)timeslots are (0), (0, 2), (0, 2, 4), (0, 2, 4, 6).
• [C/M]:If the type is "sdcch8CBCH", the channel objectidentifier is in the range [0 to 3] if the coveringcell works in normal mode, and it equals 0 or 2 ifthe cell works in extended mode (extended cellattribute of the parent bts object).
• [C/M]:If the type is "sdcch8CBCH", the noOfBlksForAccessGrant attribute of the parent bts object hasa value greater than 0.
• [C/M]:If the type is "bcchSdcch4CBCH" or"sdcch8CBCH", use of the SMS-CB service isauthorized in the parent bts object (smsCB ="used").
• [C/M]:Concentric cell: If the parent transceiverobject belongs to the cell inner zone, the onlyauthorized types are "bcchSdcch4CBCH" and"sdcch8CBCH".
• [M]:The "pDTCH" channelType is only allowed fromV12 BSCs for GPRS.
A radio channel is identified by an 8-bit code built up by theOMC-R from the channel type and the number of the time slotthat supports it:
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 < TN >
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
172 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• TN bits (bits 3 to 1) indicate the radio time slot number[0-7].
• C bits (bits 8 to 4) describe the type of the channel:
00001 ACCH with a TCH/FR (SACCH/FACCH)
0001T ACCH with a TCH/HR
001TT ACCH in an SDCCH/4 configuration
01TTT ACCH in an SDCCH/8 configuration
10000 BCCH
10001 RACH (Uplink CCCH)
10010 PCH + AGCH (Downlink CCCH)
The T bits indicate the subchannel number [0 to 7]:
• There are four subchannels [0 to 3] in anSDCCH/4 configuration:
00100 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.0
00101 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (combined CBCH)
00110 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.2
00111 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.3
• There are eight subchannels [0 to 7] in anSDCCH/8 configuration:
01000 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.0
01001 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (CBCH)
01010 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.2
01011 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.3
01100 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.4
01101 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.5
01110 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.6
01111 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.7
The logical channels that can be multiplexed ona radio time slot depend on its channelType.They are described in the following table.
channelType Bits C5-C1
tCHFull BM + ACCH (SACCH/FACCH)
sDCCH SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 7](SACCH/FACCH)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 173
channelType Bits C5-C1
mainBCCH BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)
mainBCCHCombined BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3]
bcchSdcch4CBCH BCCHCBCH (= SDCCH No2)RACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3]
sdcch8CBCH CBCH (= SDCCH No2)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3](SACCH/FACCH)
cCH BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)
Remark : Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of shortmessages are managed by two independent OMC-Rfunctions.
When a short message broadcast is started in a cell, thepresence of a channel object with a CBCH dependent onthe concerned bts object is checked. On the contrary, theSMS-CB function is not aware of changes made to thatattribute.
Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from a cellconfiguration will implicitly stop any short messagebroadcast in the cell without the SMS-CB function knowing.
Note : The following counters have been multiplexed on TSs 0, 2,4, and 6 for the Extended CCCH feature: C1026, C1027,C1028, C1029, C1030, C1031, C1033, C1604, C1605.
Comments : No recommended value is specified since this parameterdepends on the strategy of the operator.
chanState
Description : Whether or not, the radio channel is blocked.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : channel - Set channel state
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
174 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [A]:A BCCH or a CBCH, whether combined or not,cannot be blocked.
• [A]:The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects areunlocked.
Notes : • When a CBCH is defined for a cell, it always uses SDCCHno.2.
• Run a Display channel state command to check that thechannel has switched to the specified state. Refer to thechannel state entry in the Dictionary.
chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in theASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON(see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSCparameter chosenChannelAsscomp needs to be set toTRUE.
chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in theCOMPLETE LAYER 3 INFORMATION messages (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON(see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSCparameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be setto TRUE.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 175
chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used inthe HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON(see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSCparameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be setto TRUE.
chosenChannelHoReq Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in theHANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages(Phase II compliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON(see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSCparameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be setto TRUE.
cic Class 0
Description : Circuit Identity Code = numbers of the PCM link and timeslot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, definedwith regard to the MSC (cic = 32xmscPcmNumber +mscPcmTsNumber).
The cic is coded into 16 bits, as follows:
xxxxxxxxxxxnnnnn = (32xmscPcmNumber) + mscPcmTsNumber
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
176 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Bits x identify the PCM link involved in the BSC/MSC linkwith regard to the MSC (mscPcmNumber), bits n identifythe time slot used on that PCM link with regard to the MSC(mscPcmTsNumber).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:A cic is unique to the parent bsc object.
• [C]:The PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuiton the A interface is identical on MSC end(mscPcmTsNumber component) and BSC end(timeSlotNumber), and is not allotted to anotherxtp or signallingLink object dependent on theparent bsc object.
• [C]:If PCM link no.3 is used on the A interface(pcmCircuitId), the TS number is in the range[1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Sincethe last four TSs on that link are not mapped onthe Ater interface, they cannot be used.Refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary.
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
circuitGroupBlock Class 1
Description : Whether the CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK and CIRCUITGROUP UNBLOCK messages are used (Phase IIcompliance).
If these messages are unused, the BLOCK and UNBLOCKmessages are used.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 -V12)
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 177
circularFileId
Description : Identifier of a BSC circular file.
BSC circular files are automatically created by the system:the FAULT files are created with the BSC, the PERF(observations) and TRACE (trace data) files are createdwhen the BSC application database is built.
Value range : [majorFault / minorFault / observation (permanent andtemporary) / instrumentPanel]
Object : bscMdInterface - Circular file
Type : Id
Checks : • [A]:The circular file is created.
circularFileState
Description : State of a circular file. When a circular file is closed, thespontaneous messages stored are not forwarded to theOMC-R agent.
This attribute is set by the system following a user Closecircular file or Open circular file command.
When a circular file is closed, the messages are stored untilthe file is reopened. Some messages may be lost if thecapacity of the file is reached.
Value range : [closed / opened]
Object : bscMdInterface - Display circular file state
Type : DP
clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Cleared alarm log - Filter
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
178 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
cleared by
Description : To select alarms ceased by a given user. Enter the user’sname as defined in the user’s profile.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Object : Cleared alarm log - Filter
Type : DP
clearing cause
Description : To select alarms according to the cause of ceasing.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [user command / object enabled / object deleted / clearevent received / automatic purge / cleared on low thresholdcrossing / circular file saturation]
Object : Cleared alarm log - Filter
Type : DP
cn
Description : The Control Node, which provides the GSM protocolprocessing (CallProcessing, SS7 and LAPD), as wellas BSS OA&M. A logical point of view and a sub-track(hardware) point of view are managed. The SIM modulesare also managed.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : controlNode
Type : DP
control Node Id
Description : Identifier of a ’controlNode’ object class. This identifieris allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The onlyvalue allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : controlNode
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 179
coderPoolConfiguration Class 2 for a BSC 12000HC V12, a BSC12000HC V15 and a BSC 3000 V15, and class 3 for a BSC 3000 V14
Description : This attribute indicates enumerated speech codingalgorithms supported by the TCU. Note that TCU2G doesnot support AMR.
Value range : List of [coderAlgo, minimumCall, powerULI, powerDLI],with:coderAlgo (BSC version: up to V15): fullRatecoder/ enhancedFullRateCoder / phase1DataCoder /amrFullHalfRateCodercoderAlgo (BSC version: from V16): fullRatecoder /enhancedFullRateCoder / ctmEnhancedFullRateCoder /amrFullHalfRateCoderminimumCall: 0 to 65535powerULI: -15 to +15powerDLI: -15 to +15
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Release : V13
coderPoolList
Description : Current partitioning of the coder pool. This attribute isdynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL atobject creation. Value changes are not notified to theManager. This attribute is relevant for TCU 3000.
Value range : for a V15 BSC, list of [coderAlgo, archipelagoes,maximumCall, currentCall] with :coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder /phase1DataCoder / amrFullHalfRateCoderarchipelagoes: 0 to 65535maximumCall: 0 to 65535CurrentCall: 0 to 65535for a V16 BSC, list of [coderAlgo, archipelagoes,emptyArchipelago, maximumCall, currentCall,minimumCallsRespected] with:coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder /ctmEnhancedFullRateCode / amrFullHalfRateCoderarchipelagoes: 0 to 65535emptyArchipelago: 0 to 65535maximumCall: 0 to 65535currentCall: 0 to 65535minimumCallsRespected: yes / no
Object : hardware transcoder 3G
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
180 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
codingScheme Class 2
Description : Channel coding scheme (CS) used for data in GPRS mode(UL and DL).
Value range : [cs1, cs2]
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : cs1
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : cs1 is used for control blocks. Depending on thecodingScheme parameter, cs1 or cs2 is used for datablocks in UL and DL.
command classes
Description : List of no more than twenty-five authorized commandclasses that define a user’s command domain. MMIcommands grant access to OMC-R functions.
Each class defines a subset of commands (one ofthem provides access to all MMI commands). Thecomprehensive list of MMI commands, together with theirclass(es), can be displayed using the Display commandclasses command.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : user profile
Type : DP
command line
Description : Command associated with the job. Follow the Line modesyntax.
If the job is meant to run a simple command, enter thesequence describing the command and its parameters.
If the job is meant to run a command file, enter thefollowing:
Run-commandFile: object=(commandFile=/<directory>/<filename>);
The command file must be created in the specifieddirectory.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 181
The Line mode syntax is detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : job
Type : DP
command number
Description : Serial number of the command to abort. It is assigned bythe system and is registered in session logs.
Every MMI command launched by the user is identifiedby a serial number assigned by the system. Open theuser session log consultation window and search for thatnumber.
Value range : [1 to infinity]
Object : commandFile - Abort
Type : DP
commandFile
Description : Identifier (name) of a command file in the saving directory.
Enter the file name only.
If the file exists in the selected directory, the user can eitheroverwrite its contents with the commands newly recordedor append the new commands to the existing file (see NTP< 130 >).
Value range : [case sensitive, 14 characters max.]
Object : commandFile - Create file
Type : Id
commandFile
Description : Saving name of the command file after being edited.
Enter the file name only.
If the file is a new one, preselect the saving directory inthe "Command file manager" window. If the file exists, it issaved in the same directory as the source file.
Value range : [case sensitive, 14 characters max.]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
182 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : Command file editing - Save
Type : Id
comment
Description : Text comment.
Value range : [256 characters max.]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
comment
Description : Additional information coming with the short message. Itis not broadcast.
Value range : [60 characters max.]
Object : short message
Type : DP
comments
Description : Additional information (such as creation date).
Object : software - Display markers
Type : DD
computeSyntheticCounters
Description : Whether synthetic counters are included in the observationreport.
This parameter is significant only for permanent bsc andinstrument panel observation report display requests.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 183
concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3
Description : MS to BTS distance below which a handover is requestedfrom the large zone to the small zone if the level criteria isverified.
Value range : [1 to 34] km (non-extended mode),
[1 to 120] km (extended mode).
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1 km
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoExtMsRange ≤concentAlgoIntMsRange
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 34 km if the extendedcell attribute of the associated bts object is"false".
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".
Release : V9
concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3
Description : The level of the MS signal strength from below which ahandover is requested from the large zone to the small zone.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : - 95 to - 94
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoExtRxLev >concentAlgoIntRxLev
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
184 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3
Description : MS to BTS distance from which a handover from the smallzone to the large zone will be requested.
The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary).
concentAlgoIntMsRange ≤ msRangeMax
Value range : [1 to 34] km (non-extended mode)
[1 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 34 km
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell.
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoIntMsRange ≤ concentAlgoExtMsRange
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 34 km if the extendedcell attribute of the associated bts object is"false".
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".
Release : V9
concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3
Description : Level of the MS signal strength below which a handover isrequested from the small zone to the large zone.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48] dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : less than -110
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell.
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoIntRxLev <concentAlgoExtRxLev
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 185
concentric cell Class 2
Description : Whether the cell is monozone, concentric, dualband ordualcoupling:
A concentric, dualband, or dualcoupling cell describesa combination of two transmission zones, the outer (orlarge) zone and the inner (or small) zone. The inner zoneis entirely included in the outer zone.
A dualband cell is a particular type of concentric cell forwhich GSM 900 and GSM1800 or GSM850 and GSM1900TRXs/DRXs coexist and share the same BCCH.
A dualcoupling cell is a particular type of concentric cellfor which the TRXs/DRXs are combined with two types ofcombiners.
For concentric configurations (concentric, dualband ordualcoupling), a TDMA frame belongs to one zone or theother, but never to both, and the frequencies used in eachzone are separated.
Value range : [monozone / concentric / dualband / dualcoupling]
• monozone .......normal cell
• concentric.......two concentric transmissionzones
• dualband.........two concentric transmissionszones with GSM 900 andGSM 1800 TRXs/DRXs for theone or GSM 850 GSM 1900TRXs/DRXs for the other
• dualcoupling..two concentric transmissionzones with TRXs/DRXscombined with a one type ofcombiner for the one and withanother type of combiner forthe other
Object : bts
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Default value : dualband
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
186 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Note : Dualband cells are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
Dualcoupling cells are only available for BTSs equippedwith non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.
Release : V9
condition
Description : Condition for calling the counting mechanism when acounter is involved.
The following fields can be combined in the logicalexpression:
Parameter Notification type Operators
administrativeState state change =
availabilityStatus state change =
bsc equipment name alarm =
bsc model alarm =
cause alarm < = >
btsSiteManagermodel
alarm =
bts equipment name alarm =
equipment processornumber
alarm < = >
faultNumber alarm < = >
operationalState state change =
perceived severity alarm =
postMortem alarm =
usageState state change =
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 187
The "postMortem" field can take two values, either "beforeBSC restart" or "after bsc restart". They have the followingmeaning:
• before BSC restart means that the notification issued bythe BSC was received by the OMC-R agent without theBSC having restarted (nominal conditions).
• after BSC restart means that the notification wasissued by the BSC and the BSC was restarted beforethe OMC-R agent received the notification. Thesenotifications do not trigger alarms.
The following logical operators can be used in the logicalexpression:
• & stands for the logical AND.
• | stands for the logical OR.
• ! stands for the logical NOT.
Value range : [logical expression]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a Counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
configRef Class 3
Description : Reference name of a DLU (Data Loading Unit)configuration file. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [1 to VVV]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute value must be set according to astatic configuration file.
Note : If the attribute is nonzero, the user must check that theDLU configuration file exists on the concerned BSC disk,since no check is performed by the OMC-R.
The configRef is an ASCII-coded integer in base 32 thatallows to code the version of the DLU configuration file asseven characters (xxaYYYz).
The btsDescription parameter gives the transcription ofthe configRef parameter.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
188 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
configRefList
Description : This attribute identifies the list of available configRef for abtsSiteManager delivery. For another object class instance,this attribute is empty. This attribute is allocated by theMD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot be modifiedby the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 150]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Release : V13
configurationType
Description : Type of configuration the alarm criterion belongs to:
The manufacturer configuration is known as the referenceconfiguration. The operator configurations are known asthe daytime configuration, the nighttime configuration, andthe specific (or particular) configuration. Refer to the alarmcriteria entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [manufacturer / operator]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
confusion Class 1
Description : Whether the CONFUSION messages are used (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is "false".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 189
counter list
Description : Type of the counter list displayed.
Value range : [default / all]
• "default":the default counter list
• "all":the whole counter list
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V12
counter list filename
Description : Full pathname of the counter list file.
Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
Release : V11
counterId
Description : Q3 name of a permanent BSS observation counter. SeeNTP < 07 >.
Value range : [50 characters max., case sensitive]
Object : mdWarning - detection function = "outOfRangeCounter"
Type : DP
counters
Description : List of the Q3 names of the counters eligible forobservation, which are in the counter list filename.
Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
Release : V11
counters
Description : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation.
Object : report template
Value range : [list of Q3 counter names]
Type : DP
Release : V11
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
190 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
cpueNumber Class 0
Description : Gives the number of the cellgroup to which the object willbe mapped. Allows to by-pass the BSC algorithm whichdistributes the sites into Cell Groups.
BSC CPUE 0 CPUE 1
BSC 12000 "HC", 12000types 3, 4, 5
BIFP0 BIFP 1
Value range :
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : CPU/BIFP load sharing (AR874 - V12)
Default value:
0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The btsSiteManager object is limited according tothe cpueNumber attribute value.
• [C]:The transceiverEquipment object instancenumber is limited according to the cpueNumberattribute value.
Notes : to modify this parameter the bdaState must be "not built"
Release : V12
cpueOccurrence
Description : Gives the number of the cell-group to which the sitehas been mapped at site creation. This mapping is notmodifiable, except by deleting the site.
Value range : Depends on system release:
• before V15.1: [0 to 95]
• from V15.1: [0 to 53]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 191
cRC Class 0
Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCMlinks is used by the CTMx board controlling the PCM link,whether it is a pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object(Abis or Ater interface) for a BSC 3000 or dependent on atranscoder object (A interface) for a TCU 3000.
Value range : [used / not used]
Object : pcmCircuit
Default value : not used
Type : DP
cRC Class 2
Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCMlinks is used by the DDTI board controlling the PCM link.
pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object (Abis or Aterinterface) for BSC 12000:
If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI boardin the BSC and the DTI board in the BTS to which thePCM link is connected must be appropriately configured,as follows:
• DDTI board: CS17 or CS18 jumper is ON (see NTP <22 >).
• DTI board: CS17 jumper is ON (see Nortel GSM BTSReference Manuals).
• PCMI board: SW2 or SW3 jumper is ON (see NortelGSM BTS Reference Manuals)
pcmCircuit object dependent on a transcoder object (Ainterface) for TCU 2G:
If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI boardin the TCU to which the PCM link is connected must beappropriately configured: CS17 and CS18 jumpers are ON(see NTP < 16 >).
In case of mismatch, the DDTI configuration takesprecedence over the CRC state and a fault message issent to the OMC-R.
Value range : [used / not used]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
192 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : pcmCircuit
Default value : not used
Type : DP
creator
Description : Report template creator name.
Value range : [30 characters max.]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
criteriaEventType
Description : Type of the notifications handled by the alarm criterion.
Selecting "alarmNotification" includes all Q3 alarmnotifications such as communicationAlarm, equipmentAlarm, environmentalAlarm, processingError-Alarm, andqualityOfServiceAlarm.
Selecting "stateChangeNotification" includes all Q3 statechange notifications.
Value range : [alarmNotification / stateChangeNotification]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
cSS7LocalSubSystemNumber Class 0
Description : SS7 local subsystem number for the BSSMAP application.
Value range : [2 to 254]
Object : signallingPoint (BSC 3000 V14)or signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)
Type : DP
Notes : • The recommended value is 254 (0x00FE).
• This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Release : V15
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
C 193
cSS7RemoteSubSystemNumber Class 0
Description : SS7 remote subsystem number for the BSSMAPapplication.
Value range : [2 to 254]
Object : signallingPoint (bsc 3000 V14) orsignallingLinkSet (bsc 3000 from V15)
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : The recommended value is 254 (0x00FE).
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
CTU cable
Description : The CTU (cable transition unit) provides the physicalinterface to the customer’s spans in the BSC 3000 and theTCU 3000.
Value range : [true / false]
True value: No break in the copper connection from theCTU to the IEM module of the LSA.
False value: The cable is improperly installed from the CTUto the IEM module of the LSA or some break in the copperconnection from the CTU and the IEM module of the LSA.
Object : iem (up to V15), lsaRc (from V16)
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
current log size
Description : Current log size expressed in bytes.
Object : log - Display
Type : DP
Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
194 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
current synchronization mode
Description : Current synchronized mode gives the currentsynchronization mode of the BTS according to thesynchronization mode received in the set external contactmessage (if received) but regardless of the synchronizationsignals available.
This parameter is used in response of the "Display DataInformation" (normal) action.
Value range : [normal Abis synchronization / slave BTS correctlysynchronized on master signal 1/ Abis synchronizationdue to master synchronization not available / slave BTSsynchronized on master SY but master GSM time hasbeen lost / Abis synchronization due to loss of masterSY / hold over mode / Abis synchronization due to GPSsynchronization unavailable or lack of accuracy / hold overmode due to a loss of GPS synchronization / hold overmode due to a GPS synchronization lack of accuracy /Network GPS Synchronized]
Object : bts
Feature : BTS synchronization
currentChannelHorqd Class 1
Description : Whether the "Current channel" element is used or notin the HANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Release : V12
cypherModeReject Class 1
Description : Whether the CYPHER MODE REJECT messages are used(Phase II compliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 195
DdARPPh1Priority class 2
Description : Specifies the priority of SAIC (Single Antenna InterferenceCancellation) mobiles on the TDMA.
Object : transceiver
Value range : [high priority, low priority]
Type : DP
Feature : Network Synchronization
Default value : high priority
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2
Description : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
• [M] :Related software object release must be V11+release.
• [M] :The version attribute of the parent transcoderobject must be set at "TCB_2".
Checks :
• [M] :The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard is unlocked.
Release : V11
data non transparent mode Class 3
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparentmode transmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS)and Abis interface (BTS ↔ BSC).
Value range : [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)
Object : bts
Default value : 9.6
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
196 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M] :The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
Checks :
• "9.6"
• "9.6" and "14.4"
Release : V11
data non transparent mode Class 3
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparentmode transmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) andAbis interface (BTS ↔ BSC).
Value range : [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 9.6 kbit/s
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] :The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• "9.6"
• "9.6" and "14.4"
Release : V9
data transparent mode Class 3
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC).
Value range : ["1.2/0.075" / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] :The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values)
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)
Release : V11
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 197
data transparent mode Class 3
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC).
Value range : ["1.2/0.075" / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)
Object : signallingPoint
Default value :
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] :The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values)
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)
Release : V9
data14-4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3
Description : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed at btslevel on the non hopping TSs.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
date
Description : Date on which the observation report was created.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : Display daily report
Type : DP
date
Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : md - Archive
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
198 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Note : Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible forthe current day.
date
Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : md - Restore
Type : DP
date
Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : omc - Archive/Restore
Type : DP
Note : Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible forthe current day.
date
Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : omc - Restore
Type : DP
day intervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in thedaytime configuration.
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 199
day to be purged
Description : Date on which the data to purge were recorded.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : omc - Data purge
Type : DP
Release : V10
dDTIIntState
Description : Internal state of the DDTI board controlling the PCM link.
[working / fault]
• working .........The board is correctlyconfigured.
Value range :
• fault ............The board configuration wasunsuccessful.
Object : pcmCircuit
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
degradedCause
Description : Gives the reasons of the degraded or enabled state.
Value range : [Not significant, GPRS]
Object : bts
Type : DD
Release : V15
degradedCause
Description : Gives the reasons of the degraded or enabled state.
Value range : [Lack of Abis resources / Site not supporting Edge/ Site insufficient number of DS0 / TRX insufficientEdge capability / Site not supporting CS3 CS4 / TRXinsufficient Packet capability / Site not supporting neitherCS3 CS4, neither Edge / Site not supporting CS3 CS4,with insufficient number of DS0 / TRX insufficient Edgecapability in a site not supporting CS3 CS4 / TRXinsufficient Edge and packet capability / Not significant]
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
200 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DD
Release : V15
delayBetweenRetrans Class 2
Description : Number of occurrences of a paging sub-group thatseparates two transmissions of the same paging message.
The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) xnbOfRepeat
Value range : [0 to 22]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V8
delivery
Description : Name of executable software package to download to theBSC disk.
The name of the delivery identifies the type and version ofthe BSS software for which it is designed as follows:
• BSC 3000 software format = "BSxabcdefghi"
Field Meaning Value
BSx Name x = [1 .. 4]
ab Version [09 . .32]
cd SubversionNumber
[01 . .99]
ef Edition [01 . .99]
gh Patch Level [01 . .99]
i Revision Factor ’C’
• BSC 3000 software format = "B3Gabcdefghi"
• TCU 3000 software format = "TC3abcdefgh"
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 201
Field Meaning Value
ab Version [13 . .32]
cd SubversionNumber
[01 . .99]
ef Edition [01 . .99]
gh Patch Level [01 . .99]
i Debug Delivery ’D’
• TCB/BTS/TRX software format = "XXXabcdef"
BTS TRX TCB
xxx BCF/BC1/BC2/SBC/CBC/PIC/IBC/ICM
TRX/TR1/DRX/CDR/EDG/ERM
TCB/TC1/TC2
ab [00 .. 32] [00 .. 32] [00 . .32]
c ’A’ .. ’H’ ’A’ .. ’H’ ’A’ .. ’H’
d [01 . .08] [01 . .08] [01 . .08]
ef [01 .. 32] [01 .. 32] [01 .. 64]
Value range : XXXabcdefghi (g, h and i are optional)
Object : software - Download
Type : DP
• [A]:Corresponding executableSoftware objectmust exist. That means that the softwaredelivery must be previously installed fromCD-ROM or gigatape on MD disk.
• [A]:The software being downloaded must bepresent on MD disk and accessible.
• [A]:There should be no downloading in progress ofthe same type of software.
• [A]:The software must match the architecture ofBSC to which it is being downloaded.
Checks :
• [A]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
202 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
deltaUtc
Description : Gap between the current OMC-R agent time and the GMTreference. Enter a positive value [+m] when the OMC-Ragent is located east of the Greenwich meridian and anegative value [-m] when it is located west.
Value range : [-1440 to +1440] minute
The range of possible values allows to update the OMC-Rreference time within ± 24 hours.
Object : md
Type : DP
Remark : Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed inthe system "Session informations" window which refers tothe workstation internal clock.
Note : This parameter cannot be modified.
detectionFunction
Description : Associated function.
Value range : [excessiveAnomalyRate / outOfRangeCounter]
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
directedRetry Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles tobe granted access to the neighbor cell, used in processingdirected retry handovers in BTS mode.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : >-48 dB
Type : DP
Release : V9
directedRetryModeUsed Class 3
Description : Specify how directed retry handovers are processed ina cell either directly by the BSC (microcells only) or byquerying the BTS first.
Value range : [bsc / bts]
Object : bts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 203
Default value : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The BSC mode is authorized if the cell is amicrocell (cellType) and the adjacent cellumbrella Ref attribute is defined.
Note : The micro cell should be entirely covered by the macro cellin order to use efficiently the bsc mode.
The use of the bts mode is recommended in a hot spotwhen these are several micro cells under the umbrella.The bts mode allows the use of micro cells to rescue theumbrella cell and also avoids a saturation of the umbrellacell.
The bts mode is also recommended for all other cases.
Release : V9
directedRetryPrio Class 3
Description : Defines the number priority for directed retry handovers.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821- V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
directory
Description : Name of the directory created on the OMC-R agent disksfor storing a delivery containing a BSS software version.
The directory name identifies the type and version of theBSS software stored. Refer to the executableSoftwareentry in the Dictionary.
If the directory exists on the OMC-R agent disks, the useris warned.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : md - Create delivery dir
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
204 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
display Data Configuration
Description : A command applied on btsSiteManager to configure thedata display.
Value range : normal EDGE
Object : Select the object instance and choose the command.
display Data Information
Description : A command applied on btssiteManager to state requireddata display.
Value range : normal EDGE
Object : Select the object instance and choose the command.
distHreqt Class 3
Description : Number of distance measurements, used to computethe weighted average MS-to-BTS distance in handoveralgorithms.
Value range : [1 to 16]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:distHreqt is equal to the number of weights indistWtsList (refer to the next entry).
distributionActivation Class 3
Description : Activation of distributions for observation purpose.
Object : bts
Value range : [0/1: disabled / enabled]
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Default value : 0
Checks : • [C/M]:Measurement distribution cannot be activatedif interference matrix is running on this cell.The purpose of this semantic check is toforbid activation of interference matrix anddistribution features at the same time on a cell.
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 205
distributionDuration Class 3
Description : Duration of the observation.
Object : bts
Value range : [0..92] (1 unit = 15 minutes)
Note : 0 is interpreted as 1
Type : DP
Checks: • [C/M]Measurement distributioncannot be activated ifinterference matrix isrunning on this cell. Thepurpose of this semanticcheck is to forbid activationof interference matrix anddistribution features at thesame time on a cell.
Feature : Distribution on Radiomeasurements
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is mandatory.It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, andapplicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
distributionTime Class 3
Description : Starting time of theobservation period fordistributions (OMC-R servercurrent timer).
Object : bts
Value range : [00:00 to 23:59]
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radiomeasurements
Default value : 00:00
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
206 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks: • [C/M]Measurement distributioncannot be activated ifinterference matrix isrunning on this cell. Thepurpose of this semanticcheck is to forbid activationof interference matrix anddistribution features at thesame time on a cell.
Note : This parameter ismandatory. It is onlyavailable for BSC 3000 V15and later, and applicablesince BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
Note : The distributionTimeparameter set by theoperator is relative to theOMC-R server current timer,and not to the local BTShour.
In case of feature activationon all cells of a BSC, thetime to compute all thecorresponding TGEs cantake up to 20 minutes. Toensure that the featureis not to be activated theday after, the operatormust leave a margin of 30minutes between activationtime and distributionTimeparameter.
Release : V15
distributionQualityThreshold Class 3
Description : RxQual threshold for RxLev distribution.
This parameter is used according to the followingprinciples:
• Uplink case: measurements are those given by theBTS. A measurement is taken into account in the uplink
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 207
RxLev distribution if the RxQual_UP is equal to orgreater than distributionQualityThreshold.
• Downlink case: measurements are those given bythe MS. A measurement is taken into account in thedownlink RxLev distribution if the RxQual_Dw is equalto or greater than distributionQualityThreshold.
• For RxQual distributions, all measurements are keptwhatever their RxQual values are.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 7]
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
distWtsList Class 3
Description : List of no more than sixteen weights, used to computethe average MS-to-BTS distance from distHreqtmeasurements.
The L1M function balances distHreqt raw measurementswith the weights defined in the distWtsList list. Eachmeasurement is partnered with one weight in the list.Weight/measurement associations are set in the orderwhich the weights are recorded. The latest receivedmeasurement is always partnered with the first weight inthe list.
Super-average = [∑ (measurement i x weighti)] / 100, i = 1to distHreqt
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 40 30 20 10
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The number of weights in the list is equal todistHreqt and their sum equals 100.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
208 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
diversity Class 2
Description : Whether reception diversity is allowed in a cell. Thisparameter is used to control the diversity activation and thechoice of the algorithm
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Value range: disabled (0) / enabled (1)
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS2 and thenext code in the two DL GMSK Only Link Adaptation tablesand the DL GMSK table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Type : DP
Release : V15
dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS3 and thenext code in the two DL GMSK Only Link Adaptation tablesand the DL GMSK table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaption tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
dlMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS2 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 209
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
dlMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS3 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
dlMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS5 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS5 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
dlMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS6 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS6 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
210 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
dlMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS7 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS7 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
dlMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS8 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS8 in the Link Adaptation tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
drxTimerMax Class 3
Description : Maximum value allowed for mobile stations to requestnon-DRX mode after packet transfer mode.
Value range : [0 (0s), 1 (1s), 2 (2s), 3 (4s), 4 (8s), 5 (16s), 6 (32s), 7(64s)]
The deactivation value for the sub-feature TF1220.3transfer non DRX mode is 0.
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12, and TF1220 V12.4c)
Default value : 0 s
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
D 211
dtxMode Class 3
Description : MS control of the discontinuous transmission mechanism ina cell.
Discontinuous transmission is designed to lessen MSbattery consumption and diminish interference by breakingoff the transmission when no data or speech are beingtransmitted.
Value range : • For BSC 3000:[frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx,frmsShallUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx,frmsShallNotUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx ,frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsMayUseDtx,frmsShallUseDtx_hrShallUseDtx,frmsShallNotUseDtx_hrShallUseDtx].
• For BSC 6000 and BSC 12000HC:[msMayUseDtxmsShallUseDtxmsShallNotUseDtx]
Object : bts
Default value : • For BSC 3000:frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsMayUseDtx
• For BSC 6000 and BSC 12000HC:msShallNotUseDtx
Type : DP
Remark : The cellDtxDownlink attribute allows users to control theuse of discontinuous transmission on the downlink. Referto this entry in the Dictionary.
duplex link state
Description : Active/passive chain link state.
Value range : [working, fault]
Object : bsc and hardware BSC 12000HC
Type : DD
Release : V10
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
212 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
duration
Description : Time delay before running the next command.
The Sleep command can be inserted in a command file asmany times as necessary.
Value range : [1 to 3600] seconds
Object : commandFile - Sleep command
Type : DP
dwAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime)
Description : Defines the DL TBF Keep-Alive timer.
Value range : [1 to 64] steps 500 ms for downlink transfer
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12 and TF1220 - V12.4c)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Release : V12
dynamicAgprsAllowed Class 2
Description : Enables or disables the Dynamic Agprs feature on thewhole PCU.
Depending on BSC architecture and release:
• dynamicAgprsAllowed is a gprsPcuLockExtendedConfsub-parameter (BSC 12000HC V12 or BSC 3000 V14)
• dynamicAgprsAllowed is a stand-alone parameter (BSCV15)
Value range : Depending on BSC architecture and release:
• [enabled / disabled] (BSC 12000HC V12 or BSC 3000V14)
• [yes / no] (BSC V15)
Object : pcu
Default value : disabled or no (according to BSC architecture and release)
Release : V14
Note : If EDGE is activated, enabling the dynamic Agprs feature isstrongly recommended.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 213
Eearly classmark sending Class 3
Description : Whether Early classmark sending procedure initiated by amultiband MS is allowed.
The information is broadcasted to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH (SYS INFO 3).
Value range : [Not Allowed/Allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : Not Allowed
Type : DP
Note : The recommended value is “Allowed”.
Release : V10
edgeDataServiceType Class 2
Description : Type of EDGE packet data service which can be managedby one TDMA.
Value range : capability not requested / full capability requested
Object : transceiver
Default value : capability not requested
Type : DP
Release : V15
edgeFavor Class 3
Description : The parameter is used by PCU to configure the relativeoffer of an EDGE TDMA.
Value range : 1 to 5 (by step of 0,04)
Object : transceiver
Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Release : V15
eDGEMixity Class 3
Description : Limitation of GPRS mobiles allocation on EDGE TDMA.
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE dynamic allocation (20230)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
214 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 100
Type : DP
Release : V15
efd
Description : Identifier of an efd object defined with regard to the mdobject.
Seven efd objects are automatically created for the mdobject, an "efdAlarm" type object, an "efdConfiguration"type object, an "efdObs" type object, an "efdSpecificNotif"type object, an "efdStateChange" type object, an"efdTrace" type object, and an "efdClass" type object.Refer to the efdType entry.
The administrativeState attribute of an efd object sets theconditions for forwarding the associated messages to theOMC-R manager.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : efd
Type : Id
Note : An efd object should be created in unlocked state.
efdType
Description : Type of the messages processed by the efd object.
Value range : [efdAlarm / efdConfiguration / efdObs / efdSpecificNotif /efdStateChange / efdTrace / efdClass]
An "efdAlarm" type object tallies alarm notifications issuedby the OMC-R agent.
An "efdConfiguration" type object tallies object create andset messages issued by the users and attribute valuechange messages issued by the BSC.
An "efdObs" type object tallies observation messagescollected by the OMC-R agent.
An "efdSpecificNotif" type object allows users to definesets of specific notification messages to process such asendOfArchival, endOfRestore, beginningOfBdeArchival,downloadEnd, endOfBdeArchival, endOfBdaBuiding,endOfMarkingConsultation, or endOfSoftwareChange.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 215
An "efdStateChange" type object tallies object state changenotifications.
An "efdTrace" type object tallies trace messages collectedby the OMC-R agent.
An "efdClass" type object tallies efd class objects creationand deletion messages. Thus these notifications enable toidentify the external managers which are being connectedto the MD-R.
Object : efd
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
egprsIrULActivation Class 3
Description : Whether the uplink incremental redundancy feature isenabled or disabled.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : • [M] :Uplink incremental redundancy can not beactivated if EDGE feature is not activated onthe cell. Refer to the egprsServices entry inthis dictionary.
Release : V16
Note: This parameter is mandatory.
egprsServices Class 3
Description :
Activates EDGE in the cell. If ’1’, sets to ’1’ the EDGE presencebit in the GPRS CELL Options including BEP-PERIOD,EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL _REQUEST. If ’0’, sets to ’0’the EDGE presence bit in the GPRS Cell Options omittingBEP-PERIOD and EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST.
Valuerange :
Disabled (value 0); Enabled (value 1)
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)
Defaultvalue :
0
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
216 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V15
emergencyCallPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocationrequest whose cause is "emergency call".
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when anSDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
emergencyCallRestricted Class 3
Description : Whether emergency calls from mobiles are authorized ina cell.
Value range : [not restricted / restricted]
• not restricted .....All emergency calls areaccepted whichever is themobile access class
• restricted
— Emergency calls are forbidden for mobiles withaccess classes 0 to 9
— For mobiles with access classes 11 to 15,emergency calls are forbidden for thosewhose classes are listed in the entries of thenotAllowedAccessClasses attribute
Object : bts
Default value : restricted
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 217
emergencyThreshold Class 3
Description : If the priority of a group call is equal or higher thanemergencyThreshold, a notification is periodically sent. Amobile station entering a cell where such a high prioritygroup call is ongoing is then notified.
Value range : [none, priority 4, priority 3, priority 2, priority 1, priority 0,priority B, priority A]none is the lowest prioritypriority 0 is recommended
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : ASCI
Default value : priority 0
Type : DP
Release : GSM-R V15
eMLPPThreshold Class 3
Description : Defines the minimum value that the eMLPP Precedenceof an incoming call must have to be taken into accountby the BSS with inband signalling (paging and vbs/vgcsassignment request).
Value range : [none / priority 4 / priority 3 / priority 2 / priority 1 / priority 0/ priority B / priority A]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : ASCI (GSM-R V12)
Default value : none
Type : DP
Release : V12
enableRepeatedFacchFr Class 2
Description : Enables or disables the Repeated FACCH feature on AMRFR.
Value range : [disabled / FR 4.75 kbps / FR 5.9 and lower / FR 6.7 andlower]
Object : bts
Feature : Repeated Downlink FACCH
Default value : disabled (0)
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
218 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Notes : • The recommended value is FR 6.7 and lower.
• This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.
Release : V16
encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the CIPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (PhaseII compliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (PhaseII compliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 219
encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1
Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGEmessages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
encryptionAlgorSupported Class 0
Description : For BSC 3000. Type of ciphering capability supportedby the BTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability issupported, users’ calls are not crypted.
Value range : • [none / gsmEncryptionV1]
Object : bsc
Default value : none
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:Only one type of ciphering capability isdefined.
Version : V15-V16
encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1
Description : For BSC 2G. Type of ciphering capability supported by theBTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability is supported,users’ calls are not crypted.
Value range : • [none / gsmEncryptionV1]
Object : bsc
Default value : none
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:Only one type of ciphering capability isdefined.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
220 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
end date
Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date andbefore. It is on or after beginning date.
Do not fill in if information produced to the end should bedisplayed.
Value range : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss]
Object : Call monitoring - Display (SDO)
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:end date is on or after beginning date.
end date
Description : Date on which data were last recorded in the log (default isthe current date). It is on or after start date.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 1>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : System session log - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:end date is on or after start date.
end of probative Phase Type
Description : Whether the user validate or cancel the software changeafter new delivery activation.
Value range : [validate software change / cancel software change]
Object : bsc - End of probative phase
Type : DP
Release : V11
Note : This parameter only applies to BSC Upgrades withprototype BDA change (BSC Version Upgrade and BSCEdition Upgrade).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 221
end time
Description : Absolute time of final job run if the job is to be periodicallyrun over a limited period of time.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.
If date matches the date in start time, fill in time with avalue after start time.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : job
Condition : To define when a job periodicity is defined and only if thejob life is limited (user’s choice).
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:end time is after start time.
end time
Description : End of system log reading on the requested end date(default is 24:00).
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<time>]
Object : System session log - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:If end date and start date are identical, endtime is after start time.
endAlarmFilter
Description : Condition for ceasing the alarm when no counter isinvolved.
The fields that can be combined in the logical expressionare described under the startAlarmFilter entry in theDictionary.
Value range : [logical expression]
Object : alarm criteria
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
222 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Condition : To define if no counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
endAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum counting value in the reference period,below which an end-of-alarm message is sent if thecorresponding start-of-alarm message was sent first. Thevalue must be checked by users.
This attribute defines a minimum value read at the end ofthe defined refPeriod.
It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold.
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R isrestarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate"
Type : DP
endAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresh oldHigh)counting value in the reference period, above/below whichan end of "lower threshold/upper threshold" alarm messageis sent if the corresponding start-of-alarm message wassent first. The value must be checked by users.
If thesholdType is "thresholdLow", it defines a minimumvalue for a one minute reference period (or the countercollecting period for PCM unavailability counters), abovewhich the end of "lower threshold" alarm message is sent.It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold "low".
If thesholdType is "thresholdHigh", it defines a maximumvalue for a one minute reference period (or the countercollecting period for PCM unavailability counters), belowwhich the end of "upper threshold" alarm message is sent.It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold "high".
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R isrestarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 223
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter"
Type : DP
Remark :
• The threshold limits depend on the associated counter.
• The BSS counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.
endCounterThreshold
Description : Maximum counting threshold when a counter is involved.
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation reportsto cumulate. It is six hours before beginSearchTime at themost.
Observation data accumulating ends with the informationcontained in the first observation message collectedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredbeginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : Display custom report
Type DP
Checks : • [A]:endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
• [A]:The defined period is less than or equal to sixhours.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation report toedit (default is one hour before beginSearchTime).
The report displays the information contained in the lastobservation message generated in the requested periodof time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry inthe Dictionary.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
224 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : Display raw report
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
Note : If no permanent observation has been received within thespecified period, a message is displayed.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanentobservations to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime).
The last listed report is the first observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : List available permanent observations
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanentobservations to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime).
The last listed report is the first observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : List available temporary observations
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 225
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanentobservations to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime).
The last listed report is the first observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
endSessionCriteriaDuration
Description : Definition of the criterion end a call path tracing session.
Value range : [5 to 1080] mins
Type : DP
Release : V11
endSessionCriteriaType
Description : Definition of the criterion that will end a call path tracingsession.
[duration / number (of calls) / oam (locking thecallPathTrace object)]
• duration .........endSessionCriteriaDuration= [5 to 1080] minutes
• number ..........endSessionCriteriaNbCall =[1 to 2500]
• oam ............administrativeState = "locked"
Value range :
Only one criterion is defined. When it is true, the callfollow-up session is stopped in the BSS. Refer to theusageState entry related to this object in the Dictionary.
Object : callPathTrace
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
226 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Checks : • [M] :The callPathTrace object is locked.
Note : The session is automatically restarted by unlocking theobject, regardless of the end-of-session criterion.
enhancedTRAUFrameIndication
Description : Whether the BTS uses the Enhanced TRAU Frame (EFT =executable Software) for TCU.
Value range : [notAvailable / available / active]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Feature : PCM error correction (FM660 - V12)
Notes : • This attribute is set to "available" only if thetranscoderBoards of all the related TCUs are of TCB2board type and their software are V12.
• This attribute is set to "active" only if the pcmErrorCorrection attribute of one bts object related to the BSC isset to "1".
• Only BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture can support the EnhancedTRAU Frame.
Release : V12
enhCellTieringConfiguration
Description : This attribute allows to configure the cell tiering algorithm atBTS level instead of the cellTieringConfiguration attributefrom V14 release BSC.
This parameter is composed of the following fiveparameters:
pcwiHreqave: Averaging window size for PwCI
Value range: Int [0 to 16]
numberOfPcwiSamples: Minimum number of PwCIsamples required to reach a reliable distribution(representative of the real distribution in the whole cell) x1000
Value range: Int [0 to 60]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 227
hoMarginTiering: Hysteresis between the uCirDLH andlCirDLH tiering thresholds to avoid ping-pong handovers,expressed in dB
Value range: Int [0 to 63] dB
selfTuningObs: Indicating that the bts is in charge ofsending PwCI distribution onto Abis interface
Value range: [notSentByBts / sentEveryTime /sentEveryHour]
nbLargeReuseDataChannels: Mean number of logicalchannels belonging to the large frequency reuse patternand used at the same time for data communications
Value range: Int [-16 to 16]
Object : handOverControl
Type : DP
Available bits are the following:
Bit N: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value X X 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note :
First bits (upper bits) indicate :
- All bits set to 0 = PwCI distribution is gathered if tieringis activated (intracell attribute) but not sent onto Abisinterface.
Checks : • [C/M] 522DI01:Only ten cells at OMC-R levelcan be observed with thismode
Checks : • [C/M] 522DI02:Only 40 cells at OMC-R levelcan be observed with thismode
Checks : • [C/M] 522CO01:Bit six and seven can not beset at the same time
Checks : • [C/M] 522CO02:All the handoverControl objectinstances of the OMC-R musthave the same value for theselfTuningObs field when a bitis different from 0
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
228 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Note : The bit numbers 0 to 5 (six lower bits) are reserved forfuture use.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Release : V14
equipment identity
Description : This parameter is composed of the bts equipment nameand the equipment processor number parameters. Referto these entries in the Dictionary.
Object : mdWarning (create)
Type : DP
Release : V11
Note : During the command "create mdWarning", the operator candefine either "equipment identity" or "processor identity",but not both.
equipment processor number
Description : To select a processor or an equipment in the preselectedtype
Consult the corresponding notification messages("Equipment number" field).
Do not fill in if neither bsc equipment name nor btsequipment name is defined or if this criterion is not to beselected.
Value range : [0 to 200]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
error concealment unit Class 2
Description : Whether the Error Concealment Unit (ECU) is used. TheECU provides a voice quality improvement on the uplink inbad radio propagation conditions.
Value range : [not used, used]
Object : bts
Default value : not used
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 229
Type : DP
Release : V11
errorCorrectionMethod Class 3
Description : Type of correction method used on the A interface.
Value range : [basicRetr (only value accepted) / prevCyclRetr]
Object : signallingLinkSet
Default value : basicRetr
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is 1"basicRetr".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
estimatedSiteLoad Class 3
Description : This parameter is used
• at site creation, in order to preset the Erlangconsumption of the new Cell Group
• otherwise, in order to set the Erlang consumption ofa site to a value either less or greater than the onecalculated using the ERLANG_PER_N_TRX_CELLtable
Value range : [0 to 1100]
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : 0 (the consumption is then calculated using theERLANG_PER_N_TRX_CELL table)
Type : DP
Release : V15
exclusive interval of codano
Description : To select messages according to their fault number.
The filter can contain one (or several) intervals defining thefault numbers not to be retrieved. For example, interval5~8 enables to retrieve ALL the fault numbers except faultnumbers 5, 6, 7, and 8.
Value range : [0 to 65535 - 0 to 65535]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
230 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V12
exclusive list of codano
Description : To select messages that do not contain one (or several)given fault number(s).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Release : V12
executableSoftware
Description : An instance of this managed object class is used torepresent a unit of software that is separately identifiableand is ready to be used by the system.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
executableSoftwareId
Description : Identifier of a ’executableSoftware’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, if notgiven by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : Id
Release : V13
executableSoftwareName
Description : Name of a software version. This attribute is allocated bythe MD-R at object creation, if not given by the Manager.This attribute cannot be modified.
Value range : [9 to 12] String
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 231
extCommsInt
State of the X.25 links set up from the BSC chain X.25ports [working / fault]. Each port is identified with regard tothe mother SICX board:
• working .........The X.25 link is correctlyinitialized.
Description :
• fault ............An error was detected (SLSboard faulty, etc.).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
extended cell Class 2
Description : Whether the cell is extended (up to 120 km large) or not.
The cell working mode governs the upper limit of thefollowing attribute values (refer to theses entries in theDictionary):
• callClearing, msRangeMax, and rndAccTimAdvThreshold attributes of the bts object
• concentAlgoExtMsRange and concentAlgoIntMsRange attributes of the associated handOverControl objectif the bts object describes a concentric cell
Value range : [true (extended) / false (normal)]
Object : bts
Default value : false
Type : DP
• [M]:If the attribute is changed to "true" and aCBCH is defined for the cell, this channelis carried by a radio time slot with an evenidentifier number. Refer to the channelTypeentry in the Dictionary.
Checks :
• [M]:It is not possible to unlock a BTS that has itsextendedCell parameter set to true if the siteis running software from one of Dual TDMADLUs.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
232 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Release : V9
Note : In that mode, the radio time slots with odd identifiernumbers are unknown to the BSC and the diversityfunctionality is not available in the cells.
extendedTimingAdvanceWindow
Description :
This parameter is used to control the Extended Timing AdvanceWindow feature.
Valuerange :
[disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Defaultvalue :
disabled
Type : DP
Checks: • [M]:It is not possible to unlock a BTS that has itsextendedTimingAdvanceWindow parameter set todisabled if the site is running software from one of DualTDMA DLUs.
Release : V16
Note : The recommended value is enabled.
The feature will be enabled/disabled for all the TRXs of a given cell.
external alarm configuration Class 2
Description : Configuration of the external alarm loops controlled by aBTS. Alarm loop "n" is monitored (not monitored) when thenth bit is set to 1 (0) in the binary field. The alarm mask isimmediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below.The alarm mask can be set using the hexadecimal field aswell as the binary field.
The number of connectors per alarm board depends on thetype of the alarm boards installed in the BTS.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
E 233
BTS Type of board Number of protectedexternal alarms
per cabinet
S2000 ALATO 4
S2000H/L SBCF 6
S4000 Indoor ALAT 4
S4000 Outdoor ALATO 4
S4000 Smart ALATO 4
S8000 ALCORECAL (CBCF)
16
S12000 ALCORECAL (CBCF)
16
BTS 18000 ABM 16
BTS 6000 (Seenote below.)
ABM/RICAM 8
The correspondence between those 48 bits and theexternal alarms of each site directly depends on threefactors: the type of BTS, the number of cabinets, and theconvention for numbering those cabinets.
• S4000:24 external alarms max., 6cabinets - 4 externals alarmsper cabinet. Therefore 4 bits bycabinets placed on the mask onthe same order of the numberingof the cabinets.Example: to unmask all theexternal alarms of S4000 IndoorS22 the alarm mask would be:
• S8000/S12000/BTS 18000:
48 external alarms max., up to 3cabinets in the future - 16 alarmsper cabinet (16 bits per cabinet).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
234 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• BTS 600024 external alarms max., up to 3cabinets - 8 alarms per cabinet (8bits per cabinet).
• S2000H/L:18 external alarms max., up to 3cabinets in the future - 6 alarmsper cabinet (6 bits per cabinet).
Value range : [48-bit register]
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : 48 bits equal to "0"
Type : DP
Note : If RICAM/ICAM is used instead in the BCF, the reducedconnectivity leads to limitations in terms of ABMs. Then interm of total alarms:
• BTS18000 with RICAM/ICAM max. configurationincludes one full main cab + one half ext cab, that is 1RICAM + 2 ABMs, so 24 DALE max.
• BT6000 with RICAM/ICAM max. configuration includesone main cab + one ext cab, that is 1 RICAM+ 1 ABM,so 16 DALE max.
Release : V9
external battery cabinet Class 2
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "ancillarybattery cabinet" in S8000 Outdoor.
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V9
externalTime
Description : Current OMC-R agent date and time.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailedin NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : md
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
F 235
Remark : Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed inthe system "Session informations" window which refers tothe workstation internal clock.
Note : This parameter cannot be modified.
extUtbfNoData Class 3
Description : When this Extended UL TBF sub-feature is enabled,it makes possible that MSs do not send Packet UplinkDummy Control Block during periods of inactivity.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Release : V15
FfacchPowerOffset Class 2
Description : Power offset that applies to FACCH signalling
Value range : [0..10]; step = 2
Object : bts
Type : DP
Feature : Tx power offset for signalling channels
Default value : 0 (no power offset)
Note : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.
Release : V16
Family
Description : Family of counters in which are chosen the counters to beobserved.
The list of the available families depends on the Observedobject class and the observation type selected in thereport template definition of the observation. See Tableshereafter.
Value range : [See tables below]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
236 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [M] :Family is used to include counters inobservation report. Family is not saved withthe report template as it is reset every timethe template editor is open. Counters fromdifferent families can be included in the samereport template.
Observed object: bsc
Observation real time(ORT)
A interface, synthetic
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
A interface, OMC interfaceReleases of communicationsin signaling phase, Channelmode, ASCI, NONE, BSC3G, synthetic
Observed object: bts
Observation real time(ORT)
SDCCH allocations,Intra-bss handovers,Inter-bss handovers,TCH allocations,Establishment,Global handovers
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
SDCCH allocations,TCH allocations,Channel mode,Inter-bss handovers,Intra-bss handovers,Intra-cell handovers,Dedicated channelassignment,Global handovers,Establishment,Releases of communicationsin signaling phase,Releases of communicationsin traffic phase,Layer One Management,Interferences, Directed retry,SMS, Abis Level 2, ASCI,NONE, GPRS, AMR, EDGE,WPS, synthetic
Observed object : transceiverZone
Observation real time(ORT)
SDCCH allocations onTrZone TCH allocations onTrZone
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
F 237
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
SDCCH allocations onTrZone,TCH allocations on TrZone,Layer One Management onTrZone,GPRS on TrZone,AMR on TrZone, EDGE,WPS
Observed object : transceiverEquipment
Observation real time(ORT)
----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
----------------------
Observed object : btsSiteManager
Observation real time(ORT)
----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
BSC 3G - Abis Level 1
Observed object : pcmCircuit
Observation real time(ORT)
-----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
PCM/synthetic
Observed object : adjacentCellHandOver
Observation real time(ORT)
---------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
Neighbor cells, AMR
Observed object : omu
Observation real time(ORT)
-----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
BSC 3G
Observed object : tmu
Observation real time(ORT)
-----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
BSC 3G
Observed object : cc
Observation real time(ORT)
-----------------------
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
238 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
BSC 3G
Observed object : cem
Observation real time(ORT)
-----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
BSC 3G
Observed object : pcmPort
Observation real time(ORT)
----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
BSC 3G - PcmPort
Observed object : signalingLink
Observation real time(ORT)
----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
----------------------
Observed object : channel
Observation real time(ORT)
----------------------
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
----------------------
faultNumber
Description : To select messages with a given fault number.
This parameter is a component of the specific problemsfilter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 40000]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
fERThreshold1 Class 3
Description : Lowest threshold taken into account for Frame ErasureRate (FER) evaluation.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 %
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
F 239
Default value : 0
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
Checks : • [C/M]:Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <=fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <=fERThreshold4
The purpose of this semantic check is to checkcoherency between FER thresholds.
Release : V15
fERThreshold2 Class 3
Description : Second threshold taken into account for FER evaluation.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 %
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Default value : 0
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
Checks : • [C/M]:Following rule applies: fERThreshold1<= fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <=fERThreshold4
The purpose of this semantic check is to checkcoherency between FER thresholds.
Release :V15
fERThreshold3 Class 3
Description : Third threshold taken into account for FER evaluation.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 %
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Default value : 0
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
240 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [C/M]:Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <=fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <=fERThreshold4
The purpose of this semantic check is to checkcoherency between FER thresholds.
Release : V15
fERThreshold4 Class 3
Description : Highest threshold taken into account for FER evaluation.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 %
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Default value : 0
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.
Checks : • [C/M]:Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <=fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <=fERThreshold4
The purpose of this semantic check is to checkcoherency between FER thresholds.
Release : V15
fhsRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the frequencyHoppingSystem object thatdefines the frequency hopping management parametersfor the radio time slot.
Setting this attribute and the maio attribute allows the timeslot to obey frequency hopping laws.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : channel
Condition : To define if the time slot hops in frequencies.
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute is undefined if frequencyhopping is not allowed for the parent btsobject (btsIsHopping = "no hopping") orthe channelType of the channel object is"mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
F 241
• [C/M]:If the attribute is defined, the following ischecked:
• The maio attribute is also defined.
• The referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object iscreated for the parent bts object.
• Each frequency occurs once in the mobileAllocation list and is allotted in the cellAllocation list of theparent bts object.
• The number of frequencies in the mobileAllocationlist is greater than the maio attribute value.
• Concentric cell: The frequencies in themobileAllocation list are not used in thezone to which the parent transceiver object doesnot belong.
filteredTrafficCoefficient Class 3
Description : Filter coefficient which is taken into account in the cell loadevaluation.
Object : bts
Value range : [0 to 1, by step of 0.001]
Type : DP
Feature : AMR based on traffic
Default value : 0
Release : V15
floor
Description : Floor number which identifies the localization in a building.
Value range : [1 to 2 characters]
Object : transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardwaretranscoder 3G.
Type : DD
flowControlMaxDelay
Description : This attribute specifies the maximum time interval betweentwo consecutive FLOW-CONTROL-MS messages sent tothe SGSN.
Value range : [5 to 6000] seconds
Object : pcusn
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
242 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 300
Type : DP
Release : V14
flowControlMaxRate
Description : This attribute specifies the minimum interval betweensending consecutive Flow-Control PDU for a given BVCor for a MS. It represents the C timer in the ETSI GPRSspecifications.
Value range : [1001 to 9999] ms
Object : pcusn
Default value : 2000
Type : DP
Release : V14
fnOffset class 2
Description : Allows to specify and control Frame Number(FN) difference between BTSs in case of networksynchronization by GPS.
Refer also to the tnOffset entry in this dictionary.
Object : btsSiteManager
Value range : [0..84863]
Type : DP
Feature : Network Synchronization
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
forced handover algo Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobilesto be granted access to a neighbor cell in case of forcedhandover.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : less than -110
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
F 243
Type : DP
Release : V9
frAmrPriority Class 2
Description : This attribute defines the AMR FR priority of a TDMA.
This attribute is modified only if the corresponding ’bts’object instance is locked (objectMustBeLockedError).
Value range : Int [0 to 2]Priority 0 is given to a high priority TDMAPriority 1 is given to a low priority TDMAPriority 2 disables this service on the TDMA
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
frequencyHoppingSystem
Description : Identifier of a frequencyHoppingSystem object that definesfrequency hopping management parameters for radio timeslots that obey frequency hopping laws. A bts object mayreference up to sixty-four objects of this type.
Refer to the hoppingSequenceNumber andmobileAllocation entries in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : frequencyHoppingSystem
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created and thefrequencyHoppingSystem object is not createdfor that object.
• [C]:The number of frequencyHoppingSystemobjects created for a bts object is limited tosixty-four.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
• [M/D]:The frequencyHoppingSystem object iscreated.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
244 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No channel object dependent on the bts objectrefers to the frequencyHoppingSystem object(fhsRef attribute).
frPowerControlTargetMode Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the target codec mode for AMR FRpower control.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute is modified if the ’powerControl’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [FR 12.2 / FR 10.2 / FR 6.7 / FR 5.9 / FR 4.75]
Object : powerControl
Default value : FR 12.2
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
frPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3
Description : Downlink AMR codec target used to define the downlinkpower control threshold for FR AMR calls.
Value range : [FR 12.2 / FR 10.2 / FR 6.7 / FR 5.9 / FR 4.75]
Object : powerControl
Feature : Tx power offset for signalling channels
Default value : FR 12.2
Type : DP
Notes : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.
Release : V16
fullDlKa Class 3
Description : Whether the Full DL Keep Active feature is enabled or not.
This feature allows MSs that operate in a non-extended ULTBF mode to increase their uplink throughput.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
G 245
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The following flag combination is prohibited:nwExtUtbf = enabled and fullDlKa =disabled
Release : V15
Ggeographical coordinates
Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the equipmentin the network.
These coordinates are defined by a latitude and alongitude, each expressed by four fields.
Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:
• Deg Lat ..........[0 to 90] degrees
• Min Lat ..........[0 to 59] minutes
• Hundreth of sec Lat........
[0 to 5999] hundredth second
• Direction Lat ....[North / South]
Longitude is expressed by the four following fields:
• Deg Lon ..........[0 to 180] degrees
• Min Lon ..........[0 to 59] minutes
• Hundreth of sec Lon........
[0 to 5999] hundredth second
• Direction Lon ....[East / West]
Object : bscbtsSiteManagermdtranscoder
Type : DI
Release : V11
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
246 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
geographical coordinates
Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the pcuSNequipment in the network.
These coordinates are defined by a latitude and alongitude, each expressed by four fields.
Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:
• Deg Lat ..........[0 to 90] degrees
• Min Lat ..........[0 to 59] minutes
• Hundreth of sec Lat...........
[0 to 5999] hundredth second
• Direction Lat ....[North / South]
Longitude is expressed by the four following fields:
• Deg Lon ..........[0 to 180] degrees
• Min Lon ..........[0 to 59] minutes
• Hundreth of sec Lon...........
[0 to 5999] hundredth second
• Direction Lon ....[East / West]
Object : pcu, pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DI
Release : V12
gprsAvgParam Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
• nAvgI
• nAvgT
• nAvgW
Refer to these entries in this dictionary.
Release : V12
gprsCellActivation Class 3
Description : This is a Flag used to activate the GPRS at cell level.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
G 247
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
gprsNetworkModeOperation Class 3
Description : Indicates the network mode of operation.
Value range : [0..2] with:
• 0 = NMO II
• 1 = NMO I (recommended value, activates the featurefrom the MSs point of view)
• 2 = NMO III (forbidden in this release)
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I)
Default value : 0 (NMO II)
Type : DP
Release : V15
gprsPcuCrossConnectList Class 2
Description : This parameter is a list of pairs of the following attributes:
• pcmNbr
• nbrTch
Refer to these entries in this dictionary.
Value range : BSC 12000HC: [0 to 12] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch],BSC 3000 V15: [0 to 24] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch]BSC 3000 V16, E1 PCM: [0 to 32] pairs of [pcmNbr,nbrTch]BSC 3000 V16, T1 PCM: [0 to 36] pairs of [pcmNbr,nbrTch]
Feature : PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC (18749)
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
248 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
• dynamicAgprsAllowed
• agprsTSharingProtection
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
Default value : [disabled / 0]
Release : V12
gprsPermittedAccess Class 3
Description : It defines the Routing Area Color (3-bit length) of the cell.If the MS receives different values of the Routing AreaColor field in two different cells, it shall interpret the cellre-selection information as if the two cells belonged todifferent RA.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
gprsPreemption Class 3
Description : Set to yes, it allows the PCU to refuse GSM preemptionover shared GSM/GPRS TS if GPRS resources are notsufficient to ensure the minimum bandwidth for each MS.
In the case of lack of GSM radio TS, the BSC has toallocate one shared GSM/GPRS radio TS to GSM anda preemption procedure is started. When one sharedradio TS temporarily allocated to GSM is released (endof GSM allocation due to end of call or handover), thena reallocation procedure is started to increase the GPRScapacity.
Value range : [yes / no]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 - V12)
Default value : yes
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
G 249
Type : DP
Release : V12
gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3
Description : Protection timer used by the BSC in order to reduce theload in case of PCU TDMA TS Status Nack messagereception during a preemption procedure. This message issent by the PCU.
Value range : [1 to 60] second(s)
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 - V12)
Default value : 10
Type : DP
Release : V12
gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)
Description : Priorities affected to the TDMA.
Priority affected to the TDMA when allocating packetresources.
Value range : [p1 or p2 (high GPRS priority)]
Object : transceiver
Default value : p1
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
gprsState
Description : Reserved for future use.
Object : bts (cell)
Type : DD
Release : V15
gprsState
Description : Reserved for future use.
Object : transceiver
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
250 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DD
Release : V15
gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3
Description : Waiting timer for the reception of the uplink assignmentafter sending a PACKET RESOURCE REQUESTmessage.
This timer is used on the MS side to define when to stopwaiting for Packet Uplink Assignment Message aftersending of a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message
Value range : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s]
Object : bts
Default value : 0.5 s
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : These parameters are applicable for BSS V12 and V14only.
gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3
Description : Waiting timer for release of the TBF after reception of thefinal block.
This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MShas received all the RLC data blocks. When the timerexpires the MS releases the resources associated with theTBF and begins to monitor its paging.
Value range : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s]
Object : bts
Default value : 0 s
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : These parameters are applicable for BSS V12 and V14only.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
G 251
gsmToUmtsReselection Class 3
Description : Attribute specifiedto implementL1M features onPowerControl.This spareparameter isused to transit theattribute.
gsmToUmtsReselection iscomposed of 4parameters:
• UMTS Accessmin level
• UMTS reselection ARFCN
• UMTS reselection offset
• UMTS searchmin level
Default value : no
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks: • [C/M]:UMTS reselection ARFCN of theattribute gsmToUmtsReselectionaccept 0 (feature not activated) orfrequencies must be in bands:
• band I (UMTS 2000): 10562 to10838
• band II (UMTS 1900): 9662 to9938 and 412, 437, 462, 487,512, 537, 562, 587, 612, 637,662, 687
• band III (UMTS 1800): 1162 to1513
• band IV: (UMTS 1700/2100):1537 to 1738 and 1887, 1912,1937, 1962, 1987, 2012, 2037,2062, 2087
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
252 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• band V (UMTS 850): 4357 to4458 and 1007, 1012, 1032,1037, 1062, 1087
• band VI (UMTS 800): 4387 to4413 and 1037, 1062
• band VII (UMTS 2600): 2237to 2563 and 2587, 2612, 2637,2662, 2687, 2712, 2737, 2762,2787, 2812, 2837, 2862, 2887,2912
• band VIII (UMTS 900): 2937 to3088
• band IX: (UMTS 1700): 9237 to9387
Release : V14
Description: Allows the customer to set a value that theBSC uses when the MSC does not provideoptional service handover information inASSIGN_REQUEST or HANDOVER_REQUESTmessages
Value range: 0: should;1: should not; 2: shall not;3:gsmToUMTSHoDisabled (always takesprecedence over the MSC value)
Object: bsc
Default value: 3
Type: DP
Checks:
Release: V17
Note: This parameter is available only for BSC 3000.
This parameter is optional.
HhandOver from signalling channel Class 3
Description : Authorization to perform intercell handovers on signallingchannels (SDCCH or TCH in signalling mode).
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : disabled
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
H 253
Type : DP
Remark : The attribute was named TCH and sDCCHHandOver onthe V8 OMC-R MMI.
handOverControl
Description : Identifier of a handOverControl object that defineshandover management parameters in a cell. A bts objectmay reference one and only one object of this type.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : handOverControl
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created andthe handOverControl object is not createdfor that object.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked. If class2 attributes are modified, the associated btsobject is locked.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the relatedBSC is built, the parent bsc object isunlocked and the associated bts object islocked.
• [M/D]:The handOverControl object is created.
• [D]:The associated bts object is not referenced,except by a powerControl object.
• [D]:If the application database of the relatedBSC is not built, it has been reset by an Offline reset BDA command.
hardware configuration Class 2
Description : Type of architecture used in the transceiverEquipment.This parameter flags the TRX in HPRM, RM, MPRM orHPRM3T in the BTS 18000.
Value range : • [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx / Rm / Hprm / Mrm / Other] for BSCV15
• [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx / Rm / Hprm / Mprm / HPRM3T /Other] for BSC V16 and subsequent releases
Object : transceiverEquipment
Feature : BTS 18000 introduction, BTS 18000 HPRM, differentiationof the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40Watts, and BTS 18000 HPRM3T differentiation at theOMC-R
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
254 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:Checks that the default value is not lefton BTS 18000. In case of BTS 18000(btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), checksat unlock transceiverEquipment that itsHardwareConfiguration is different from“DRX”, “DCU2”, “DCU4”.
Checks: • [M]:Checks that the default value is not lefton BTS 6000 or BTS 18000. In caseof BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel= 910, 911, 900, 901), checks atunlock transceiverEquipment that itsHardwareConfiguration is one of thefollowing “DCU2”, “DCU4”. or "DRX"
• [M]:Checks that default value is set on otherBTS than BTS 18000. In case of BTSdifferent from BTS 18000 (btsModel =910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlocktransceiverEquipment that its HardwareConfiguration is different from Rm, Hprm,Mprm, Hprm3t or Other.
• [M]:Checks that default value is set on otherBTS than BTS 6000 or BTS 18000. In caseof BTS different from BTS 6000 or BTS18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), thischecks at unlock transceiverEquipment thatits Hardware Configuration is different fromRm, Hprm, Mprm, Hprm3t or Other.
• [M]:Consistency inside an RM definition. Incase of BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910,911, 900, 901), this checks at unlocktransceiverEquipment that its hardwareconfiguration is the same as the otherunlocked transceiver equipment of the sameRM.
• [M]:Consistency inside an RM definition. In caseof BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel =910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlocktransceiverEquipment that its hardwareconfiguration is the same as the otherunlocked transceiver equipment of the sameRM.
• [M]:Software Reference coherency inside anRM. Existing check that must be run afterprevious checks.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
H 255
Release : V11
Note : The value MRM is not supported. The value HPRM3T onlyapplies to BSC 3000.
hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a site BCF. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a TRX/DRX. Check BSS upgradefile. When a TRX is a DCU4 or a DRX (S2000, S8000,S12000, E-cell), the hardware reference field of thetransceiver equipment object must be equal to 0.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a TCB. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DP
hexa text
Description : Transcription in hexadecimal of the contents of a shortmessage.
The content of the hexa text parameter is displayed whenusing the command Display hexa. It cannot be modified bythe user. Only the content of the text parameter is modifiedby the user.
Refer to the text (short message) entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [chain of characters]
Object : short message - Display hexa
Type : DI
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
256 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval
Description : To control the high speed uplink distortion removal; whenenabled, some uplink distortion caused by high speedmobiles will be removed by the BTS.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
hoMargin Class 3
Description : A margin to use for PBGT handovers to avoid subsequenthandover, in PBGT formula.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 4
Type : DP
hoMarginAMR Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the handover margin linked to AMRquality handover.
This attribute is modified if the ’adjacentCellHandOver’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : -2
Type : DP
Release : V14
hoMarginBeg Class 3
Description : Margin to be added to hoMargin until rxLevHreqave forearly handover mechanism in order to compensate the lackof measurements.
This parameter is coupled with hoMargin andrxLevHreqaveBeg.
Value range : [0..63] dB
Object : bts
Default value : 4
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
H 257
Type : DP
Checks : • [M] :This parameter is inhibited when set to 63 dB.
Note : This parameter shall be set such as hoMargin≤hoMargin+hoMarginBeg or hoMarginBeg≥0
This parameter is not available for DCU2.
Release : V11
hoMarginDist Class 3
Description : Margin to be used for Distance Handovers.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : -24 dB
Type : DP
Release : V8
hoMarginRxLev Class 3
Description : Margin to be used for signal strength Handovers.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : -24 dB
Type : DP
Release : V8
hoMarginRxQual Class 3
Description : The margin is used for Signal Quality Handovers.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : -24 dB
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
258 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
hoMarginTiering Class 3
Description : Hysteresis between the uPwCIDLH and lPwCIDLHtiering thresholds to avoid ping-pong handovers(expressed in dB). This attribute allows to configure theCellTieringConfiguration at bts level.
Note : CellTiering mode must be activated.
Value range : [0 to 63] dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 4 dB
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength margin with the serving cellallowing the best neighbor cell selection when a handoveris triggered for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12)
Default value : 0 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute must be in the range [0 63].
• [C/M]:When set to "0", the handovers for trafficreasons are not allowed in the adjacent cell.
Release : V12
Note : This attribute only applies to BTSs equipped with nonmixed DCU4 or DRX boards.
hoPingpongCombination Class 3
Description : Two causes (HOInitialCause and HONonEssentialCause),indicating the causes of ping-pong handovers inoverlapping areas.
The following causes are defined with regard to theneighboring cell:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
H 259
• HOInitialCause indicates the essential handovercause which leads to enter the neighbor cell (cause ofincoming handover).
• HONonEssentialCause indicates the non-essentialhandover cause which leads to leave the cell (cause ofoutgoing handover).
This parameter defines the combination for which thehoPingpongTimeRejection attribute is used.
Value range : [rxQual, rxLev, distance, powerBudget, capture,directedRetry, OaM, traffic, all, allCapture, allPowerBudget,AMRquality]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers(TF821-V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: Check that all the values of ’HOPingpongCombination’ attribute must be different.This element checks for non duplications ofHOPingpongCombination values
Notes : • allCapture cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCause)matches the capture cause for all the micro-cellsbelonging to the current macro-cell . This cause hasto be used in order to prevent ping-pong handoversbetween micro- and macro-layers.
• allPowerBudget cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCause) matches the powerBudget cause for allthe neighboring cells of the current cell. This cause isused in order to restore the "Minimum time betweenhandovers" (feature TF218).
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
260 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
hoPingpongTimeRejection Class 3
Description : Time before a new handover attempt is triggered.
Refer to bsc object timeBetweenHOConfiguration and btsobject bts time between HO configuration attributes inthis Dictionary of Parameters for this timer activation.
Refer to adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongCombination attribute in this Dictionary of Parameters for thecombinations for which this timer applies.
To avoid ping-pong handovers this new timer is startedafter a successful handover. Up to the expiration of thistimer, the receipt of HANDOVER INDICATION messageis ignored.
Value range : [0 to 60] s
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers(TF821-V12).
Default value : [30 sec]
Release : V12
Description: Time before a new handover attempt to UMTS can betriggered
Value range: 0...60 seconds (0 means immediately)
Object: adjacentCellUTRAN
Default value: 30s
Type: DP
Checks:
Release: V17
Note: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2
Description : Hopping sequence number used by a radio time slot whichobeys frequency hopping laws.
Select different HSNs for nearby cells that use the sameset of frequencies.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : frequencyHoppingSystem
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
H 261
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:If the frequencyHoppingSystem object isreferenced by a channel object (fhsRefattribute defined), the parent bsc object isunlocked and the associated bts object islocked.
hoSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3
Description : Number of neighbor cells in which the BSC immediatelyattempts to perform a new handover when the previoushandover attempt failed with return to the old channel.
Giving the attribute a value greater than 2 allows the BSCto renew the handover request without waiting for a newset of radio measurements (the first attempt is included inthis count). The same list of neighbor eligible cells is usedto process the request (no new list is provided by the BTS).
Value range : [1 to 3]
Object : bsc
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Release : V9
hoTraffic Class 3
Description : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bsc level areallowed.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bsc
Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : Enabling this parameter allows the related BTSs with DCU4or DRX transceiver architecture handle handovers for trafficreasons.
hoTraffic Class 3
Description : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bts level areallowed.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
262 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12)
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : This attribute is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiverarchitecture.
hrAmrPriority Class 2
Description : This attribute defines the AMR HR priority of a TDMA.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can be modified only if the corresponding ’bts’object instance is locked (objectMustBeLockedError).
Value range : [0 to 2]Priority 0 is given to a high priority TDMAPriority 1 is given to a low priority TDMAPriority 2 disables this service on the TDMA
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
hrCellLoadEnd Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the cell load threshold used for AMRFR/HR decision.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
H 263
Type : DP
Checks : • 0570CO01 - hrCellLoadEnd <= hrCellLoadStart
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
hrCellLoadStart Class 3
Description : This attribute is used to trigger the beginning of AMR HRallocation in the cell.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.
In this version, this parameter has the following meaning:
• if HRCellLoadStart is equal to 0, then a FR radiochannel is always allocated to the MS,
• if HRCellLoadStart is greater than 0, then a HR radiochannel is allocated to the MS, according to its radioconditions.
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : bts
Default value : 100
Type : DP
Checks : • 0570CO01 - hrCellLoadEnd <= hrCellLoadStart
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
hrPowerControlTargetMode Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the target codec mode for AMR HRpower control.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
264 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
This attribute can only be modified if the ’powerControl’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : [HR 7.4 / HR 6.7 / HR 5.9 / HR4.75]
Object : powerControl
Default value : HR 7.4
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
hrPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3
Description : Downlink AMR codec target used to define the downlinkpower control threshold for HR AMR calls.
Value range : [HR 7.4 / HR 6.7 / HR 5.9 / HR 4.75]
Object : PowerControl
Type : DP
Feature : Tx power offset for signalling channels
Default value : HR 7.4
Notes : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.
Release : V16
Iidentifier
Description : Name of a BSS software application followed by its versionnumber.
Refer to the executableSoftware entry related to thesoftware object in the Dictionary where the name formatsare explained.
Value range : [XXXabcdef]
Object : software - Display markers
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 265
identifier
Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by itsversion number.
Refer to the executableSoftware entry related to thesoftware object in the Dictionary where the name formatsare explained.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh]
Object : software-bsc - Display markers
Type : DD
identifier
Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by itsversion number.
Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in theDictionary where the name formats are explained.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh]
Object : software-bsc - Display markers
Type : DD
identifier
Description : Identifier of a short message. It allows MSs to identify theshort message and discard it if already received.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : short message
Type : DD
iem
Description : The Interface Electronic Module, is part of the LSA RC(Low Speed Access Resource Complex) module.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : iem
Type : DP
Note : It is possible for this parameter to take on an infinite value.
• If so, it the time will not expire and there will be noautomatic logout procedure.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
266 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
iemId
Description : Identifier of the ’iem’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : iem
Type : DP
Release : V13
iMSIAttachDetach Class 2
Description : Whether MS attachment/detachment is allowed. Allowingenables the system to take into account temporary MSabsence to prevent unsuccessful call attempts.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
in
Description : The Interface Node, which provides the networkconnectivity through PCM trunk or higher speed interfaces(OC-3 - Optical Carrier level 3 - or STM-1 - SynchronousTransport level 1) as well as the time switching capability.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : interfaceNode
Type : DP
inactivity timeout
Description : Maximum time between two user commands, over whichthe system induces an automatic logout procedure.
Value range : [2 to 2147483646] (5) minute
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Remark : Moving the mouse inside an MMI window on the terminalscreen resets the counter.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 267
inclusive interval of codano
Description : To select messages according to their fault number. Thefiltering list can contain one (or several) interval(s).
For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve fault numbers15, 6, 7, and 8.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 65535 - 0 to 65535]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Release : V12
inclusive list of codano
Description : To select messages according to their fault number. Thefilter can contain one (or several) fault number(s).
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Release : V12
incomingHandOver Class 3
Description : Whether incoming handovers are allowed in a cell.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
inhibitRequest
Description : Whether the SS7 channel is inhibited.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingLink - Set inhibit
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
268 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object and the signallingLinkobject are unlocked.
Remark : An inhibit request may have no immediate effect andcan even be refused. Run a Display all command on thesignallingLink object to display the resource state of theSS7 channel and check that the system has applied therequest (signallingLinkResState).
inId
Description : Identifier of an ’ in’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated bythe MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : interfaceNode
Type : DP
Release : V13
initialMCSDL Class 3
Description : Initial MCS in the DL direction.. It is selected by the PCUfor the initial DL-LA-CommandedMCS. Note the backhaulconstraints can reduce the MCS.
Value range : MCS2 (value of 0 or 2), MCS3 = 3, MCS5 = 5, MCS6 = 6,MCS7 = 7, MCS8 = 8, MCS9 = 9
Object : transceiver
Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)
Default value : MCS2
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : MCS5 is the recommended value. If a cell with a low radioquality is experiencing a high BLER in MCS5, it is thenrecommended to use MCS2 or MCS3.
initialMCSUL Class 3
Description : Initial MCS in the UL direction. It is selected by the PCU forthe initial UL-LA-CommandedMCS.
Note the backhaul constraints will reduce the MCS.
Value range : MCS2 (value of 0 or 2), MCS3 = 3, MCS5 = 5, MCS6 = 6,MCS7 = 7, MCS8 = 8, MCS9 = 9
Object : transceiver
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 269
Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)
Default value : MCS2
Type : DP
Release : V15
interBscDirectedRetry Class 3
Description : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina BSS.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bsc
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Release : V9
Note : Queuing must also be activated at BSC level.
interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3
Description : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina cell.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Release : V9
Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.
interCellHOExtPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable defines the processingpriority of incoming inter-bss handovers in a cell.
This priority is used when radio resource allocationqueueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorized inthe BSS (refer to the "bscQueueingOption" entry in theDictionary).
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
270 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
interCellHOIntPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable defines the processingpriority of incoming intra-bss handovers in a cell.
This priority is always used, whether radio resourceallocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
interferenceType Class 3
Description : Type of interference created by neighbor cell.
Value range : [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)
Default value : notApplicable
Type : DP
Release : V12
interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc
Description : Mediation of interferenceMatrixRunning attribute.
Value range : [yes (if at least one cell below BSC with the parameteris equal to “yes” / no (if no cell below BSC with theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is equal to“no”]
Object : bts
Feature : Switch Interference Matrix (16411)
Default value : 0
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is optional and read-only. It is applicableto BSC 3000 only. It is not present in CREATE or SETcommands. This flag is displayed at the OMC-R using theGet command.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 271
Checks : • [C/M]: • This parameter checks the callDropActivation and DistributionActivationparameters.
• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of the call dropped analysisand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bsc thatincludes at least one cell withcallDropActivation parameter set toenabled. In this case, the following errormessage is displayed: ”InterferenceMatrix cannot be launched on a BSCperforming Call Drop Analysis”.
• This check is performed when launchingthe interference matrix (IM).
• Vice versa, when activating the droppedcall analysis on a cell, a control isrun at the OMC-R. If in a BSC, theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter in at least one cell is still setto ”yes”, then the callDropActivationparameter cannot be set to enable.
• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of measurement distributionsand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bts that hasthe distributionActivation parameterset to enabled. In this case, thefollowing error message is displayed:”Interference Matrix cannot be launchedon a cell performing MeasurementDistributions”.
• This check is performed when launchingthe Interference Matrix.
• Vice versa, when activatingMeasurement Distributions on acell, the OMC-R checks for theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsflag. If the cell is still running withinterference matrix measurements, thedistributionActivation parameter cannotbe set to enable.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
272 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M]:Bts shall not be deleted while IM is running.Checks that interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc is set to ”no” prior to deleting a bts.
• [C/M]:BCCH and BSIC values shall not bechanged while IM is running.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to ”yes” for one cell,the check prevents the setting of BCCH,BCC and NCC parameters on bts andadjacentCellHandover objects
• [C/M]:Neighboring cannot be changed while IM isrunning.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to “yes” for one cell, thecheck prevents the creation or deletion ofone adjacentCellHandover object.
interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts
Description : Mediation of interferenceMatrixRunning attribute.
Value range : [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel]
[0 / 1]
• 0 interferenceMatrixOnBts is not running.
• 1 interferenceMatrixOnBts is running.
Object : bts
Feature : Switch Interference Matrix (16411)
Default value : 0
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is optional and read-only. It is applicableto BSC 3000 only. It is not present in CREATE or SETcommands. This flag is displayed at the OMC-R using theGet command.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 273
Checks : • [C/M]: • This parameter checks the callDropActivation and DistributionActivation parameters.
• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of the call dropped analysisand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bsc that includesat least one cell with callDropActivationparameter set to enabled. In this case,the following error message is displayed:”Interference Matrix cannot be launched ona BSC performing Call Drop Analysis”.
• This check is performed when launchingthe interference matrix (IM).
• Vice versa, when activating the droppedcall analysis on a cell, a control isrun at the OMC-R. If in a BSC, theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameterin at least one cell is still set to ”yes”, thenthe callDropActivation parameter cannot beset to enable.
• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of measurement distributionsand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bts that has thedistributionActivation parameter set toenabled. In this case, the following errormessage is displayed: ”Interference Matrixcannot be launched on a cell performingMeasurement Distributions”.
• This check is performed when launchingthe Interference Matrix.
• Vice versa, when activating MeasurementDistributions on a cell, the OMC-R checksfor the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsflag. If the cell is still running withinterference matrix measurements, thedistributionActivation parameter cannot beset to enable.
• [C/M]:Bts shall not be deleted while IM is running.Checks that interferenceMatrixRunningOnBscis set to ”no” prior to deleting a bts.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
274 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M]:BCCH and BSIC values shall not be changedwhile IM is running.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to ”yes” for one cell,the check prevents the setting of BCCH,BCC and NCC parameters on bts andadjacentCellHandover objects.
• [C/M]:Neighboring cannot be changed while IM isrunning.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to “yes” for one cell, thecheck prevents the creation or deletion of oneadjacentCellHandover object.
interferer cancel algo usage Class 2
Description : Correlation ratio of the input signals received from thenormal and diversity antennas. This ratio enables to adaptthe SPU software (the interferer cancellation algorithm) tothe propagation conditions. Correlation ratio = 0 meansthat the interferer cancellation algorithm is inactive.
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V10
internal DMUX alarm state
Description : State of the BSC chain equipment controlled by the ECIboard by means of alarm loops.
Value range : The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:
• Control bayextractor .......... [all working / one failed]
• Control bay extractorpower supply .... [all working / one failed]
• EQP fans ........ [all working / one failed]
• MPU converters ... [all working / one failed]
• MPU converter(other channel) ... [all working / one failed]
• MPU fan powersupply ........... [all working / one failed]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 275
• MPU fans ........ [all working / one failed]
• RCB0 ........... [present / absent]
• RCB1 ........... [present / absent]
• RCB2 ........... [present / absent]
• Right MPUconverter ........ [all working / one failed]
• SWD converter ... [all working / one failed]
BSC 2000
• EQPD converter ... [all working / one failed]
• EQPM converter .. [all working / one failed]
• EQPM EQPD fan .. [all working / one failed]
BSC 12000HC
• EQPD0 converter .. [all working / one failed]
• EQPD0 EQPD1EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed]
• EQPD1 converter .. [all working / one failed]
• EQPI converter ... [all working / one failed]
• EQPT fans ....... [all working / one failed]
• EQPT and SWGshelf fans ........ [all working / one failed]
• RCB3 ............ [present / absent]
• RCB4 ............ [present / absent]
Value range : The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:
• Control bayextractor .......... [all working / one failed]
• Control bay extractorpower supply .... [all working / one failed]
• EQP fans ........ [all working / one failed]
• MPU converters ... [all working / one failed]
• MPU converter(other channel) ... [all working / one failed]
• MPU fan powersupply ........... [all working / one failed]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
276 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• MPU fans ........ [all working / one failed]
• RCB0 ........... [present / absent]
• RCB1 ........... [present / absent]
• RCB2 ........... [present / absent]
• Right MPUconverter ........ [all working / one failed]
• SWD converter ... [all working / one failed]
BSC 2000
• EQPD converter ... [all working / one failed]
• EQPM converter .. [all working / one failed]
• EQPM EQPD fan .. [all working / one failed]
BSC 12000HC
• EQPD0 converter .. [all working / one failed]
• EQPD0 EQPD1EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed]
• EQPD1 converter .. [all working / one failed]
• EQPI converter ... [all working / one failed]
• EQPT fans ....... [all working / one failed]
• EQPT and SWGshelf fans ........ [all working / one failed]
• RCB3 ............ [present / absent]
• RCB4 ............ [present / absent]
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
internal DMUX state
Description : Internal state of the BSC chain ECI board.
Value range : [working / fault]
• working .........The board has been successfullyinitialized.
• fault ............A fault was detected on the board.
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 277
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
internal PCM states
Description : State of the internal PCM links of the BSC chain. Each linkis identified by a serial number: [0 to 15] (BSC type 1), [0 to31] (BSC types 2, 3, 4), [0 to 63] (BSC type 5).
Value range : [working / fault]
• working .........The internal PCM link is working.
• fault ............A fault was detected on the link.
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.
internal switching matrix
Description : State of the BSC chain switching unit
Value range : [working / fault)]
• working .........The switching boards are correctlyinitialized.
• fault ............A fault was detected on a switchingboard.
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.
interOmuEtherlinkOper
Description : Operational state of the inner OMU Ethernet link.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are not notified to the manager.
ISO operational state
This attribute is relevant for the BSC 3000.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
278 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : controlNode
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3
Description : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina BSS.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bsc
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Release : V9
Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.
intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3
Description : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina cell.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Release : V9
Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.
intraCell Class 3
Description : Whether intra-bts handovers on TCH are allowed in a cellfor interference reasons or Cell Tiering reasons.
Value range : [cellTieringHandover/ intraCellHandover / handoverNotAllowed]
• cellTieringHandover: the intra-bts handovers areallowed for CellTiering reason
• intraCellHandover: the intra-bts handovers are allowedfor interference reason
• handoverNotAllowed: the intra bts handovers are notallowed
Object : handOverControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
I 279
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)
Default value : handoverNotAllowed
Type : DP
intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of an intra-bts handover in a cell.
This priority is always used, whether radio resourceallocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
intraCellQueueing Class 3
Description : Whether intra-bts handover requests are queued for acell. This parameter is significant only when queuing radioresource allocation requests is allowed in the BSS.
Refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
intraCellSDCCH Class 3
Description : Whether intra-bts handovers on SDCCH are authorized in acell for interference reasons.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
280 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Jjob
Description : Identifier (name) of a job on the OMC-R.
Value range : [case sensitive, unlimited number of characters]. The . and/ characters are forbidden.
Object : job
Type : Id
Checks : • [M/D]: The job is created on the OMC-R.
jobResult
Description : Identifier (name) of the associated job on the OMC-R.
A results file stores the commands executed and thesystem responses to those commands during theassociated job successive runs, beginning with the first run.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : jobResult
Type : Id
jokerPerMainTarget Class 3
Description : Target number of joker AGPRS 16 kbit/s TSs to beassigned by both BSC and PCU to every main AGPRS 16kbit/s TS (that is to every PDTCH linked with AGPRS).
Value range : 0 to 4
Object : transceiver
Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Notes : • The recommended values are 2, 3 or 4, depending onoperator Abis configuration (numberOfJokerDS0) andestimated EDGE TDMA throughput.
• Even if jokerPerMainTarget is a class 3 parameter,new values will not be immediately taken into account.The parameter will be used by BSC or PCU at the nextAGPRS reconfiguration (when a TDMA_TS_STATUSmessage is sent from BSC to PCU) or when the PCUprotection timer expires (agprsTsSharingProtection,internal timer set to 10s).
Release : V15
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 281
Llabel
Description : Label of an archive cartridge.
When a label is set, all information already stored on thecartridge is lost.
Value range : [case sensitive, 64 characters max.]
Object : md, omc - Display labelmd, omc - Set labelmd, omc - Archivemd, omc - Restoremd, omc - Display archive list.
Type : DP
language
Description : Language in which a short message is broadcasted.
The information is used in the data coding scheme whenthe short message is broadcasted.
Value range : [German / English / Italian / French / Spanish / Dutch /Swedish / Danish / Portuguese / Finnish / Norwegian /Greek / Turkish / Hungarian / Polish / unspecified / MultiByte Character Set]
Object : short message
Type : DP
lapdConcentration
Description : Whether information concentration is authorized on a LAPDlink.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : lapdLink
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The attribute value can be "enabled"or"disabled" if the link carries BTS signaling onthe Abis interface in a BSS that manages BTSLAPD signaling concentration.
• [C]:The attribute value is "enabled" if the linkcarries TCU signaling on the Ater interface.
• [C]:The attribute value is "disabled" if the linkcarries PCU signaling on the Agprs interface.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
282 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
lapdLink
Description : Identifier of a lapdLink object defined with regard to a bscobject.
In all MMI commands, a LAPD link can be referencedby "bscName.lapdLink" where bscName is a permanentattribute of the parent bsc object that identifies it by name.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : lapdLink
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The number of LAPD links per BSC is limitedto 841. Fourteen links can be assigned to theTCUs on the Ater interface or to the PCU onthe Agprs interface, 147 links can be assignedto the radio sites on the Abis interface, andthe remaining links can be assigned to theTRX/DRXs on the Abis interface, with two linksper TRX/DRX.
• [C]:The software object related to the parent bscobject is created.
• [C]:The number of lapdLlink objects dependenton the same bsc object that use thesame lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
• [C]:All lapdLlink objects dependent on thesame bsc object that use the samelapdTerminalNumber have identicalassociatedInterface and lapdConcentrationattributes.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment, ortranscoder objects refer to the lapdLink object.
Remark : A lapdLink object has no administrativeState of its own; itsoperationalState depends on the administrativeState of theparent bsc object.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 283
lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the btsSiteManager object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink object depends onthe same bsc object as the btsSiteManagerobject, it is assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), its sapi attribute valueis "OML".
• [C/M]:The number of objects dependent on a bscobject that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
• [C]:The number of LAPD channels used by asite and the related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).
• [C/M]:If the lapdLink object lapdConcent rationattribute value is "enabled", the definedlapdTerminalNumber is used by no morethan four btsSiteManager objects dependenton the same bsc object.
• [C/M]:If the lapdLink object lapdConcent rationattribute value is "disabled", the definedlapdTerminalNumber is not used.
lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the transceiverEquipment object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The number of LAPD channels used by asite and its related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
284 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink objects depend on thesame bsc object as the transceiverEquipmentobject, they are assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), they use the samelapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attributematches the type of use ("OML" or "RSL").
• [C/M]:The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on absc object that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager object and thetransceiverEquipment object are locked.
lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the transcoder object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink object dependson the same bsc object as the transcoderobject, it is assigned to the Ater interface(associatedInterface = "Ater"), its sapiattribute value is "OML".
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = RSL referencedby the transceiverEquipment object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The number of LAPD channels used by asite and its related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 285
• [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink objects depend on thesame bsc object as the transceiverEquipmentobject, they are assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), they use the samelapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attributematches the type of use ("OML" or "RSL").
• [C/M]:The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on absc object that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager object and thetransceiverEquipment object are locked.
lapdTerminalNumber Class 0
Description : BSC SICD port assigned to the LAPD link.
For more information on the use of this parameter, refer toGSM BSS Engineering Rules, 411-9001-138.
lapdTerninalNumber = 4 x number of the mother SICD4board [0 to 9] + port number [0 to 3]
lapdTerninalNumber = 8 x number of the mother SICD8board [0 to 4] + port number [0 to 7]
Value range : [0 to 7] (BSC type 1)[0 to 15] (BSC type 2)[0 to 23] (BSC type 3)[0 to 31] (BSC type 4)[0 to 39] (BSC type 5)[0 to 254] (BSC 3000)
Object : lapdLink
Default value :
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] :The number of SICD ports in a BSC dependson its type, knowing that a SICD boardmanages four ports and a SICD8V boardmanages eight ports.
BSC type T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
SICD ports 8 16 24 32 40
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
286 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [M] :If the port is used by an Abis interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for TCU and PCUsignaling.
• [M] :If the port is used by an Ater interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for BTS and PCUsignaling.
• [M] :If the port is used by an Agprs interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for BTS and TCUsignaling.
• [M]:The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on absc object that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Layer 3 message" element is used inthe CYPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Release : V8
lcsType Class 0
Description : MS Location technical solution to use.
Value range : According to the BSC version:
• BSC V15: [nss based / tandem hybrid]
• BSC V16: [nss based / bss based]
Object : bsc
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000.
Checks : • [M]:If the value of lcsType is bss based thentwo signallingLinkSet instances must becreated and at least one signallingLinkmust be created for the Lb interface -signallingLinkSet(1).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 287
• [M]:If the value of lcsType is nss based then onlyone signallingLinkSet instance must existand be equal to 0.
• [M]:If the value of lcsType is tandem hybrid thenonly one signallingLinkSet instance mustexist and be equal to 0.
Release : V14
level to process
Description : Identifier of a set of SDO resultant data files. Level 1identifies the latest set produced by the SDO machine.
As many as three sets of resultant data files created fromthe same workstation can exist in the SDO machine. Anyone can be selected for report display or purge purposes.
Value range : [1, 2, 3]
Object : Call monitoring - Display/Management) (SDO)
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:The set of files exists in the SDO machine.
lightning protection Class 2
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "lightningarrester" in S8000 Outdoor.
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V9
line
Description : Line number of the first command to run (default is 1).
Every command in a command file is assigned a linenumber. Line no.1 corresponds to the first recordedcommand, line no.n corresponds to the last recordedcommand.
Value range : [1 to 2147483646]
Object : commandFile - Run
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
288 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
locationAreaCode Class 3
Description : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
locationAreaCode Class 3
Description : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
locationAreaCode Class 2
Description : Code of a location area in the PLMN.
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a locationarea. It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes fourfields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC),mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode(MNC).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
log
Description : Identifier of a log object defined with regard to the mdobject. It is assigned by the OMC-R agent.
The current alarm log is no.1. Current observations logsare created in ascending numerical order each time anew mdScanner object is created. Current trace logs arecreated in ascending numerical order each time a newcallPathTrace or traceControl object is created.
A restored log is created each time a Restore command onthe md object related to faults, observations, or trace datais run.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 289
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : log
Type : Id
Checks : • (on observation and trace logs)
• [D]:The observation or the associated tracefunction is stopped.
Restrictions : • [D]:The log object describing the current alarm logcannot be deleted.
Notes : • The log objects are created by the OMC-R agent andcan be deleted by users under certain conditions (seeabove).
• The attributes of the log objects are not managed byusers.
logFullAction
Description : Action taken by the OMC-R agent in case of storagedirectory capacity threshold overflow.
The value "wrap" means that messages may be purged;the value "halt" means that further messages are notsaved. Refer to the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in theDictionary.
Value range : [wrap (alarm log) / halt (observation or trace log)]
Object : log - Display
Type : DP
Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
login command type
Description : Select login and user profile
Value range : [login request, server update]
Object : user profile
longTbfLossThroughput Class 3
Description : Loss of throughput for long TBF in percentage of allocatedbandwidth. Prioritize normal transfer over long datatransfer.
Value range : [0 to 100] in %
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
290 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold for long TBF size, in Kbytes. This parameter isused in the functionality which penalizes long TBF.
Value range : [1 to 65535]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 100
Type : DP
Release : V12
lRxLevDLH Class 3
Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, belowwhich a handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -101 to -100 dB (GSM 900 and GSM 850)-99 to -98 dB (GSM1800/1900)
Type : DP
lRxLevDLP Class 3
Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, belowwhich the power control function increases power. It islower than uRxLevDLP.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : -95 to -94 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevDLP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 291
• [M]:uRxLevDLP - p owerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevDLP
Note : The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, anduRxLevDLP parameters are ignored when the BTS usesthe advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.
lRxLevULH Class 3
Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, belowwhich a handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -101 to -100 dB (GSM 900 and GSM 850)-99 to -98 dB (GSM 1800/1900)
Type : DP
lRxLevULP Class 3
Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, belowwhich the power control function increases power. It islower than uRxLevULP.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : -95 to -94 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevULP
• [M]:uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevULP
Note : The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, anduRxLevULP parameters are ignored when the BTS usesthe advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.
lRxQualDLH Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above whichan inter cell handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 - V12)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
292 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %
Type : DP
lRxQualDLP Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above whichthe power control function increases power. It is greaterthan or equal to uRxQualDLP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.4 to 0.8
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: lRxQualDLP ≥ uRxQualDLP
Note : The uRxQualDLP parameter is ignored when the BTSuses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.
lRxQualULH Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above whichan inter cell handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %
Feature : Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 - V12)
Type : DP
lRxQualULP Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above whichthe power control function increases power. It is greaterthan or equal to uRxQualULP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.4 to 0.8
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: lRxQualULP ≥ uRxQualULP
Note : The uRxQualULP parameter is ignored when the BTSuses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
L 293
lsaPcmList Class 3
Description : List of pcmCircuit object instances connected to a LSA.
Note : The class is 3 since some new pcmCircuits may beconnected without stopping the LSA. Moreover, for a givenport, the pcmCircuit may be replaced provided that theold and new pcmCircuits are in the ’locked’ administrativeState.
The complete pcmCircuit list is always given.
This attribute is monitored by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can be modified only if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.
This attribute is relevant for 3G BSC and 3G TCU.
Value range : [0 to 167]
Object : iem, lsaRc
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible for a non existingreferenced PcmCircuit.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for a nonexisting referenced PcmCircuit.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible if a referencedpcmCircuit is already referenced by another LsaRc.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible if areferenced pcmCircuit is already referenced by anotherLsaRc.
• [C/M]: Creation/Modification LsaRc under Transcoderis not possible for referenced PcmCircuit different thanAte r, A, A_Lb or Lb types.
• [C/M]: A LSA under Transcoder module of E1 typehandles 21 PCMs. The Ater referenced PcmCircuit areconnected to port 0 through port 4 and the A, A _Lband Lb referenced PcmCircuits are connected to port 5through port 20.
• [C/M]: A LSA under Transcoder module of T1 typehandles 28 PCMs. The Ater referenced PcmCircuit areconnected to port 0 through port 5 and the A, A _Lband Lb’ referenced PcmCircuits are connected to port 6through port 27.
• [D]: Not possible to delete a PcmCircuit under bsc, stillreferenced to a LsaRc.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
294 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [D]: Not possible to delete a PcmCircuit undertranscoder, still referenced to a LsaRc.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible with tworeferenced PcmCircuits on the same port number.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible with tworeferenced PcmCircuits on the same port number.
• [C/M]: LsaRc not possible for shelf position and slotposition already used.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for an Areferenced PcmCircuit which is not defined under thesame transcoder.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for an Areferenced PcmCircuit with a port number equal to 0,1, 2 or 3.
• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder is not possible forreferenced PcmCircuit different than ’Ater’ or ’A’ type.[C/M]: The association between Pcm and port of LsaRcis incorrect.
Release : V13
lsaRc
Description : The Low Speed Access Resource Complex module, whichprovides the electrical interface for the DS1 (Digital Signallevel 1) or PCM30 interfaces.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : lsaRc
Type : DP
lsaRcId
Description : Identifier of the ’lsaRc’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : lsaRc
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 295
lsaRc Reference
Description : Pointer to the associated ’lsaRc’ object instance.
This attribute cannot be modified. It is set at ’iem’ creationas indicated by the BSS.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : iem
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Release : V13
Mmachine name
Description : Name of the machine (terminal or server), as defined in itsprofile for a terminal, in which the job is run (default is thelogged-in user’s terminal). Enter "server" for the OMC-Rserver console.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : job
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The machine is authorized to run jobs.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
machine name
Description : Name of the machine, as defined in its profile for aterminal, in which the associated job was run ("server"identifies the OMC-R server).
Object : jobResult
Type : DD
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
mainNetworkBand Class 0
Description : Indicates the main network band.
Value range : [900/1800/850/1900] network band
Object : bsc
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
296 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V15
maio Class 2
Description : Index in the list of frequencies allotted to a radio time slotwhich obeys frequency hopping laws.
Setting this attribute, together with the fhsRef attribute,allows the time slot to obey frequency hopping laws.
This offset allows to differentiate channel objects thatreference frequencyHoppingSystem objects with identicalattributes (orthogonality principle).
Value range : [0 to N-1] N is the number of frequencies (≤ 64) allotted tothe time slot.
Object : channel
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute is in the range [0 to 63].
• [C/M]:It is undefined if frequency hopping isnot allowed for the parent bts object(btsIsHopping = "no hopping") or thechannelType of the channel object is"mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".
• [C/M]:If the attribute is defined, the fhsRef attributeis also defined.
• [C/M]:If the attribute is defined, its value is lowerthan the number of frequencies defined inthe mobile Allocation list (attribute of thereferenced frequencyHoppingSystem object).
managedObjectClass
Description : Object class referenced.
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection/ bsc / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager /callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem/ handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner /mdWarning / pcmCircuit / powerControl / signallingLink /signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / traceControl/ transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone /transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 297
Object : alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord.
Type : DP
managedObjectInstance
Description : Identification of an object in the class.
Object : alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord.
Type : DP
manager address type
Description : OMC-R manager address type.
Value range : [internal / external]
Object : efd - Display
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
manager addresses
Description : Addresses of the OMC-R manager that receives themessages. They are provided by the manager.
Object : efd - Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
managerServer
Description : Name of the active OMC-R agent server. It is provided bythe OMC-R agent.
This server is referred to as the "NMC" server in the Q3names of the permanent md observation counters relatedto the OMC-R agent active server.
Object : md - Display
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
298 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
manufacturerIntervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in themanufacturer configuration.
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
marking type
Description : Type of software to consult.
Selecting "prom" allows to display the software applicationsloaded in PROMs in the selected BSS entity. Selecting"soft" allows to display the software applications loaded inthe processors of the selected BSS entity.
Value range : [prom / soft]
Object : software - Display markers
Type : DP
masterBtsSMId class 2
Description : When its value is not empty, this parameter identifies themaster BTS (for synchronization purpose).
Object : btsSiteManager
Value range : [0 to 499 or empty]
Type : DP
Feature : BTS Synchronization
Default value : empty
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
max log size
Description : Maximum log size expressed in bytes.
Object : log - Display
Type : DP
Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by theusers.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 299
maxAdjCHOARMPerBts
Description : Maximum number of neighbor cells associated with aserving cell for handover and re-selection management(static OMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [32]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxBscPerNetwork
Description : Maximum number of BSCs handled by an OMC-R (staticOMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [20]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3
Description : Maximum level of BTS transmission power in the innerzone of a dual-band cell.
Value range : [2 to 51]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Release : V12
maxBtsPerBtsSM
Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site (staticOMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [6 (BTS "conventional") / 4 (others)]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxBtsPerNetwork
Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by an OMC-R(static OMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [3200]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
300 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3
Description : Maximum number of downlink TBF on a P1 TDMA beforeselection of P2 TDMA.
Value range : [1 to 32]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 16
Release : V12
maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3
Description : Maximum number of downlink TBF per TDMA on a timeslotbasis.
Value range : [1 to 8]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 8
Type : DP
Release : V12
maxDwAssign Class 3
Description : Maximum number of Immediate Assignment messagesper second.
Value range : [1 to 32] blocks
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 8
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : Because no TS partitioning is implemented in GPRS V12.4b release, the number of maximum TBF establishmentcannot exceed the number of TS configured in the cell.Recommended value has to be set to the number ofPDTCH configured in the cell.
maxFileSize Class 2
Description : Maximum size of the call path tracing data file in the BSC.
Value range : [30 to 500] kbit/s
Object : callPathTrace
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 301
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The callPathTrace object is locked.
Notes : • If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object,the BSC continues to send the current trace messagesto the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued.
• If trace data collecting is stopped by locking theobject or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, itis automatically restarted whenever the callPathTraceobject is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-sessioncriterion defines a period of time that elapsed, datacollecting will restart for the entire period.
maximum acknowledgment time
Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or before.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum acknowledgment timewhen filled in.
maximum alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a number lower than or equal to thatone.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is greater than or equal to minimum alarmnumber when filled in.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
302 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
maximum clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or before.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Cleared alarm log - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum clear time when filled in.
maximum event time
Description : To select messages issued at that time or before.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum event time when filled in.
maximum MD notification number
Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a number lowerthan or equal to that one.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is greater than or equal to minimum MDnotification number when filled in.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 303
maximum OMC notification number
Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications with a numberlower than or equal to that one.
Do not fill in if this criteria is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is greater than or equal to minimum OMCnotification number when filled in.
maximum reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time or before.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum reception time when filledin.
maxLapdChPerBtsSM
Description : Maximum number of LAPD channels used by a radio site(static OMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [6]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxNbrConsMess
Description : Maximum number of messages stored in the BSC log files.This number is allocated by the MD-R at object creation.This attribute can be modified only if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is locked.
Value range : [1 to 7]
Object : bscLog
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
304 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V13
maxNbOfCells Class 2
Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site.
Value range : [1 to maxBtsPerBtsSM]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The number of cells controlled by a site islimited to maxBtsPerBtsSM (refer to this entryin the Dictionary).
• [M]:This number must be greater than the btsobject greatest identifier created for thebtsSiteManager object.
maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)
Description : Maximum number of:
• Polling request messages sent on PDCH afterimmediate assignment message has been sent onCCCH.
• PDAS messages on old TS when changing TSallocation before going into failure.
Value range : [1 to 10]
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Release : V12
maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf
Description : Maximum number of PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack)consecutively sent without V(A) has changed (respectively,maximum number of PDAN (Packet Downlink Ack/Nack)consecutively sent without V(Q) has changed).
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 305
Default value : 10
Type DP
Release : V12
maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (n3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)
Description : Maximum number of USF where no data is received in theUL direction.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 10
Type : DP
Release : V12
maxNumberRetransmission Class 3
Description : Maximum number of RACH burst retransmissions allowedin a call in case of non-system response.
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH. It defines the maximum numberof times a mobile can renew access requests to the BTSon RACH.
Value range : [one / two / four / seven]
Object : bts
Default value : two
Type : DP
maxPcmCPerBtsSM
Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a radio site on theAbis interface (static OMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [6]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
306 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
maxPcmCPerTranscd
Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a remotetranscoder on the Abis interface (static OMC-Rconfiguration data).
Value range : [4]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxRACH Class 3
Description : Broadcast of the PSI 13 message on PACCH during uplinkor downlink TBF.
The parameter has an MMI constraint (visibility) of GPRSonly for usage.
Value range : [0 to 15]
• 0: disabled
• 1..15: enabled
Object : bts
Feature : Broadcast of PSI 13 (Feature 27358)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Notes : • The recommended value is 1.
• Only applicable for BSC 3000.
Release : V12
maxRowCount
Description : Maximum number of information lines per table to access."0" means accessing all data. The default value is "1000".
Value range : [0 to 1000]
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 307
maxSigLPerSigLS
Description : Maximum number of SS7 channels linked to a BSC (staticOMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [2 (BSC 12000HC type 1)4 (BSC 12000HC types 2, 3, 4)6 (BSC 12000HC type 5)16 (BSC 3000)]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxTeiPerLapdCh
Description : Maximum number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPDterminal (static OMC-R configuration data).
It defines the maximum number of LAPD links that can usethe same SICD port in the BSC (lapdTerminalNumberattribute of the lapdLink objects).
Value range : [15]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
maxTranscdBPerTranscd
Description : Maximum number of transcoding boards housed in aremote transcoder (static OMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [10 in a GSM 900, E-GSM, GSM-R or 1800 network 8 ina GSM 1900 network]
Object : OMC-R
Type DS
maxTranscdPerBsc
Description : Maximum number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC(static OMC-R configuration data).
Value range : [10 (BSC 12000HC)34 (BSC 3000)32 (TCU2G)2 (TCU3G)]
Object : OMC-R
Type : DS
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
308 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3
Description : Maximum number of uplink TBF on a P1 TDMA beforeselection of P2 TDMA.
Value range : [1 to 32]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 16
Release : V12
maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3
Description : Maximum number of uplink TBF per TDMA on a timeslotbasis.
Value range : [1 to 8]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 8
Release : V12
md
Description : Identifier of the md object that describes the OMC-R agent.It is enforced by the system.
The md object is unique to the OMC-R. It is created whenthe system is started.
Value range : [1]
Object : md
Type : Id
md notification number
Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a given number.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 309
mdArchive
Description : Whether archiving the observation messages processedis allowed.
The value of this attribute is "not archived" whenmdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrumentpanel observation) and "archived" otherwise.
Value range : [archived / not archived]
Object : mdScanner
Type DP
Checks : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
mdConfirm
Description : Whether the observation messages processed should beacknowledged.
The value of this attribute is "not confirmed" whenmdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrumentpanel observation) and "confirmed" otherwise.
Value range : [confirmed (yes) / not confirmed (no)]
Object : mdScanner - Display
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
mdFileName
Description : Name of an observation file containing an elementaryreport. Refer to the naming rules to NTP < 07 >.
Object : mdScanReportRecord
Type : DP
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by theOMC-R agent.
Value range :
• [5, 10, 15] minutes.......permanent general md
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
310 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [15, 30, 60] minutes......Fast Statistic Observation(OFS)
• [1440] minutes...General StatisticObservation (OGS)
• [5, 10, 15] minutes.......Diagnostic Observation(ODIAG)
• [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...performance monitor(Real Time Observation(ORT))
• [5, 10, 15, 30, 60]minutes........
Temporary Observation(TO)
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The number of temporary observations runningat the same time with a 5-minute recoveryperiod in the BSSs managed on the OMC-R islimited to 50.
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified ifmdScannerType = "temporary xxx".Stop the observation if necessary by deletingthe concerned mdScanner object and create itback with a new observation period.
Note : For a BSC 12000HC the value range is 15 minutes.For a BSC 3000 the mdGranularityPeriod can be reduced:
• 5 minutes if the mdObjectList contains 1 bts max.
• 10 minutes if the mdObjectList contains 2 bts max.
• 15 minutes in all other cases
This note only applies to ODIAG observation.
mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by theOMC-R agent.
Value range :
• [5, 10, 15] minutes.......permanent general md
• [15, 30, 60] minutes......permanent general bsc(GPO-BSC)
• [15, 30, 60] minutes......Fast Statistic Observation(OFS)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 311
• [1440] minutes...General StatisticObservation (OGS)
• [15] minutes.....Diagnostic Observation(ODIAG)
• [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...performance monitor(Instrument Panel (IPO)or Real Time Observation(ORT))
• [5, 10, 15, 30, 60]minutes........
Temporary Observation(TO)
Object : mdScanReportRecord
Type : DP
mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by theOMC-R agent.
Value range :
• [5, 10, 15] minutes.......permanent general md
• [15, 30, 60] minutes......permanent general bsc(GPO-BSC)
• [15, 30, 60] minutes......Fast Statistic Observation(OFS)
• [1440] minutes...General StatisticObservation (OGS)
• [15] minutes.....Diagnostic Observation(ODIAG)
• [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...performance monitor(Instrument Panel (IPO)or Real Time Observation(ORT))
• [5, 10, 15, 30, 60]minutes........
Temporary Observation(TO)
Object : observationFileReadyRecord
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
312 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
mdId
Description : Identifier of the md object describing the OMC-R agent. Itis enforced by the system.
This attribute allows users to identify the md object on theOMC-R.
Value range : [1]
Object : md - Display
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
mdLog
Description : Whether the observation messages processed are savedon the OMC-R agent disks.
The value of this attribute is "not logged" whenmdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrumentpanel observation) and "logged" otherwise.
Value range : [logged / not logged]
Object : mdScanner
Type DP
Checks : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the typeof the defined observation.
mdScannerType mdObjectList
permanent general md md
permanent general bsc bsc
general statistic (OGS) bsc
fast statistic (OFS) bsc
performance monitor bsc
real time (ORT) bsc
temporary signallingLink* bsc & signallingLink
* This type only applies to V12 BSCs.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 313
mdScannerType mdObjectList
temporary Abis Interface bts* bsc & btsSiteManager &bts
diagnostic (ODIAG) bsc, bts, signallingLink,hardware transcoder3G, transcoderEqpt,pcmPort, transceiverEqpt& btsSiteManager,pcmCircuit, adjacentCell
* This type only applies to V12 BSCs.
mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the typeof the defined observation.
Value range : [1 to 66]
Object : display xxx report
Type DP
mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the typeof observation defined.
Value range : [1 to 66]
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
mdScanner
Description : Identifier of an mdScanner object defined with regard to themd object.
The mdScanner object class describes the OMC-R agentand BSS observations. These objects are managed by theOMC-R "Performance Management" function.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : mdScanner
Type : Id
Checks : • (performed only when the object describes a BSSobservation)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
314 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M/D]
: The application database of the BSC isnot being built.
• [C/M/D]
: If the application database of the BSC isnot built, temporary observations cannotbe managed.
• [C/M/D]
: If the application database of the BSC isbuilt, the BSS/OMC-R link is establishedand no audit is in-progress in the BSC.
Remark : Deleting an mdScanner object that describes a temporaryobservation is always possible if the observation durationhas elapsed (stopTime 1= 0) and the stop TGE has beensent to the BSC.
mdScannerType
Description : The type of observation.
Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager]
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
mdScannerType
Description : The type of observation.
Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
mdScannerType
Description : The type of observation.
Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager]
Object : Load formulae
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 315
mdScannerType
Description : The type of observation.
Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager / pcuSN]
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The defined observation is not running.
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
Notes : • The permanent general md observation is unique to theOMC-R.
• The permanent general bsc and Instrument Panelobservations are unique to a BSS (V10).
• The OGS is unique to a BSS (V11+).
• The OFS is unique to a BSS (V11+).
• The ORT is unique to a BSS (V11+).
• A temporary observation of a given type or ODIAG(V11+) is unique to a BSS.
mdScannerType
Description : The type of observation.
Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager / pcuSN]r]
Object : report template
Type : DP
mdStorageDuration
Description : Storage duration of the observation messages processedon the OMC-R agent disks.
Observation messages are kept on the OMC-R agentdisks for a limited period of time, provided the mdLogattribute of the associated log object is "logged". They are
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
316 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
automatically purged at regular intervals. The user mustarchive the observation data, for data analysis occurringafter the purge time set by the static configuration.
Value range : [N] hour. N is a static configuration data.
Since instrument panel observation messages are notkept, N equals zero for the log objects that describe theseobservations.
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
mdTransferMode
Description : Service used by the OMC-R agent to transmit theobservation messages processed to the OMC-R manager.
Value range : [FTAM (permanent general md and bsc observations) /CMIS (others)]
Object : mdScanner - Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
mdWarning
Description : Identifier of a mdWarning object defined with regard to themd object.
The mdWarning object class describes the processingconditions of BSS alarms of "outOfRangeCounter" and"excessiveAnomalyRate" type. These objects are managedby the OMC-R "Fault Management" function.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : mdWarning
Type : Id
measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2
Description : Whether the new L1M interface is used.
Value range : [L1MV1, L1MV2]
• L1MV1:the older L1M is used
• L1MV2:the newer L1M is used
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 317
Object : bts
Feature : L1M evolutions for advanced features support(TF1089-V12)
Default value : L1MV1
Type : DP
Release : V12
microCellCaptureTimer Class 3
Description : Time used to confirm a capture (signal strength stability)when using micro-cell Algorithm type A.
Value range : Time = N multiplied by <runHandOver>.
According to microCellCaptureTimer value, N values arethe following:
• [0 to 249]N = [0 to 249]
• 250N = 512
• 251N = 1024
• 252N = 2048
• 253N = 4096
• 254N = 8192
• 255N = 16384
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 0
Condition : To define if A handover algorithm is activated
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:This attribute is defined if the describedneighbor cell is a micro-cell (cellType ="microType").
Release : V8
Note: To activate the MicroCellAlgo feature for this parameter,1. Set the MicroCellAlgo (in the omc_services.cfg of theOMC) to A. Stop the OMC-R application and perform the"omc_configure.sh -A" command.2. For the BSCs to take effect of the new featureactivation, perform a Build-BDA on all the BSCs on thisOMC-R during the next maintenance window.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
318 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
microCellStability Class 3
Description : Strength Level Stability Criterion for Capture Algorithm A.
Value range : [0 to 255] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 10
Condition : To define if A handover algorithm is activated
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:This attribute is defined if the describedneighbor cell is a micro-cell (cellType ="microType").
Note: To activate the MicroCellAlgo feature for this parameter,1. Set the MicroCellAlgo (in the omc_services.cfg of theOMC) to A. Stop the OMC-R application and perform the"omc_configure.sh -A" command.2. For the BSCs to take effect of the new feature activation,perform a Build-BDA on all the BSCs on this OMC-R duringthe next maintenance window.
minimum acknowledgment time
Description : Selecting messages acknowledged at that time or after.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum acknowledgment timewhen filled in.
minimum alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a number greater than or equal tothat one.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm logs - Filter
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 319
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is lower than or equal to maximum alarmnumber when filled in.
minimum clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or after.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Cleared alarm log - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum clear time when filledin.
minimum event time
Description : To select messages issued at that time or after.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type DP
Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum event time when filledin.
minimum MD notification number
Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a number greaterthan or equal to that one.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is lower than or equal to maximum MDnotification number when filled in.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
320 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
minimum OMC notification number
Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications with a numbergreater than or equal to that one.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is lower than or equal to maximum OMCnotification number when filled in.
minimum reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time or after.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum reception time whenfilled in.
minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain Class 3
Description : Minimum number of joker AGPRS 16 kbit/s TSs per mainAGPRS 16 kbit/s TS, that cannot be preempted by theDynamic Agprs feature.
Value range : [0..4] step 0.125
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Feature : EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS
Checks : • [C/M]:minNbOfJokersPerCon nectedMainmust be lower than or equal to the targetnumber of jokers per TDMA (parameterjokerPerMainTarget)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 321
• [C/M]:minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain mustbe equal to 0 when EDGE is not activated onTDMA (that is when edgeDataServiceType isequal to capability is not requested)
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000.
minNbOfTDMA Class 2
Description : Minimum number of TDMA frames working for the cellitself.
The frame carrying the cell BCCH must be among themand successfully configured.
Value range : [1 to 16]
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:This number is less than or equal to thenumber of transceiver objects (TDMA frames)created for the bts object.
minNbrGprsTs Class 3
Description : Minimum number of TS dedicated to GPRS in the cell.
Value range : [0 to 127]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 - V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
minTimeQualityIntraCellHO Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the minimum time between oneintracell HO and the next quality intracell HO.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked
Value range : [0 to 120] %
Object : handOverControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
322 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : Applies to a BSC 3000 architecture only.
missDistWt Class 3
Description : Weight applied to missing Distance measurement.
The missing measurement is replaced by the latestreceived raw measurement weighed by this correctivefactor when calculating the average MS-BTS distance.
The range of permitted values makes missing distancemeasurements not favored.
Value range : [100 to 200] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 110
Type : DP
missRxLevWt Class 3
Description : Weight applied in case of missing signal strengthmeasurement report.
The missing measurement is replaced by the latestcomputed arithmetic average, or by the latest received rawmeasurement if no average value is available, weighed bythis corrective factor when calculating the average signalstrength in the cell.
Selecting the greatest value makes missing strengthmeasurements not favored.
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 90
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 323
missRxQualWt Class 3
Description : Weight applied to missing Quality measurement.
The missing measurement is replaced by the latestcomputed arithmetic average, or by the latest received rawmeasurement if no average value is available, weighed bythis corrective factor when calculating the average bit errorrate in the radio link.
The range of permitted values makes missing qualitymeasurements not favored.
Value range : [100 to 200] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 110
Type : DP
mms
Description : The Memory Mass Storage module, which holds all theprivate data (for OMU) and those that must be secured andstill accessible in the event of an OMU failure or disk failure(for Control Node).
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : mms
Type : Id
mmsId
Description : Identifier of the ’mms’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : mms
Type : DP
Release : V 13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
324 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
mmsUsage
Description : Indicates whether the MMS is private (i.e. associated to anOMU) ; or shared-mirrored (associated to the Control Node).
This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MD-R atMMS creation.
Value range : [0 (Shared) to 1 (Private)]
Object : mms
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DP
Release : V13
mobileAllocation Class 2
Description : List of sixty-four frequencies allotted in the networkfrequency band to a radio time slot obeying frequencyhopping laws.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 1023] / [0 /55] (GSM-R).
Object : frequencyHoppingSystem
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:Each frequency occurs once in the list andis allotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocation).
• [M]:If the frequencyHoppingSystem object isreferenced by a channel object dependent onthe associated bts object, the parent bsc objectis unlocked and the associated bts object islocked.
mobileCountryCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN home country.
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 325
Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.
• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
mobileCountryCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN home country.
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.
• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
mobileCountryCode Class 1
Description : Code of the PLMN home country. It is defined whentheMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). TheMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI) for aGSM-R network (Group call).
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bsc
Condition : For a GSM network: to define when the MSC does notmanage cell global identifiers (CGI).
Condition : For a GSM-R network: mandatory as the MSC does notmanage cell global identifiers (CGI) for Group Call.
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
326 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
mobileCountryCode Class 2
Description : Code of the PLMN home country.
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a locationarea. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMNand includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI),locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC),and mobileNetworkCode (MNC).
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.
• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
mobileNetworkCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country.
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.
• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
mobileNetworkCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country.
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 327
Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.
• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
mobileNetworkCode Class 1
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. It must be defined whenthe MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI).
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bsc
Type : DP
mobileNetworkCode Class 2
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country.
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a locationarea. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMNand includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI),locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC),and mobileNetworkCode (MNC).
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.
• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
modeModifyMandatory Class 3
Description : Whether a CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message is sent tothe mobile after a directed retry handover in the BSS.
Value range : [used (yes) / not used (no)]
Object : bsc
Default value : not used
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
328 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute value can only be "used" ifdirected retry handovers are allowed at BSClevel. Refer to the interBscDirectedRetryand intraBs cDirectedRetry entries in theDictionary.
Release : V9
monitoredObjectClass
Description : Class of the serving object for the notifications processed.Lists the possible object classes to be monitored.
Value range : [bsc / signallingPoint / transcoder / pcmCircuit / xtp/ lapdLink / software / bscLog / btsSiteManager /signallingLinkSet / transcoderBoard / bts / signallingLink/ transceiver / powerControl / frequencyHoppingSystem/ adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /handOverControl / transceiverEquipment / channel /transceiverZone / pcu / pcusn / lsaRc Bsc / lsaRc Tcu /hardware bsc 3G / hardware transcoder 3G / interfacenode / control node / cem / iem / atmRm / sw8kRm / cc /omu / mms / trm / pcmCircuit]
Object : mdWarning
Feature : PM1270 - TDMA based counters
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
monitoredObjectInstance
Description : Identification of a serving object in the class.
They identify the object that issued the processednotifications. Enter the concerned object identificationsequence.
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 329
monitoredSpecificProblemsList
Description : List of the specific problems taken into account in theprocess.
This parameter filters the processed notifications accordingto the following criteria: cause number, fault number, andprocessor number.
Value range : [(cause, faultNumber) pair]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate"
Type : DP
month
Description : Identifies the month the observation report was created.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : Display busiest day of the month report
Type : DP
msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3
Description : To determine whether inter-bts handovers are allowed ina cell for distance reasons.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
msCapWeightActive Class 2
Description : To specify whether the Weight Fair Allocation algorithm isused or not.
Value range : [yes / no]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : yes
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
330 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
msLeakRate
Description : This attribute specifies the leak rate parameter for oneGPRS MS with 1 TS. This value is used only once at theMS Bucket creation time on SGSN side. For GPRS, (thatis, if EDGE is not activated in the cell or there is no TDMAthat is EDGE capable in the cell), this value is sent to theSGSN in the FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message as thedefault MS Leak Rate. (60kbps is considered as soon asone EDGE TDMA is activated in the cell).
Value range : [2W, 8 W, 2W + 8 W]
Default value : 2W + 8W
Release : V12
msPowerClassToggle Class 3
Description : MS power class which needs dedicated statistics.
Value range : [2W / 8W / 2W + 8W]
Object : bts
Feature : Advanced Speech Call Items
Default value : 2W + 8W
Type : DP
Release : V15
msRangeMax Class 3
Description : Maximum MS-to-BTS distance beyond which a handovermay be triggered. It can be set to 1 for a microcell and isless than callClearing in all cases.
The attributes ’msRangeMax’ and ’concentAlgoIntMsRange’ must verify ’msRangeMax’ >= ’concentAlgoIntMsRange’.
Value range : [1 to 134] km (non-extended mode),[1 to 120] km (extended mode).
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 34 in non-extended mode, 89 in extended mode
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:msRangeMax < callClearing (associated btsobject attribute)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 331
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is limited to 34 km ifthe extended cell attribute of the associatedbts object is "false".
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is"true".
msTxPwrMax Class 3
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a serving cell. It isequal to msTxPwrMaxCCH in a GSM 900 network.
Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM-R, E-GSM,GSM 850, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM1800 networks)
[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 -GSM 900 networks)
[0 to 33] dB (GSM 1900, E-GSM and 1900-850, GSM 850)
Object : bts
Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 handhelds
Default value : lds and 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:GSM 900 networks: msTxPwrMax =msTxPwrMaxCCH
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
• [5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)
msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in the band 1 of thedualband cell depending on the network type (BCCH isonly defined in band 0).
Value range : [0 to 36] for GSM 900 - GSM 1800 (gsmdcs),[5 to 43] for GSM 1800 - GSM 900 (dcsgsm),[0 to 33] for GSM 850 - GSM 1900 (gsm850pcs),[5 to 43] for GSM 1900 - GSM 850 (pcsgsm850),for all in the steps of 2 + value = 33 for GSM 850 - GSM1900 0..43 for other standardIndicator types.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
332 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 and GSM 850handhelds, 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:464C001 The attribute value must be evenand located between [0 to 36] dB whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to"gsmdcs".
• [C/M]:464C002 The attribute value must be oddand located between [5 to 43] dB whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to"dcsgsm".
• [C/M]:464C003 The attribute value must be evenand located between [0 to 33] dB when thestandardIndicato r attribute is equal to"gsm850pcs".
• [C/M]:464C004 The attribute value must be oddand located between [5 to 43] dB whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to"pcsgsm850".
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, it means:
• [5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)
• [0 to 36] dB (GSM 1800 network)
Release : V12
msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a cell CCCH.
The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the AbisCELL MODIFY REQUEST message.
Value range : [[5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM 850, GSM-R,and GSM 900 - GSM 1800 networks)
[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 -GSM 900 networks)
[0 to 33] dB (GSM 1900, 1900-850, and GSM-R networks)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 333
Object : bts
Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 and GSM 850handhelds, 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900
Type DP
Remark : If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cellin the network, msTxPwrMaxCCH must be identical to themsTxPwrMaxCell power defined for the correspondingadjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checkedby users).
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
• [5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)
msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a neighbor cell. It isequal to msTxPwrMaxCCH when the cell is declared as aserving cell on the network (the value must be checked byusers).
Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM-R, E-GSM,GSM 850, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM1800 networks)
[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800 network and GSM1800 - GSM 900)
[0 to 33, by steps of 2 + value 33] dB (GSM 1900-850networks)
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 or 850 handhelds and30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
334 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Remark : If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cellin the network, msTxPwrMaxCell should be identical to themsTxPwrMaxCCH power defined for the correspondingadjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checkedby users).
Notes : • The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values.
The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
• [5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)
• [0 to 36] dB (GSM 1800 network)
multi band reporting Class 3
Description : Minimum number of cells multibanding MSs, report theirradio measurements in each frequency band.
Value range : [the six strongest cells / the strongest cell out band / thetwo strongest cells out band / the three strongest cells outband]
• six strongest allowed cells irrespective of theirfrequency band
• the strongest allowed cell outside the current frequencyband
• the two strongest allowed cells outside the currentfrequency band
• the three strongest allowed cells outside the currentfrequency band
Object : bts
Default value : the six strongest cells
Type : DP
Release : V10
multiple site
Description : Identifier of a multiple site object defined with regard to absc object.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : multiple site
Type : Id
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
M 335
Checks : • [C]:The multiple site object is not created for theparent bsc object.
• [C/M]:The btsSiteManager objects in thebtsSiteManagerList list are created forthe parent bsc object and are not referencedby another multiple site object.
• [M/D]:The multiple site object is created and thecurrent btsSiteManager objects referenced inthe btsSiteMan agerList list are locked.
Release : V8
multipleVocoders Class 1
Description : Whether the BSC is linked to one or more MSCs usingdifferent speech coding protocols.
An MSC uses either the GSM protocol or the JTC protocol."False" means that only the GSM protocol is compatible.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bsc
Default value : False
Type : DP
Notes : • If MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUP PORT,
(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (as detailed in NTP < 455 >),then the following BSC parameters must be set to TRUE:
• chosenChannelAsscomp
• chosenChannelHoReq
• chosenChannelHoPerf
• chosenChannelCompL3Info
Release : V8
muxNumber Class 3
Description : pcuSN mux identification
Value range : [noMux / oneMux / twoMux]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
336 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Nn3103 Class 3
Description : Maximum number of repetition of a PUAN (Packet UplinkAck/Nack) message.
Value range : [1 to 64]
Object : bts
Default value : 5
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
n3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf)
Description : Maximum number of consecutive RLC data blocks sentby the PCU with a valid RRBP and not having beenacknowledged by the MS.
Value range : [1 to 64]
Object : transceiver
Default value : 4
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
nACCActivation Class 3
Description : Activation of the Network Assisted Cell Change feature.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Feature : Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS
Type : DP
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)
Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control.
It specifies the "Interference signal strength filter" constantfor power control. NAVG -I = 2 (k/2) with k = nAvgI.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 337
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)
Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control,which specifies the "Signal strength filter period" for powercontrol in packet transfer mode. TAVG -T = 2 (k/2) /6 with k =nAvgT.
Value range : [0 to 25]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Release : V12
nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)
Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control,which specifies the "Signal strength filter period" for powercontrol in packet idle mode. TAVG -W = 2 (k/2) /6 with k =nAvgW.
Value range : [0 to 25]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Release : V12
Note : Tavg_w has no impact on frequency measurements andcomputations done by the MS, which is always equal to thefrequency of paging blocks decoding.
nbOfFramesForFER Class 3
Description : Number of frames taken into account for FER(Frame Erasure Rate) evaluation.
Value range : Int [0 to 65535]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
338 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Type : DP
Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements
Default value : 0
Release : V14
Note : This parameteris mandatory. Itis only availablefor BSC 3000V15 and later,and applicablesince BSC 3000V15.1.1.
nbOfRepeat Class 2
Description : Maximum number of times that paging messages arerepeated to mobiles that belong to the same pagingsub-group.
It is set to "3" in former BSS versions (static configurationparameter).
The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) xnbOfRepeat
Value range : [0 to 22]
Object : bts
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Release : V8
nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3
Description : Attribute reserved for future use.
Value range : [0]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 0
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 339
Type : DP
Release : V12
nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3
Description : Attribute reserved for future use.
Value range : [0]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList)
Description : Number of TSs used for each Agprs PCM link.
Value range : [1 to 30] for E1 configuration,[1 to 23] for T1 configuration.
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : None
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
nCapacityFRRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : Number of 12.2 codec mode requested to trigger a capacityhandover (FR to HR).
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handover’ controlobject instance is unlocked.
Value range : [0 to 196]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 44
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
340 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
nCHPosition Class2
Description : Defines the number of blocks and position of the first blockfor NCH.
Value range : [0 block1 block, first block 01 block, first block 11 block, first block 21 block, first block 31 block, first block 41 block, first block 51 block, first block 62 blocks, first block 02 blocks, first block 12 blocks, first block 22 blocks, first block 32 blocks, first block 42 blocks, first block 53 blocks, first block 03 blocks, first block 13 blocks, first block 23 blocks, first block 33 blocks, first block 44 blocks, first block 04 blocks, first block 14 blocks, first block 24 blocks, first block 35 blocks, first block 05 blocks, first block 15 blocks, first block 26 blocks, first block 06 blocks, first block 17 blocks, first block 0]
Object : bts
Feature : (GSM-R V12)
Default value : 0 block
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : nCHPosition - noOfBlocksForAccessGrant relationaccording to channelType attribute
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 341
channelType nCHPosition noOfBlocksForAccessGrant
mainBCCH 1 block, first block 0 to 62 blocks, first block 0 to 53 blocks, first block 0 to 44 blocks, first block 0 to 35 blocks, first block 0 to 26 blocks, first block 0 to 17 blocks, first block 0
>= 1>= 2>= 3>= 4>= 5>= 6= 7
mainBCCHCombined 1 block, first block 01 block, first block 12 blocks, first block 0
1 or 2= 12= 12
networkColourCode Class 3
Description : Color code of the mobile network. The (BCC,NCC) pairforms the cell BSIC.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
networkColourCode Class 2
Description : Color code of the mobile network. It allows countries withcommon borders to allocate BCCs and BCCH frequenciesat their own convenience in international border areas. The(BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.
The information is broadcasted on the cell SCH.
The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a six-bit code:bits 6-5-4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3-2-1 = BCC(Base station color code). Outside border areas, theNCC bits can be used to increase the number of BCCpossibilities.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
342 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
Remark : The NCC should not be confused with the MCC (MobileCountry Code) nor the MNC (Mobile Network Code), whichare part of the CGI (Cell Global Identifier).
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
networkIndicator Class 1
Description : Identifier of the SS7 network.
Value range : [nationalReserved / national / internationalReserved /international]
Object : signallingPoint
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: For BSC 12000HC, the only valueaccepted by the system is "national".
For 3G, any value in the value range canbe used.
new name
Description : New name to give to the short message. It is different fromthe current short message identifier.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : short message - Rename
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It is different from the current short messageidentifier.
• [A]:It does not exist on the OMC-R.
new password 1st try
Description : User’s new password to use in the next login request. Itbegins with a letter, contains at least one non-alphabeticalcharacter among the first eight characters, and is casesensitive. It is not displayed.
Value range : [6 characters min]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 343
Object : user profile - Change password
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It begins with a letter and contains onenon-alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.
• [A]:It is at least six-character long.
• [A]:It is different from the N previous occurrences(N is set in static configuration data).
new password 2nd try
Description : Second definition of the user’s new password that willnot be validated unless it is exactly the same as newpassword 1st try. It is not displayed.
Refer to the new password 1st try entry in the dictionary.
The new password is validated when opening a newsession.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : user profile - Change password
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:It begins with a letter and contains onenon-alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.
• [A]:It is at least six-character long.
• [A]:It is different from the N previous occurrences(N is set in static configuration data).
new power control algorithm Class 3
Description : Algorithm used by the BTS to control power in a cell.
The "step by step" value refers to the standard powercontrol algorithm.
The "one shot" value refers to the advanced power controlalgorithm.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
344 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
The "enhanced one shot" value refers to theadvanced power algorithm used in connection withthe handOverControl object rxLevHreqaveBeg attributeused in the early handover mechanism.
Value range : [step by step / one shot / enhanced one shot]
Object : bts
Feature : Fast power control at TCH assignment (TF975 - V12)
Default value : one shot
Type : DP
Notes : • The "enhanced one shot" attribute value can only applyto non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.
• Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
Release : V9
next execution time
Description : Date and time of next job run.
Value range : [<date> <time>]
Object : job - Display
Condition : This parameter is significant and displayed only when a jobrun periodicity is defined.
Type : DD
nFRRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : This attribute modifies the "n" parameter in the AMR fullrate "(n,p) voting" mechanism used for FR->HR handovers.This parameter is used by all AMR FR HO not onlyFR=>HR.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : Int [0 to 196]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 24
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 345
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
nHRRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : This attribute modifies the "n" parameter in the AMR halfrate "(n,p) voting" mechanism used for FR->HR handovers.This parameter is used by all AMR HR HO not onlyFR=>HR.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : Int [0 to 196]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 34
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
night intervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in thenighttime configuration.
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2
Description : Number of CCCH blocks not used for paging.
A BCCH is combined when it shares the same radio timeslot with four SDCCHs which can include a CBCH (referto the channelType entry in the Dictionary). In that case,the attribute value is no greater than to 2 (the value mustbe checked by users).
Refer also to the nCHPosition entry in this dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 2] if the cell uses a combined BCCH,[1 to 7] otherwise.
"0" means that PCH blocks are used for sending immediateassignment messages as and when needed.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
346 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Default value : 2
Type : DP
• [M]:This number is greater than zero if thechannelType of one of the channel objectsdependent on the bts object is "sdcch8CBCH"(refer to this entry in the Dictionary).
• [M]:This number is strictly greater than zero if theSysInfo 2Q and/or SysInfo 13 on extendedBCCH features are activated.
Checks :
• [M]:If Bit 9 (SI13) or Bit 10 (SI2Quater) in valueof label 64 in bscDataConfig table is set, thevalue of NoOfBlocksForAccessGrant in the btsobject cannot be set to 0.
noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2
Description : Number of occurrences of a paging sub-group.
The greater this number, the greater the number of pagingsub-groups.
Value range : [2 to 9] multi-frame of fifty-one frames
Object : bts
Default value : 6
Type : DP
notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3
Description : List of mobile access classes that are forbidden in the cell,except case of congestion.
This attribute, together with the emergencyCallRestrictedattribute, allows to control access to a cell according to theservice classes authorized.
Value range : List of mobile access class:
• [0 to 9]: user classes
• [11 to 15]: operator classes
Object : bts
Default value : Leave the field empty
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 347
Type : DP
Remark : General conditions mobiles are granted access to a cell areallotted at subscription time.
notification number
Description : Reference number of the associated notification
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : alarmRecord,mdScanReportRecord,observationFileReadyRecord,stateChangeRecord,traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord.
Type : DP
notification type
Description : This is to select messages specific to the type ofnotifications.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [attributeValueChange / communicationsAlarm /environmentalAlarm / equipmentAlarm / objectCreation /objectDeletion / processingErrorAlarm / qualityOfServiceAlarm / stateChange / specific]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
numberOfJokerDS0 Class 2
Description : Number of jokers DS0 associated to one TDMA. Thedescription applies to the Abis interface.
Value range : [0 to 8]
Object : transceiver
Feature : Data Backhaul Evolution (19174)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: The numberOfJokerDS0 allowed values are:
• [0..4] for S8000 BCF BTS model
• [0..6] for S8000 CBCF, S12000 and e-cell BTS models
• [0..8] for BTS 18000 BTS models
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
348 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Release : V15
Note : The recommended value is linked to target QoS and radioconditions. The value may be set to a non-zero valueeven if EDGE is not activated in corresponding TDMA.Resources will be reserved and unused in that case.However, it may help to properly configure a TDMA beforeactivating EDGE.
number of records
Description : Number of records.
Object : log - Display
Type : DP
Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by theusers.
number of large reuse data channels Class 3
Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the largerfrequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for datacommunications which is used for cell tiering.
Value range : [-16 to +16]
Object : handOvercontrol
Type : DP
Release : V15
numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts
Description : Number of ’enabled’ HDLC ports in the TMU or IEMmodule.
Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/IEMmodules.
Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/LSAmodules. The global Operational State of the HDLC featureis given by the number of ports/channels with an individualoperational state set to ’enabled’.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is setto NULL at ’iem’ or ’tmu’ object instance creation. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 349
Object : iem, tmu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
Note : BSC 3000 V16: this parameter no more exists.
numberOfPwciSamples Class 3
Description : Minimum number of PwCI samples required to reach areliable distribution. This attribute allows the configurationof CellTieringConfiguration at bts level.
Value range : [0 to 60]
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)
Default value : 20
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : CellTiering mode must be activated.
numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3
Description : Number of radio time slots RACH transmission accessesare spread in a random manner to avoid collisions.
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH.
In the event of non-system response, the mobile renewsthe RACH bursts after a randomly defined period varyingwith numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans.
MS Phase 1
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
350 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
The time T between two transmissions of the same RACHburst is the following:
T= [D + (N+1) x 4.615]ms where
• D is the maximum system response pending time:
• N is the randomly number generated by the mobile inthe range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans-1]
• 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.
MS Phase 2
The time T between two transmissions of the same RACHburst is the following (whichever is the BCCH, combinedor not):
T= 4.615 x [S+(N + 1)] ms where
• S is a parameter depending on the BCCH configurationand on the value of numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans (seetable hereafter)
• N is the randomly number generated by the mobile inthe range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans-1]
• 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.
NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans S on notcombinedBCCH
S on combinedBCCH
3, 8, 14, 50 55 41
4, 9, 16 76 52
5, 10, 20 109 58
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
N 351
NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans S on notcombinedBCCH
S on combinedBCCH
6, 11, 25 163 86
7, 12, 32 217 11
Value range : [3 to 12 / 14 / 16 / 20 / 25 / 32 / 50] time slots
Object : bts
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Note : The choice will depend on the quantities of GSM phase 1and GSM phase 2 mobiles.
For Mobile phase 1, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 50leads to the lower double allocation rate.
For Mobile phase 2, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 6, 7,11, 12, 25, 32 (respectively 5, 10, 20) for BCCH combined(respectively BCCH not combined) leads to the lowerdouble allocation rate.
Therefore, for a network that handles a combination of bothtypes of mobiles, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans should beset to 32 (default value).
numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3
Description : Minimum number of free TCHs triggering the beginning ofthe TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the trafficoverload condition.
Value range : [0 to 128]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHFree BeforeCongestion ≤numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
352 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3
Description : A threshold giving the number of free TCHs, which triggersthe end of TCH congestion phase and the end of the trafficoverload condition (additionally, this parameter takes intoaccount the preempted PDTCH).
Value range : [0 to 128]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion ≥numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion
Release : V9
numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3
Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queuedwhich triggers the beginning of the TCH congestion phaseand the beginning of the traffic overload condition.
Value range : [0 to 127]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion ≥numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion
Release : V9
numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3
Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queuedtriggering the end of the TCH congestion phase and theend of the traffic overload condition.
Value range : [0 to 127]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion ≤numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 353
nUsfExt Class 3
Description : USF frequency during the second phase of the extendedUL period
Value range : [0..100] (1 unit = 20 ms)
Note : Even if the nUsfExt parameter value is set to 0 or 1, theperiod remains equal to 40ms (nUsfExt=2); 2 being theminimum parameter value for PCU.
Object : bts
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V15
nwExtUtbf Class 3
Description : Whether the Extended UpLink TBF feature is enabled ornot.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The following flag combination is prohibited:nwExtUtbf = enabled and fullDlKa =disabled
Release : V15
OobjectClass
Description : Q3 object class
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface /bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd /frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink /log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning/ network / observationFileReadyRecord / pcmCircuit/ powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet/ signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord /traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord/ transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone /transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
354 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord.
Type : DP
objectInstance
Description : Scope of an alarm criteria. It covers all network objectswhen undefined.
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
object Filter List
Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects, andtheir subtree (optional).
The object Filter List parameter includes the followingcomponents: objects and scope.
Click the Modify button to enter the names of the objectsto be selected.
The scope enables to select the subtree of an object.
Value range : objects [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection/ alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface/ bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel /efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl /lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord /mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc/ pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink/ signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software /stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord/ traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment /transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 355
objects
Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects (50objects max.), enter the concerned object class(es). Thisfield must be empty to select all object classes.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
If a class is selected, the user may select one or moreobjects created in that class. If no object is selected, allmessages issued by all objects created in the class aredisplayed.
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface/ bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel /efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl /lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord /mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc/ pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink/ signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software /stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord/ traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment /transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
objects assigned
Description : List of the BSSs assigned to the relay. Fill in the list withbsc object identifiers or names.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : relay
Type : DP
Remark : A BSS can be assigned to several relays at the same time.
observation type
Description : Type of the observation.
Value range : [general Statistic / fast Statistic / real Time / diagnostic]
Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
Release : V11
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
356 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
observation type
Description : Type of the observation.
Value range : [Observation real time / Observation fast statistic /Performance monitor]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
observed counters
Description : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation.
Object : report template
Value range : [list of Q3 counter names]
Type : DP
Release : V11
observed object class
Description : Class of object the user observes.
Value range : [bsc / btsSiteManager / bts / pcmCircuit / adjacentCellHandOver / transceiverZone / transceiverEquipment / omu / tmu/ cc / cem / pcmPort / signallingLink / channel / omc / md /machine]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
occupationState
Description : Determines whether the PCM TS used by the terrestrialcircuit is occupied by an SS7 channel.
This attribute is significant provided the xtp object isunlocked.
[preempted / notPreempted]
• preempted........The terrestrial circuit is mappedon a time slot occupied by an SS7channel on the Ater interface.
Value range :
• notPreempted.....The PCM time slot is available forthe traffic.
Object : xtp
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 357
offsetLoad Class 3
Description : Load offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process.
Value range : [0 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Feature : Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority andload (TF716 - V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [0 to 63].
Notes : • When set to "0", no offset is effective.
• This parameter is set to "0" for the cells that do notbelong to the related bsc object.
Release : V12
offsetNeighbouringCell Class 3
Description : This attribute modifies the offset linked to the neighboringcell, used to increase the HO margin, in some specificcases
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked
Value range : Int [-63 to 63] dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
The following tables show for each case, the ho marginvalue and the averaging windows taking account into thePBGT handover mechanism according to:
• the MS type-fast or slow mobile or managed by ahopping TCH
• the number of measurement of the serving cellcompared with the normal averaging window
• the number of measurement of the neighboring cellcompared with the normal averaging window
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is available for BSC 12000HC V15 andBSC 3000 V14 and V15.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
358 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Table 1Mobile type: SFH MS
cell Meas neighboringcell meas
cell meas avg neighboring cell avg Ho Margin
< < RxLevHreqAveBeg
RxNCellHreqAveBeg HoMargin+offsetNeighbouringCell
< ≥ RxLevHreqAveBeg
RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin
≥ < RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve Beg HoMargin+offsetNeighbouringCell-servingfactorOffset
≥ ≥ RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin-servingfactorOffset
Table 2Mobile type: slow non SFH MS
cell Measneighboringcell meas
cell meas avg neighboring cell avg Ho Margin
< < RxLevHreqAveBeg
RxNCellHreqAveBeg HoMargin+hoMarginBeg
< ≥ RxLevHreqAveBeg
RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin+hoMarginBeg
≥ < RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAveBeg HoMargin+offsetNeighbouringCell
≥ ≥ RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin
Table 3Mobile type: fast non SFH MS
cell Measneighboringcell meas
cell meas avg neighboring cell avg Ho Margin
- - RxLevHreqAveBeg RxNCellHreqAve Beg HoMargin
with:
• < : number of available measurements is less than thenormal window,
• ≥ : number of available measurements is greater thanthe normal window.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 359
offsetPriority Class 3
Description : Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selectionprocess.
Value range : [1 to 5]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Feature : Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority andload (TF716 - V12)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute must be in the range [1 to 5].
Release : V12
Note : "1" is the highest priority.
Description: Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selectionprocess
Value range: 1...5
Object: adjacentCellUTRAN
Default value: 1
Type: DP
Checks:
Release: V17
Note: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
oMC notification number
Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications identified by agiven number.
Do not fill in this criterion if not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
omu
Description : Managed object class representing the Mass Memory Unit(hard disk) board.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : omu
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
360 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : Id
Notes : • This parameter is significant only when the BTS usesthe standard "step by step power control algorithm.
• This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
omuId
Description : Identifier of the ’omu’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified and is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : omu
Type : DP
Release : V13
on error
Description : Whether to stop running commands when an applicativeerror is detected by the system (stop).
Value range : [stop / continue]
Object : commandFile - Run
Type : DP
onlyExtUtbf Class 3
Description : Whether only Extended UpLink TBF mode is supported.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : The recommended value is ’enable’.
onePhaseAccess Class 2
Description : One phase access activation parameter.
Value range : BSC V15: int [0 to 1]BSC V16: [disabled / enabled / edgeEnabled /gprsEdgeEnabled]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 361
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access(15015)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
• [C/M]:Edge must be activated at cell level(egprsServices must be equal to enabled ) ifonePhaseAccess is equal to edgeEnabled orgprsEdgeEnabled.
Checks :
• [C/M]:Edge must be activated (edgeDataServiceType must be equal to full capabilities arerequested) on BCCH TDMA (TDMA havinglowest priority) if onePhaseAccess is equal toedgeEnabled or gprsEdgeEnabled
Notes : • "0" stands for disabled "One phase access".
• "1" stands for enabled "One phase access".
Release : V15
onePhaseDnMsCapability Class 3
Description : Default number of DL TS to be considered for MSattempting a 1 phase access.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access(15015)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : Values 0 and 9 to 255 are interpreted as default value bythe PCU.
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the atmRm objectare as follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled notInstalled
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
362 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : atmRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the bsc object areas follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The BSC has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled {} The BSC is in restart or BDAbuild phase.
unlocked disabled dependency The BSS/OMC-R link is notcreated or the BSC databaseis not built.
unlocked disabled failed The BSC refuses everycommand, including resetting.
unlocked enabled {} The BSS/OMC-R link and theassociations with the BSCare established, and the BSCdatabase is built.
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 363
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the bscMdInterfaceobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The BSS/OMC-R link hasbeen locked by a user.
unlocked disabled {} The link has just been createdand the connection is notestablished yet (initial state).
unlocked disabled dependency The link is down.
unlocked disabled failed The connection cannot bereestablished.
unlocked enabled {} The connection is established.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the bts object are asfollows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The cell has just been createdor locked.
unlocked disabled dependency The radio site is not workingor the TDMA frames are notcorrectly configured.
unlocked enabled {} The radio site is working andthe number of TDMA framescorrectly configured for thecell is reached.
shutting Down enabled busy The radio cell is beingreleased following a softrelease command.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
364 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the btsSiteManagerobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The site has just been createdor locked.
unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the site BCFis in-progress.
unlocked disabled dependency The PCM link used for the siteLAPD signaling is faulty.
unlocked disabled failed Loss of Level 3 dialogue orconfiguration Abis messagenot correctly acknowledged ordownloading problem
unlocked enabled {} The PCM is available forLAPD signaling, the Level 3dialogue is established, andthe configuration and Abisconnection with the site BCFare OK.
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC-R agent.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the callPathTraceobject are as follows:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 365
administrativeState
operationalState usageState
Meaning
locked enabled idle Call path tracing has juststarted in the BSC or hasbeen stopped by the operator.
unlocked enabled busy Call path tracing is in-progressand messages are forwardedto the OMC-R agent.
unlocked enabled idle Call path tracing is stopped(end-of-session criterion istrue).
unlocked disabled Call path tracing is in-progressbut messages are notforwarded to the OMC-Ragent.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the cc object are asfollows:
operationalState availabilityStatus
disabled notInstalled
disabled {}
disabled failed
disabled dependency
enabled online
Object : cc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
366 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the cem object areas follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled notInstalled
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : cem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the controlNodeobject are as follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled degraded
{} enabled online
Object : controlNode
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 367
Object : efd
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the g3BscEqp objectare as follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} enabled {}
{} disabled dependency
Object : g3BscEqp
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the g3Transcoderobject are as follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled degraded
{} enabled {}
Object : hardware transcoder 3G
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
368 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the iem object areas follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled not installed
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : iem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the interfaceNodeobject are as follows:
operationalState availabilityStatus
disabled dependency
disabled {}
enabled degraded
disabled {}
Object : interfaceNode
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 369
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the lapdLink objectare as follows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled dependency Loss of Level 1
disabled failed SICD board faulty or TSCB faulty (Ater LAPDlink) or BSCB faulty (Abis LAPD link)
enabled {} The Level 1 is established and the SICDs,RCBs, and related internal PCMs are working.
Object : lapdLink
Note : This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML andlapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the log object are asfollows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled {} The disk message saving partition is full(current alarm log).
disabled logFull The disk message saving partition is full(current observation or trace log).
enabled {} The messages are actually saved in thepartition.
Object : log
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
370 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the lsaRc object areas follows:
operationalState availabilityStatus
disabled dependency
disabled {}
enabled degraded
disabled {}
Object : lsaRc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC-R agent.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the mdScannerobject are as follows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled {} The observation is running but the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.
disabled {offDuty} The observation is stopped and the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.
enabled {} The observation is running and the messagesare forwarded to the OMC-R agent.
enabled {offDuty} The observation is stopped and the messagesare forwarded to the OMC-R agent.
Object : mdScanner
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 371
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the mms object areas follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked {} {}
Object : mms
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the omu object areas follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked {} {}
Object : omu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the pcmCircuit objectare as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The PCM has just beencreated or locked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
372 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
unlocked disabled dependency The TCU is faulty (A interfacePCMs).
unlocked disabled failed The DDTI board or the internalPCM partner is faulty, or theconnection is down.
unlocked enabled {} The DDTI board and theinternal PCM partner areworking and the connection isestablished.
Object : pcmCircuit
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the pcu object areas follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The PCU has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled dependency The Level 2 is not establishedor the connection with theBSC is down (external PCM).
unlocked enabled {} The PCU is working.
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DD
Release : V12
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the pcu object areas follows:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 373
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled {} The pcusn has just been created.
disabled dependency The pcusn object does not work, or the PCMlink does not work.
enabled {} The pcusn object is working.
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DD
Release : V12
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the signallingLinkobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The SS7 link has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled dependency The PCM carrying the SS7link is faulty or there is noMTP2 message between theBSC and the MSC.
unlocked disabled failed The CCS7 board is faulty.
unlocked enabled {} The PCM and CCS7 boardare working and MTP2messages are exchangedbetween the BSC and theMSC.
Object : signallingLink
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
374 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the sw8kRm objectare as follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled not installed
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : sw8kRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the tmu object areas follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked disabled not installed
unlocked disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled degraded
{} enabled {}
Object : tmu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 375
operationalState
Description : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC-R agent.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the traceControlobject are as follows:
administrative State
operationalState
Meaning
locked enabled Call tracing has not started or has beenstopped, and the messages are forwarded tothe OMC-R agent.
locked disabled Call tracing has been stopped and themessages cannot be forwarded to the OMC-Ragent.
unlocked enabled Call tracing is in-progress in the BSC and themessages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent.
unlocked disabled Call tracing is in-progress but the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.
Object : traceControl
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transceiver objectare as follows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled dependency The parent cell is not working or no TRX/DRXis available for the TDMA frame.
disabled failed The BTS has refused the TDMA frameconfiguration or is using the partneredTRX/DRX for BCCH filling purposes.
enabled {} The parent cell is working, a TRX/DRX isavailable for the TDMA frame, and the BTShas accepted the TDMA frame configuration.
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
376 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transceiverEquipment object are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The TRX/DRX has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the TRX/DRXis in-progress.
unlocked disabled dependency The parent radio site or theparent cell or the PCM linkpartner is not working.
unlocked disabled failed The TRX/DRX is assigned toBCCH filling by the BTS orloss of Level 3 dialogue orAbis configuration messagenot correctly acknowledged ordownloading problem or statusregression.
unlocked enabled {} The parent cell is working,a PCM is available to theTRX/DRX, and the Level 3dialogue is established.
shutting Down enabled {} The TRX/DRX is beingreleased following a softrelease command.
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transcoder objectare as follows:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 377
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The TCU has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled dependency The SICD, RCB, TSCB,or internal PCM partneris faulty or the Level 2is not established or theconnection with the BSC isdown (external PCM).
unlocked enabled {} The TCU is working.
Object : transcoder
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transcoderBoardobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The TCB has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the TCB is inprogress.
unlocked disabled dependency The parent TCU is notworking.
unlocked disabled failed The UTE board or internalPCM partner is faulty ordownloading problem or asevere error was detected.
unlocked enabled {} The TCB is working.
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
378 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the trm object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked disabled not installed
unlocked disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : trm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Release : V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the xtp object are asfollows:
administrativeState
operationalState usage State
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled idle {} The CIC hasjust beencreated orlocked.
unlocked disabled idle dependency The PCMlink partneris faulty.
unlocked disabled idle failed The CIC ispreempted.
unlocked enabled idle {} The CIC isworking andtraffic-free.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
O 379
administrativeState
operationalState usage State
availabilityStatus
Meaning
unlocked enabled busy {} The CIC isworking andtraffic-busy.
shutting Down enabled busy {} The CICis beingreleasedfollowing asoft releasecommand.
Object : xtp
Type : DD
otherServicesPriority Class 3
Description : An index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocationrequest (in signaling mode) whose cause is "otherservices".
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when anSDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
output classes
Description : List of authorized output classes defining a terminal outputdomain. Output classes grant access to various types ofdata.
Value range : [login window / OMC-R browser / alarm window /performance monitor]
When the "login window" class is authorized, the "Login"window is automatically displayed on the terminal screenoutside work sessions.
Object : terminal profile
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
380 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
output classes
Description : List of authorized output classes defining a user’s outputdomain. Output classes grant access to various types ofdata.
Value range : [OMC-R browser / alarm window / performance monitor/ command file manager / security manager / SMS-CBmanager / description window / job scheduler window /alarm log window / system session log window / call traceswindow / Unix window / notification log window / notificationwindow / relay manager / alarm criteria]
The "notification log window" class gives access to thesystem notification log, while the "notification window" classgives access to the user notification log.
Object : user profile
Type : DP
owner
Description : Name of the user creating the command file on theOMC-R.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
PpacketAckTime Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
• dwAckTime
• upAckTime
The deactivation value is 64 for both of them.
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 381
packetFlowContext Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
• pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection
• pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection
• pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection
• pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection
• pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection
• pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection
• pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold
• pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold
• pfcPreemptionRatioGold
• pfcPreemptionRatioSilver
• pfcRtDowngradeAllowed
• pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold
• pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold
• pfcT6
• pfcT8
• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl
• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
These attributes have no effect on the BSS if thepfcActivation parameter is disabled.
Object : powerControl
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Release : V16
Notes : • This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC3000 only.
• This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
382 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
packetSiStatus Class 3
Description : Activation of the System Information Status feature in thecell.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Feature : Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS
Type : DP
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
pagingOnCell Class 3
Description : Enables or disables paging requests in a cell.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Release : V9
pan Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
• panInc
• panDec
• panMax
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
Release : V12
panDec Class 3 (pan)
Description : The MS counter N3102 is decremented by panDec eachtime PUAN timer expires
Value range : [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7(32s)]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 0
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 383
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release isperformed.
panInc Class 3 (pan)
Description : The MS counter N3102 is incremented by panInc eachtime a PUAN message which allows the transmit window togo forward is received.
Value range : [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7(32s)]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release isperformed.
panMax Class 3 (pan)
Description : Maximum value of the counter N3102 (used in case ofblock acknowledgment time out), set by the MS at eachcell reselection.
Value range : [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7(32s)]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release isperformed.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
384 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
parameter(s)
Description : List of parameters to define when running the commandfile.
Their generic format is $XXX, where $ identifiessuch a parameter and XXX is a string of uppercase,alphanumerical characters that does not contain spaces.
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
partialRecordCriteriaType Class 2
Description : Criterion that defines the type of partial records to generatein the BSC.
Value range : [event type / numbered / timed / no partial]
• event type ........The BSC generates partialrecords each time a handoveris successful (partialRecordCriteriaEvent-Type ="handover").
• numbered ........The BSC generates partialrecords every <N> successfulhandovers (partialRecordCriteriaNb-Event = [1 to 64]).
• timed ............The BSC generates partialrecords every <N> seconds(partialRecord-Criteria-Timer= [1 to 60]).
• no partial ........The BSC does not generatepartial records.
If "no partial" is selected, trace data are only recorded atthe end of each traced call. If the traceControl object islocked before the end of a call, all related data are lost.
Object : traceControl
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The traceControl object is locked.
A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data in the related BSC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 385
partialRecordCriteriaEventType
Description : Create traceControl. Select this criterion whenpartialRecordCriteriaType is equal to "Event type".
Value range : handover
Type : DP
partialRecordCriteriaNbEvent
Description : Create traceControl. Enter the number of events whenpartialrecordCriteriaType is equal to "Numbered".
Value range : [1 to 64]
Type : DP
partialrecordCriteriaTimer
Description : This parameter should be set to "Hand over" whenpartialRecordCriteriaType is equal to "Event type".
Value range : [1 to 60] minutes
Type : DP
particular intervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criteria in thespecific configuration.
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
password
Description : User’s current password as defined in the user’s profile. Itis not displayed.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : user profile - Change password
Type : DP
password
Description : User’s password. It begins with a letter, contains at leastone non-alphabetical character among the first eightcharacters, and is case sensitive.
Value range : [6 characters min]
Object : user profile - Create/Set
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
386 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The password begins with a letter and containsone non-alphanumerical character among thefirst eight characters.
• [C/M]:The password is at least six-character long.
password duration
Description : Maximum time during which the user’s current passwordis valid.
Value range : [2 to 2147483646] days
When a password validity duration runs out, the passwordmust be changed on opening the next work session.The user’s access to MMI commands is barred until thepassword is changed. Refer to the password status entry.
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Note : It is possible for this parameter to take on an infinite value.
If so, the password will not expire.
pcmCircuit
Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to absc object (Abis, Ater, Lb, A_Lb, or Agprs interface). It isrelated to the number of the DDTI board to which the PCMdescribed link is physically connected in the BSC.
PCM links are identified by the DDTI boards to whichthey are connected in the BSC. A PCM link connected toDDTI board no.i has a reference equal to "2i" or "2i+1"(each board manages two links at a time). See NTP <22 >, which gives the relationship between the number ofa board and its physical location in the BSC equipmentcabinet.
When the PCM link is allotted to a site on the Abisinterface, it is also identified by a reference number definedwith regard to the site (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager). Referto the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0..363]
Max number of pcmCircuit T1: 0..168 (BSC 3000); 0..364(BSC 3000 Optical); 0..88 (TCU 3G)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 387
Max number of pcmCircuit E1: 0..126 (BSC 3000); 0..252(BSC 3000 Optical); 0..66 (TCU 3G)
Object : pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, Lb, A_Lb and Agprs interfaces)
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The maximum number of external PCM linksallotted to a BSC depends on its type andarchitecture:
12000BSC
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
externalPCMs
12 20 28 40 48
Checks : • [C]:The number of external PCM links allotted toa BSC on the Ater interface depends on thenumber of TCUs linked to the BSC (one TCUuses one link).
• [C]:The software object related to the parent bscobject is created.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the pcmCircuit object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No btsSiteManager object (Abis PCM) ortranscoder object (Ater PCM) or pcu object(Agprs PCM) refers to the pcmCircuit object.
• [D]:No mdScanner object describing a temporaryobservation refers to the pcmCircuit object (noobservation is running on the concerned PCM).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
388 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
pcmCircuit
Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to atranscoder object (A interface).
It is related to the number of the TDTI board to which thePCM described link is physically connected in the TCU.PCM links are identified by the TDTI boards to which theyare physically connected in the TCU.
PcmCircuit TDTI N Port N
0 0 0
1 1 0
2 1 1
3 2 0
2 1
Unused
Value range : [0 to 3]
Object : pcmCircuit (A interface)
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The number of PCM links connected toa remote transcoder on the A interface islimited to maxPcmCTPerTranscd (staticconfiguration data).
• [C]:The parent transcoder object is created.
• [C]:<maxTranscdBPerTranscd> transcoderBoardobjects are created for the parent transcoderobject.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the pcmCircuit object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No signallingLink or xtp object refers to thepcmCircuit object.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 389
pcmCircuitBsc
Description : Identifier of a PCM link (pcmCircuit object) used by a radiosite defined with regard to the BSC. It is related to thenumber of the DDTI board to which the link is physicallyconnected in the BSC.
Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, whichdefines the relationship between these two attributes.
Value range : Depending on the BSC type, the value range is:
• [0 to 47] for a BSC 12000HC
• [0 to 167] for a BSC 3000
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager
Description : Identifier of the PCM link defined with regard to the BTS. Itis related to the number of the DTI or PCMI board to whichthe link is physically connected in the BTS.
Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, whichdefines the relationship between these two attributes.
Value range : [0 to 5]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
pcmCircuitId
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a LAPD link.
Since all radio sites have a switching facility, the BSC candirectly allocate the PCM link that supports a LAPD link.
Value range : [0 to 47] for BSC 12000HC
[0 to 167] for BSC 3000
Object : lapdLink
Note : This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML andlapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
390 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Note : This parameter is only available for the lapdLink OMLobject on BSC 3000.
Type : DD
pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by an SS7 channel on the Ainterface, defined with regard to the TCU.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The pcmCircuit object is created forthe transcoder object referenced by thesignallingLink object (transcoderId).
• [C/M]:If the described link is PCMA no.3, thetime slot used by the SS7 channel(timeSlotNumber) is in the range [1 to27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link arenot mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).
pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a TCU on the Aterinterface, defined with regard to the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 47]
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The pcmCircuit object is created for the parentbsc object.
• [C/M]:It is not used on the Abis interface by abtsSiteManager object nor on the Aterinterface by another transcoder objectdependent on the same parent bsc object.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, and thetranscoder object and the signallingLinkobjects that refer to it are locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 391
pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a terrestrial circuit on theA interface, defined with regard to the TCU.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The pcmCircuit object is created for thetranscoder object referenced by the xtp object(transcoderId).
• [C/M]:If the described link is PCMA no.3, thetime slot used by the terrestrial circuit(timeSlotNumber ) is in the range [1 to 27] ifthe PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since thelast four time slots of that link are not mappedon the Ater interface, they are unusable(refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary).
pcmErrorCorrection Class 2
Description : Whether the bts uses the new ETF (Enhanced TRAUFrame) frame (set to "1") or the ETSI "Rec 08.60" frame(set to "0").
Value range : [0 / 1]
Object : bts
Feature : PCM error correction (FM660 - V12)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M] This attribute can be set to "1" only ifenhancedTRAUFrameIndication attribute isset to "available" or "active "
Release : V12
Note : This parameter is only available for BTSs equipped withnon mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.
pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList)
Description : Number of PCM links used for Agprs interface.
Value range : BSC 12000HC: [1 / 3 / 5 / 7 to 47]
BSC 3000: [6 to 167]
Object : pcu
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
392 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : None
Type : DP
Release : V12
pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2
Description : Scheduled time slot of a radio site on the Abis interface.
Value range : [1 to 31] if the PCM link is an E1 link[1 to 24] if the PCM link is a T1 link
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The scheduled time slot is masked in thebstSiteManager object radioSiteMask, so itcannot be allotted by the BSC.
Notes : • The relation "scheduled time slot = teiBtsSiteManager+ 1" is always true at BTS level.
• It can be false at BSC level provided a PCM switchingmatrix is used between the BSC and the BTS;otherwise, it is true.
Release : V8
pcmType Class 3 (BSC 12000) or Class 0 (BSC 3000)
Description : Interface on which the PCM link is used.
Value range : [pcmA / pcmAbis / pcmAter / pcmAgprs / pcmA_Lb /pcm_Lb]
Object : pcmCircuit
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmA, nosignallingLink or xtpobject refers to that object(pcmTimeSlotNumber).
• [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmAbis, nobtsSiteManager object refers to that object(bscSitePcmList).
• [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmAter,no transcoder object refers to that object(pcmCircuitId ).
• [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmAgprs,no pcu object refers to that object(bscPcuPcmRefList ).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 393
• [M]:pcmAbis is forbidden for pcmCircuitId equals0, 2, 4, or 6.
• [C/M]:signallingLink of Lb interface must bereferenced to pcmCircuit of pcmLb orpcmA_Lb type.
• [C/M]:signallingLink of A interface must bereferenced to pcmCircuit of pcmA orpcmA_Lb type.
pcu
Description : Identifier of a pcu object defined with regard to a bscobject.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : Id
Release : V12
pcuCellState
Description : From the BSC point of view, this parameter correspondsto the GPRS configuration of the cell in the PCU. This ismade possible through the messages exchanged betweenthe BSC and the PCU.
Value range : [0, Not Significant;1, GPRS: no PDTCH channels created;
2, GPRS: out of service;
3, GPRS: service OML configuring;
4, GPRS: service RSL configuring;
5, GPRS: in service;
6, GPRS: service unavailable - OML;
7, GPRS: service unavailable - Gb down;
8, GPRS: service unavailable - BVC KO]
Object : pcu
Type : DD
Release : V16
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
394 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2
Description : List of LAPD equipment numbers used by the pcu object.
Value range : [1 to 12]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:All the referred LAPD equipment objectinstances of this attribute must exist
• [C/M]:The sapi attribute of the referred lapdLinkobject instances must have been set to ’OML’.The associatedInterface attribute of thereferred lapdLink object instances must havebeen set to ’Agprs’.
• [C/M]:A lapdLink object instance can be referred byonly one pcu object instance
Release : V12
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
pcusn
Description : Identifier of a pcusn object.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Type : Id
Release : V12
pcuSNName
Description : Reference name of a PCUSN object on the OMC-R.
It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.
Value range : [30 characters max.]
Object : pcusn
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a pcuSN is unique to the OMC-R.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 395
Release : V12
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
The valid symbols are:
- letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z
- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
- minus sign: -
- undescore: _
penaltyTime Class 3
Description : Timer used by an idle mobile before re-selecting a cell (C2criterion).
When a mobile places the cell on the list of strongestcarriers, it starts a timer that stops after penaltyTimeseconds. This timer is reset when the mobile removes thecell from the list.
For the entire timer duration, the re-selection criterion (C2)is assigned a negative temporaryOffset value.
Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [20 to 640, by steps of 20] seconds. The value "640" isreserved and indicates that the temporary offset is ignoredin the re-selection criterion (C2) calculation. It also changesthe sign in the C2 formula.
Object : bts
Feature : AR 264
Default value : 20
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
396 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
perceived severity
Description : To select messages according to the priority.
The alarm processing priority provides an indication of howit is perceived that the capability of the managed objecthas been affected. Refer to the alarmPriority entry in theDictionary where the priority levels are explained.
Value range : [cleared / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning]
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3
Description : Periodicity at which the BTS sends the CCCH payload tothe BSC ("9.2" is the only value accepted).
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646] second
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"9.2".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
periodicity
Description : Time between two runs if the job is to be periodically run.
Value range : [1 to 2147483646] minute(s)
Object : job
Condition : To define if it is a periodic job.
Type : DP
pfcActivation Class 2
Description : Activates the Packet Flow Context feature in the cell.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 397
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 1(allocation / retention priorities 1) are protected againstvoice preemption. This parameter is not used.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : powerControl
Default value : false
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 1(allocation / retention priorities 1) are protected againstvoice preemption.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : powerControl
Default value : false
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 2(allocation / retention priorities 2) are protected againstvoice preemption. This parameter is not used.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : powerControl
Default value : false
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
398 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 2(allocation / retention priorities 2) are protected againstvoice preemption.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : powerControl
Default value : false
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 3(allocation / retention priorities 3) are protected againstvoice preemption. This parameter is not used.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : powerControl
Default value : false
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3
Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 3(allocation / retention priorities 3) are protected againstvoice preemption. This parameter is not used.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : powerControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 399
Default value : false
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcFlowControlActivation Class 2
Description : Activates the flow control of the Packet Flow Context in thecell.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:If pfcActivation is disabled, it is not allowed toenable pfcFlowControlActivation.
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is optional. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs Class 3
Description : Specifies the percentage of each TS of the TDMA whichis reserved for non real time PFC (including MSs with noPFC). This parameter is used for the admission control ofa real time PFC.
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Release : V16
Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
400 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Note : The value ‘0’ or a very low value may result in a TBF withonly NRT PFC not being allocated enough bandwidth. Thisresults in TBF drops. The value ‘0’ is internally converted to1 inside the PCU.
Note : The value ‘100’ or a very high value may result in all RTPFC being downgraded or deleted. This value is internallyconverted to 99 inside PCU.
pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate Class 3
Description : Number of jokers that are needed to guarantee bothuplink and downlink throughputs in any location of thecell. Refer to the pfcTsGuranteedBitRateUl and thepfcTsGuranteedBitRateDl entries in this dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 4] 16 kbit/s PCM TS
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:pfcMinNumberOfJoker sforTsGuaranteedBitRate’ must be lower than or equal tominNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain so thatreal timePFC can be accepted when dynamicAgprs is activated.
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcNrtRequestedDnMbrGTThrescounter (C15267). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.
Value range : [0..568] kbit/s
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0 (all requests are taken into account)
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 401
pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcNrtRequestedUpMbrGTThrescounter (C15268). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.
Value range : [0..568] kbit/s
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0 (all requests are taken into account)
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcPreemptionRatioGold Class 3
Description : Defines the percentage of raw radio bandwidth a gold NRTPFC (THP1) may preempt from silver and bronze NRTPFC (THP2 or THP3 or background or MS without PFCsupport)
Value range : [0.00 to 93.750] by step of 0.5%
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0 (no preemption)
Type : DP
Release : V14 (renamed in V16)
Note : The value may be decreased to lower the impact on Silverand Bronze subscribers when the traffic is high.
pfcPreemptionRatioSilver Class 3
Description : Defines the percentage of raw radio bandwidth a silverNRT PFC (THP2) may preempt from bronze NRT PFC(THP3 or background or MS without PFC support)
Value range : [0.00 to 93.750] by step of 0.5%
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0 (no preemption)
Type : DP
Release : V14 (renamed in V16)
Note : The value may be decreased to lower the impact onBronze subscribers when the traffic is high.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
402 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
pfcRtDowngradeAllowed Class 3
Description : In case the guaranteed bit rate of a real time PFC cannotbe granted, this parameter indicates whether the PFCis deleted or downgraded into a non real time PFC. If itis downgraded into a non real time PFC, the parameterspecifies which traffic class and PFC are used for thedowngrade.
Value range : [downgrade not allowed / downgrade to interactive THP1 /downgrade to interactive THP2 / downgrade to interactiveTHP3 / downgrade to background]
Object : powerControl
Default value : downgrade not allowed
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcRtRequestedDnGbrGTThrescounter (C15265). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.
Value range : [0..568] kbit/s
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0 (all requests are taken into account)
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcRtRequestedUpGbrGTThrescounter (C15266). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.
Value range : [0..568] kbit/s
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0 (all requests are taken into account)
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 403
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcT6 Class 3
Description : pfcT6 is the guard timer for the Download Packet FlowContext procedure.
Value range : [0.1 to 10] seconds by step of 0.1 second
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcT8 Class 3
Description : pfcT8 is the guard timer for the Modify Packet Flow Contextprocedure.
Value range : [0.1 to 10] seconds by step of 0.1 second
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl Class 3
Description : For an EDGE MS, specifies the downlink throughput whichis guaranteed in any location of the cell.
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
404 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl Class 3
Description : For an EDGE MS, specifies the uplink throughput which isguaranteed in any location of the cell.
Value range : [1 to 60] kbit/s
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0
Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.
Release : V16
plmnPermitted Class 3
Description : List of NCC of the PLMNs on which MSs are allowed totake measurements for handovers. Listening to the PLMNto which the cell belongs must be authorized.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : bts
Default value :
Type : DP
pODType
Description : Type of the BSC or BTS involved, as defined in thePhysical Objects Dictionary.
Value range : [BSC1GT / BSC2GT / BTSoutdoor / BTSindoor / BTSmicro/ BTSsmart / BTSoutdoor2G]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
pointCode Class 1
Description : MSC identifier in the SS7 network (Destination Point Code).
Value range : • in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383]
• in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 405
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DP
pointCode Class 1
Description : BSC identifier in the SS7 network (Origin Point Code).
Value range : • in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383]
• in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]
Object : signallingPoint
Type : DP
port Ethernet operational
Description : Operational state of the OMU external Ethernet port.
ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [enabled/disabled]
Object : omu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
port Ethernet status
Description : Availability status of the OMU module external Ethernetport.
ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : omu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
406 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DD
Release : V13
port 0 X25 status
Description : Operational state of the OMU module external X.25 port 0.
ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : omu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
port 1 X25 status
Description : Availability status of the OMU external X.25 port 1.
ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : omu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 407
portChosen Class 2
Description : Number of the port currently used on the OMC-R end.
Value range : [port0 / port1 / automaticChoice (selection by the OMC-Ragent)]
If the port is not uniquely selected, it will be dynamicallyassigned by the OMC-R agent.
Selecting "automaticChoice" is recommended since itallows the OMC-R agent to reconfigure the port currentlyused when a problem occurs.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Checks : • [M] :The bscMdInterface object is locked.
portUsed
Description : Number of the port currently used on the OMC-R end.
Value range : [port0 / port1]
This dynamic attribute identifies the OMC-R port currentlyused. It can be different from portChosen since theOMC-R agent switches the transport connection with aBSC over to the other port as and when needed.
No information is displayed unless the BSS/OMC-R link isestablished.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DI
positionInShelf
Description : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf.
Value range : [1 to 15]
Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu,trm,
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
408 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
powerBudgetInterCell Class 3
Description : Authorization to perform intercell handovers for powerbudget.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
powerClass
Description : Transmission power class of a TDMA frame.
Value range : [powerClass5 (GSM 900 network, GSM-R network,E-GSM, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM 1800network) powerClass1 (GSM 1800 network, GSM 1900network, GSM 1800 - GSM 900 network and GSM 1900- GSM 850)]
Object : transceiver
Default value : powerClass1
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The attribute value complies with the type ofnetwork in which the TDMA frame is used.Refer to the standardIndicator entry in theDictionary (attribute of the parent bts object).
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
powerControl
Description : Identifier of a powerControl object that defines the powercontrol management parameters in a cell. A bts object mayreference one and only one object of this type.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : powerControl
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created and thepowerControl object is not created for thatobject.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe associated bts object is locked.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [M/D]:The powerControl object is created.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 409
• [D]:The associated bts object is not referenced,except by an handOverControl object.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
powerControlIndicator Class 3
Description : Whether MS signal strength measurements includemeasurements on BCCH.
BCCH measurements must not be included when thefollowing two conditions are met:
• The radio channel hops at least on two differentfrequencies, including the BCCH frequency.
• Power control on the downlink is used.
Value range : [include BCCH measurements / do not include BCCHmeasurements]
This parameter should only be used with cavity coupling.
Object : bts
Default value : include BCCH measurements
Type : DP
powerDownlink (algorithm Used) class 2
Description : Power gain in the BTS-to-MS direction used by the speechprocessing algorithm in a TCB.
This parameter is a component of the algorithm Usedattribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [-15 to +15] dB
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V8
powerIncrStepSize Class 3
Description : Step for increasing MS or BTS txpwr when using step bystep algorithm. This is applicable to BSC 12000HC only.
Value range : [2, 4, 6] dB
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
410 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : powerControl
Default value : 4 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:lRxLevDLP + powerIncStepSize≤ uRxLevDLP.
• [M]:lRxLevULP + powerIncStepSize ≤uRxLevULP.
Notes : • This parameter is significant only when the BTS usesthe standard "step by step" power control algorithm.
• This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
powerIncrStepSizeUpLink Class 3
Description : Increment step size for uplink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [2 to 30] dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : • 0566CO01: The attribute ’powerIncrStepSizeUL’ mustverify:
’1RxLevULP’ + ’powerIncrStepSizeUL’ <= ’uRxLevULP’
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 411
powerIncrStepSizeDownLink Class 3
Description : Increment step size for downlink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [2 to 30] dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : • 0565CO01 - The attribute ’powerIncrStepSizeDL’ mustverify:
’1RxLevDLP’ + ’powerIncrStepSizeDL’ <= ’uRxLevDLP’
Release : V14
powerRedStepSize Class 3
Description : Step for reducing MS or BTS txpwr when using step bystep algorithm. This is applicable to BSC 12000HC only.
Value range : [2, 4] dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : 2 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevDLP.
• [M]:uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevULP.
Notes :
• This parameter is significant only when the BTS usesthe standard "step by step" power control algorithm.
• This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
412 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
powerRedStepSizeDownLink Class 3
Description : Decrement step size for downlink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [2 to 8] dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Checks : • 0567CO01 - The attribute ’powerRedStepSizeDL’ mustverify:
’uRxLevDLP’ - ’powerRedStepSizeDL’ >= ’1RxLevDLP’
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
powerRedStepSizeUpLink Class 3
Description : Decrement step size for uplink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [2 to 30] dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 413
Checks : • 0568CO01-The attribute ’powerRedStepSizeUL’ mustverify:
’uRxLevULP’ - ’powerRedStepSizeUL’ >= ’1RxLevULP’
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
powerUplink (algorithm Used) Class 2
Description : Power gain in the MS-to-BTS direction used by the speechprocessing algorithm in a TCB.
This parameter is a component of the algorithm Usedattribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [-15 to +15] dB
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V8
preemptionAuthor Class 3
Description : Defines the preemption management
Value range : [forbidden,authorizedWithRelease,authorizedForcedHO]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : forbidden
Feature : ASCI (GSM-R V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : authorizedWithRelease and authorizedForcedHO optionsare not available.
preemptionConfiguration Class 3
Description : This parameter is composed of preemptionAuthor andeMLPPThreshold. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary.
Object : signallingPoint
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
414 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
pRequestedCodec Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the "p" parameter in the AMR "(n,p)voting" mechanism.
This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : Int [12 to 192] in steps of 12
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 48
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3
Description : Pre-defined timing advance used in a pre-synchronizedhandover procedure between the serving cell and thisneighbor cell.
This value of timing advance is used when the parameter"synchronized" is set to "pre sync HO with timing advance".The operator defines a predefined timing advance when aphase 2 MS goes from the serving cell to this neighbor cellapproximately at the same place (railway, highway).
Value range : [0 to 35] (km)
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : Refer to parameter synchronized
Type : DP
Release : V10
priority Class 2
Description : Priority level of a TDMA frame.
Among the set of TDMA frames attached to the cell, onlythe one carrying the cell BCCH must be allotted the highestpriority [0].
At least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames related to a cell(refer to this entry in the Dictionary) must be successfullyconfigured for the cell to be working. They include theTDMA frame carrying the cell BCCH and those with thehighest priority(ies).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 415
If this is true when the cell is brought into service, then,the cell will be working. Otherwise, its operationalStatewill be "disabled" and its availabilityStatus will be"{dependency}".
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : transceiver
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
privateMmsOmuRef
Description : Pointer to the associated ’omu’ object instance for privateMMS, NULL for shared-mirrored MMS.
This attribute cannot be modified.
It is set by the MD-R at MMS creation.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : mms
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DP
Release : V13
privilegedCell Class 3
Description : Allows to segregate cells according to their mapping onAgprs PCM.
Value range : [no, yes]
Object : bts
Default value : no
Feature : Optimized Agprs cell allocation
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
416 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Release : V16
Notes : • This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC3000 only.
• This parameter is of class 3. No modification of its valueis taken into account by the BSC immediately and itdoes not trigger any re-configuration of Agprs.
probable cause
Description : To select messages according to the numerical value of theISO probableCause field.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
The following table indicates the messages displayedaccording to the probable cause.
Alarm type Probable cause Value
Communications Execution failure of a MD request by the BSCCall establishment errorCommunication protocol error
Communication subsystem failureCorrupt dataDegraded signal
DTE-DCE interface errorLAN errorLocal node transmission error
Loss of frameLoss of signalReceive failure
Remote node transmission errorTransmit failure
6245
6912
132527
282940
4254
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 417
Alarm type Probable cause Value
Environmental External alarm loopEnclosure door openFire detected
Heating, ventilation, or cooling systemMaterial supply exhausted
581418
2130
Equipment Equipment absentEquipment malfunctionHeating, ventilation, or cooling system problem
Input/output device errorInput device errorMaterial supply exhausted
Power problemProcessor problemReceive failure
Receiver failureStorage capacity problemTemperature unacceptable
Timing problemTransmit failureTransmitter failure
601521
232430
353740
414950
525455
ProcessingError Cause of restart or switchoverNo responseApplication subsystem failure
Configuration or customization errorCorrupt dataFile error
Out of memoryQueue size exceededSoftware error
Software program abnormally terminatedSoftware program errorStorage capacity problem
59612
7917
323946
474849
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
418 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Alarm type Probable cause Value
Underlying resource unavailableVersion mismatch
5657
QualityOfService ShutdownCongestionPerformance degraded
Queue size exceededResource at or nearing capacityResponse time excessive
Retransmission rate excessive
Threshold crossed
63834
394344
4551
Value range : [1 to 150]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
processor identity
Description : This parameter is composed of the bsc equipment nameand the equipment processor number parameters. Referto these entries in the Dictionary.
Object : mdWarning (create)
Type : DP
Release : V11
Note : During the command "create mdWarning", the operator candefine either "equipment identity" or "processor identity",but not both.
processorLoadSupConf Class 3
Description : Threshold used in the load control algorithm by the BSC.
Note : This parameter is significant only for BSC 12000HC.
Value range : [0] The only accepted value is 0 (outOfRangeError).
Object : bsc
Feature : BSC overload management (FM877 - V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
P 419
Remark : C1400, C1506, C1803, C1834, and C1835 counters allowto check BSC overload problems.
This parameter was used in the previous releases only to control the load onthe BSC CPU boards.
Note : This parameter is valid for BSC 12000HC only.
pwciHrequave Class 3
Description : Cell Tiering Mode parameter.
This is the averaging window size for powerControl.
This attribute allows to configure the cellTieringConfiguration parameter at bts level.
Note : Cell Tiering mode must be activated.
Value range : [0 to 16]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 8
Type : DP
Description: The MS searches for UMTScells if level is above orbelow the threshold when theserving BCCH frequency ispart of the BA_List
Value range: 0:"<-98 dBm"
1: “< -94 dBm”
2: “< -90 dBm”
3: “< -86 dBm”
QsearchC < -XX dBm: theHO towards the UMTS canbe done only if the RxLevfrom the serving cell is below-XX.
4: “< -82 dBm”
5: “< -78 dBm”
6: “< -74 dBm”
7: “always”
8: “> -78 dBm”
9: “> -74 dBm”
QsearchC > -XX dBm: theHO towards the UMTS canbe done only if the RxLevfrom the serving cell is above-XX.
10: “> -70 dBm”
11: “> -66 dBm”
12: “> -62 dBm”
13: “> -58 dBm”
"values different from"always" and "never" areuseful only if serving BCCH ispart of BA_List in SI5"
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
420 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
14: “> -54 dBm”
15: “never”
Object: handoverControl
Default value: 15
Type: DP
Checks:
Release: V17
Notes: This parameter is availableonly for BSC 3000.
RrACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3
Description : The number of RACH access on which RACHmeasurements are performed (2000 is the only valueaccepted).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"2000".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3
Description : Maximum interference level on free radio channels, belowwhich are arranged in groups of priority allocation.
The information is used to allocate free channels withthe lowest interference level. The levels depend on thethresholdInterference attribute value defined for the cell.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
The BSC distributes free radio channels among twogroups:
• The first group contains the list of channels with ameasured averaged interference level equal to or lowerthan the defined level.
• The second group contains the list of channels with ameasured averaged interference level higher than the
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 421
defined level, and recently released channels for whichno measurement is available.
Four resource pools are defined for each SDCCH or TCHtype of channel:
• low interference level radio channels that are authorizedto hop
• low interference level radio channels not authorized tohop
• high interference level radio channels authorized to hop
• high interference level radio channels not authorized tohopChannels are allocated cyclically inside each pool.
Value range : [0 to 4]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Release : V8
radioAllocator Class 2
Description : Radio allocator type used in the cell.
Value range : [voice + dataCircuit, voice + dataCircuit + packetData]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 - V12)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
422 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : voice + dataCircuit
Type : DP
Release : V12
radioLinkTimeOut Class 3
Description : Maximum value of the counter (S) associated with thedownlink SACCH messages, beyond which the radio link iscut off. It is lower than or equal to t3109.
Mobiles comply with system operating conditions whenthe counter (S) is assigned a value lower than or equal tot3109.
If the receiver is unable to decode a downlink SACCHmessage (BTS-to-MS direction), the counter is decreasedby 1. If the message is received, the counter is increasedby 2. When the counter goes down to zero, the radio link isdeclared "faulty".
Value range : [4 to 64, by steps of 4] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms onTCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 20 SACCH
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 423
Checks : • [C/M]:radioLinkTimeOut ≤ t3109.
Notes : • The rlf1 attribute serves the same goal on the uplink.
• The system does not check consistent values of the twoattributes.
radioSiteMask Class 2
Description : Definition of the PCM time slots used by a site. TS n ismasked when bit n is set to 0, it is used when bit n is set to1 in the binary field.The radio site mask is immediately displayed in thehexadecimal field just below. The radio site mask is setusing the hexadecimal field as well as the binary field.
The mask defines the time slots used in each PCMlink allotted to a given radio site. Time slot allocation ismanaged by the BSC; a time slot available on a site isused either by a radio time slot for traffic purposes or by aLAPD link which does not carry the link with the site BCFfor signaling.
A PCM E1 link carries thirty-two time slots. TS 0 (leastsignificant bit) is always masked since it cannot be used.The radioSiteMask of a site using E1 links is as follows:
radioSiteMask = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0| | | | |TS31 23 15 7 TS0
A PCM T1 link carries twenty-four time slots. TheradioSiteMask of a site using T1 links is as follows:
radioSiteMask = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX| |TS24 TS1
Sites that do not share PCM links are assigned the full set.
In a BTS chain, the scheduled time slots of each radio sitemust be allotted in ascending order (TS1, TS2, TS3, etc.),beginning with the site closest to the BSC. Refer to thepcmTimeSlotNumber entry.
Value range : [32-bit mask]
Object : btsSiteManager
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
424 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
• [C/M]:TS 0 cannot be assigned.
• [C/M]:If PCM T1 links are used, TSs 25 to 31 cannotbe assigned.
• [C/M]:The radioSiteMask of all sites sharing a samePCM link (drop and insert connections) aredissociated.
Checks :
• [M]:The scheduled time slot of the radio site(pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked [0] since itcannot be used.
radioSiteMaskOffset Class 2
Description : The radioSiteMaskOffset parameter provides thede-correlation of the radio site mask used on BTS sitewith the radio site mask used on BSC side (refer to theradioSiteMask entry).
On BTS side, the mask is the result of a calculation usingthe radioSiteMask value and the radioSiteMaskOffsetparameter.
According to the radioSiteMaskOffset value (named sbelow), the radio site mask on BTS side (RSMbts) is:
• s = 0: RSMbts and RSMbsc are identical
• s > 0: If RSMbsc is [TSm..TSn] then RSMbts is[TSm-s..TSn-s]
• s < 0: If RSMbsc is [TSm..TSn] then RSMbts is[TSm+|s|..TSn+|s|]
Example 1: if RSMbsc is [TS31..TS28] and s = +26, thenRSMbts is [TS05..TS02].
Example 2: if RSMbsc is [TS05..TS02] and s = -19, thenRSMbts is [TS24..TS21].
Value range : Int [-28 to 28]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 425
• [C/M]:If the radioSiteMaskOffset is positive, thelowest TS number of the resultant BTS radiosite mask must be greater than or equal to 1.
• [C/M]:If the radioSiteMaskOffset is negative, thegreatest TS number of the resultant BTS radiosite mask must be lower than or equal to 31(case of an E1 PCM) or to 24 (case of a T1PCM).
Checks :
• [C/M]:the radioSiteMaskOffset is in the range [-28,+28] (case of an E1 PCM) or in the range [-21,+21] (case of a T1 PCM).
Release : V14
radioSiteName
Description : Reference name of a multiple site object on the OMC-R. Itbegins with a letter and is case sensitive.
The name of a multiple site can be used in all MMIcommands to reference the multiple site on the OMC-R.
Value range : [30 characters max.]
Object : multiple site
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a multiple site is unique to theOMC-R.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
The valid symbols are:
- letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z
- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
- minus sign: -
- undescore: _
- space
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
426 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
radResSupBusyTimer Class 3
Description : Maximum time that SDCCH or TCH can be continuouslyoccupied without generating an alarm.
Value range : [1 to 18] hours
Object : bsc
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Release : V8
radResSupervision Class 3
Description : Indicates whether radio resources are controlled at the celllevel (both busy resources and free resources).
When no control is performed, no alarm related to the useor non use of an SDCCH or TCH is generated. Refer to theradResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer entriesin the Dictionary.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : true
Type : DP
Notes : • radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer can beset automatically by the OMC-R calendar function.
• The activation of this feature does not induce anysignaling or CPU overload. Only the BSS-OMC-R linkis overloaded at a rate of radResSupBusyTimer orradResSupFreeTimer.
Release : V8
radResSupFreeTimer Class 3
Description : Maximum time an SDCCH or TCH can be continuously freewithout generating an alarm.
Value range : [1 to 18] hours
Object : bsc
Default value : 18
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 427
range
Description : Time period chosen over which the counter values areread.
Value range : [5 min / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min / 2 hours]
Object : report template
Notes : • The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60min, 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• The authorized values for ORT and PerformanceMonitor observation types are 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60min, and 2 hours.
Type : DP
reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
record reference
Description : Identifier of a user call as recorded in a call monitoring datafile.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : Call monitoring - Display (SDO)
Type : DP
• [A]:It is in the range [0 to 63].
• [A]:This parameter is mandatory when auser call report (Events option) or a radiomeasurements report (Measurements option)is requested.
Checks :
• [A]:It can be undefined when a synthesis report(Synthesis option) is requested. In thatcase, a summary of all user recorded calls isdisplayed.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
428 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
redundantPcmNumber
Description : Number of the redundant PCM link defined on BSC end.
This dynamic attribute is displayed provided thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attributevalue is "true".
Value range : [0 to 47]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DD
Remark : A redundant link is not normally used for traffic or signallingconnections.
redundantPcmPresence Class 2
Description : Presence of a redundant PCM link on a radio site
Value range : [true / false]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:If the attribute value is "true", the objectbscSitePcmList attribute includes two items,one identifies the PCM active link, and theother identifies the PCM redundant link.
refPeriod
Description : Reference counting period when a counter is involved.
Value range : [0 to 345600] seconds
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criteria.
Type : DP
refPeriod
Description : Reference counting period used by the "excessiveAnomalyRate" function.
This attribute is not used by the detection "outOfRangeCounter" function. In that case, the reference period is set asfollows:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 429
• For cumulative counters, the thresholds define totalvalues not to be reached during a one minute referenceperiod.
• For load or value counters, the thresholds definemaximum or minimum average values not to bereached during a 1 minute reference period, except forthe PCM unavailability counters for which they definetotal values not to be reached during the referenceobservation period.
The BSS observation counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646] minutes
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate"
Type : DP
relatedSoftwares
Description : This attribute identifies the list of software identifiedseparately. This list represents the units of software readyfor equipment use. This attribute is allocated by the MD-Rat object creation. This attribute is not modified by theManager.
Value range : [0 to 10]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Release : V13
relay
Description : Identifier of a BSS alarm relay which activates an externalalarm loop when the counter of immediate unacknowledgedalarms shows a nonzero value for one of the BSSsassigned to the relay.
BSS relays transfer the state of the associated BSSimmediate action alarm counters to remote sites.
A BSS relay is associated with several BSCs. Conversely,a BSC is simultaneously assigned to several relays.
Value range : [4 to 64]
Object : relay
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
430 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : Id
Reminder : OMC-R relays are used to transfer the state of systemalarm counters to remote sites and are not managed byusers.
remoteSsuState
Description : State of the remote subsystem (BSSAP)
Value range : [inService / outOfService]
• inService .................The MSC BSSAP service isworking for the BSC.
• outOfService .....The MSC BSSAP service is notworking.
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DD
repetition rate
Description : Periodicity of short message broadcasting.
Each concerned BSC repeatedly sends the selected shortmessage to the BTSs covering the selected cells at therepetition rate defined by the user.
Each BTS repeatedly broadcasts the short message to allmobiles under its control, using the same repetition rate.
Value range : [2 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 16 min./ 32 min.]
Object : short message - Start broadcast
Type : DP
report range
Description : Time period over which the counter values are read.
Value range : [5 min. / 15 min. / 30 min. / 60 min. / 2 hours / 6 hours / 12hours / 24 hours]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 431
Notes : • The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60min., 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.
• The authorized values for ORT and PerformanceMonitor observation types are 5 min., 15 min., 30 min.,60 min., and 2 hours.
Release : V11
report template
Description : Identifier of the report template object defined with regardto the bsc object.
Value range : [30 characters max.]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
report type
Description : A type of observation report.
[single observed instance / several observed instance]
• single observed instance ........several observedcounters on a singleobject
Value range :
• several observed instance .......single counterobserved on severalobjects
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
reportObjLevel
Description : Level of the report to edit.
Fill in only when editing a permanent bsc report. Examples:"bsc = all" or "bsc = 1 & bsc = 2".
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / bsc / bts / transceiverZone /hardwareTcu3G]
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:If specific objects are entered, they all belongto the same class.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
432 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
reportTypeMeas Class 2
Description : Attribute reserved for future use.
Value range : disabled, enabled
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V15
resetCircuitRepeat Class 1
Description : Whether the RESET CIRCUIT message is repeated onbssMap19 timer elapse if the acknowledgment messagewas not received from the MSC (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is "false".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Release : V8
retransDuration Class 2
Description : Maximum number of occurrences of a same pagingsub-group separating the first and last transmissions of thesame paging message.
Value range : [0 to 22]
Object : bts
Default value : 10
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans +1) x nbOfRepeat
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 433
retry on error
Description : Whether commands are rerun when the system detects anapplication error.
This parameter has priority over the on error parameter.When its value is "True", the error command is rerun; whenit is "False", the on error parameter is analyzed.
The errors involved, the time between reruns, andthe maximum number of reruns are defined in staticconfiguration data.
Value range : [true / false] (default is False)
Object : commandFile - Run
Type : DP
rlf1 Class 2
Description : Value to compute the initial and maximum value of the (CT)counter used in the BTS radio link control algorithm.
The FP (FrameProcessor) in the BTS runs the followingalgorithm to monitor the uplink SACCHs (MS-to-BTSdirection):
• The FP sets the CT counter to 0 at channel activation.
• On each correct SACCH, the following occurs:
— if (CT=0) then CT=4*rlf1 + 4 else CT=min (4*rlf1 +4, CT+rlf2)
• On each incorrect SACCH, the following occurs:
— CT = max(0, CT-rlf3)
— When CT reaches 0, a CONNECTION FAILUREINDICATION message is sent to the BSC everyT3115 until a Deactivate SACCH or RF CHANNELRELEASE message is received.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : bts
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
434 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Notes : • The radioLinkTimeOut attribute serves the same goalon the downlink.
• The system does not check that the values of the twoattributes are consistent.
Release : V8
rlf2 Class 2
Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is increased by theradio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH isdecoded.
Refer to the rlf1 entry.
Value range : [1 to 4] SACCH frames
Object : bts
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Release : V8
rlf3 Class 2
Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is decreased by theradio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is notdecoded.
Refer to the rlf1 entry.
Value range : [1 to 4] SACCH frames
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 435
rLCPolling Class 3
Description : Configuring the polling frequency for DL TBF.
Value range : [0 to 2]
• 0 selects the original polling frequency of 240 ms anddeactivates this feature
• 1 selects a polling frequency which doubles the originalto every 120 ms (during the first 240 ms, then addingone opportunity to setup a UL TBF)
• 2 selects a polling frequency which quadruples theoriginal to every 60 ms (during the first 240 ms, thenadding three opportunities to setup a UL TBF)
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V15
rmpConfState
Description : State of radio measurement processing in the TDMA frame.
Value range : [configured / not configured / not significant]
• configured: The CURRENT CELL PARAMETER,NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER (and EXTENDEDNEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER when more thansixteen defined neighbor cells) messages have beenacknowledged by the BTS.
• not configured: The messages have not beenacknowledged by the BTS. If a CURRENT CELLPARAMETER message is not acknowledged, thenotification 1258 "Non response during the configurationof the remote L1M" is issued. If a NEIGHBOUR CELLPARAMETER or EXTENDED NEIGHBOUR CELLPARAMETER message is not acknowledged, thenotification 1259 "Negative acknowledgement of adistant L1M command" is issued.
• not significant: The BTS has not sent the messages tothe BSC (either the TDMA frame is not working or SYSINFO was not acknowledged).
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
436 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3
Description : MS-to-BTS distance beyond which mobile access requeststo a cell are refused.
It defines the maximum timing advance value accepted.
The effective timing advance value is broadcast in theCHANNEL REQUIRED message sent by the BTS to theBSC. If it is above the user defined threshold, the BSCignores the request.
Value range : [2 to 135] km (non-extended mode)[2 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : bts
Default value : 35
Type : DP
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 35 km if the btsobject extended cell attribute is "false".
Checks :
• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is"true".
Release : V8
Note : The number of access requests that are refused forthat reason is accounted by the BSC (permanent bscobservation counter 1161/6) and fed back to the OMC-R.
routingArea Class 2
Description : GPRS Cell Global Identifier (locationAreaCode +cellIdentity + routingArea).
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 0
Release : V12
Note : A Routing Area is necessarily included in a Location Area.
rowPosition
Description : Position number which identifies the position within a row.
Value range : String from 1 to 4 characters
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 437
Object : transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardwaretranscoder 3G
Type : DP
runCallClear Class 3
Description : Number of "Measurement Results" messages receivedbefore the call clearing algorithm in a cell is triggered.
Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 16
runHandOver Class 3
Description : Number of "Measurement Results" messages receivedbefore the handover algorithm in a cell is triggered.
Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
runPwrControl Class 3
Description : Number of "Measurement Results" messages receivedbefore the power control algorithm in a cell is triggered.
Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 4
Type : DP
rxLevAccessMin Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles forbeing granted access to a cell. The information is sent toMS prior to registering.
As an example, a threshold level of -104 dB correspondsto an acceptable BER of approximately 10-2 (minimumrecommended value).
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
438 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Default value : less than -110 dB
Type : DP
rxLevDLIH Class 3
Description : Maximum interference level in BTS-to-MS direction, beyondwhich an intra-cell handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -85 to -84 dB
Type : DP
rxLevDLPBGT Class 3
Description : Downlink signal strength threshold above which handoversfor power budget are inhibited.
In certain issues, the operator may prevent handover forpower budget in case of the received level in the servingcell is good enough that a handover does not improve thesituation.
This parameter shall be set such as rxLevDLPBGT ≥lRxLevDLH.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : more than -48
Type : DP
Notes : • This parameter is disabled by setting it to the defaultvalue: more than -48 (dB).
• This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture. It is disabled for DCU2architecture.
Release : V11
Description: Downlink signal strength threshold above whichhandovers to UTRAN for power budget are inhibited
Value range: <-110 ... >-48 dBm
Object: adjacentCellUTRAN
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 439
Default value: 63 (on MOD), “>-48” (on MMI)�
Type: DP
Checks:
Release: V17
Note: This parameter is available only for BSC 3000.
rxLevHreqave Class 3
Description : Number of signal strength measurements performed on aserving cell, used to compute arithmetic strength averagesin handover and power control algorithms.
Value range : [1 to 10] number of measurement results
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 8
Type : DP
rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3
Description : Number of measurement reports on current cell for signalstrength arithmetic average for early handover mechanism.
Refer to the rxLevHreqave entry in the Dictionary. Thisparameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg and rxNCellHreqaveBeg use.
Value range : [1 to 10]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Notes : • This parameter is set such as rxLevHreqaveBeg ≤rxLevHreqave.
• This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture.
Release : V11
rxLevHreqt Class 3
Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account tocompute the weighted average signal strength in handoverand power control algorithms. Each is calculated fromrxLevHreqave signal strength measurements on a servingcell.
Value range : [1 to 16]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
440 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:It is equal to the number of weights inrxLevWtsList (refer to this entry in theDictionary).
rxLevMinCell Class 3
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by MS for beinggranted access to a neighbor cell.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : -95 to -94 dB (GSM 900 or 850), -93 to -92 (GSM 1800 or1900)
Type : DP
Description: Minimum signal strength level received by MS for beinggranted access to an UMTS neighbour cell
Value range: <-110...>-48
Object: adjacentCellUTRAN
Default value: 63 (on MOD), “>-48” (on MMI)
Type: DP
Checks:
Release: V17
Note: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg Class 3
Description : Number of measurement results used in early handoveralgorithm to compute the average neighboring signalstrength.
Refer to the rxNCellHreqave entry in this dictionary.This parameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg andrxLevHreqaveBeg use.
Value range : Int [1 to 10]
Object : handoverControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 441
rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation Class 3
Description : Defines the frequency of RxLev and RxQual distribution.This is not used in this version.
Only values 0, 1 and 2 are valid.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range : Int [0 to 128]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V14
rxLevULIH Class 3
Description : The maximum interference level in MS-to-BTS direction,beyond which an intra-cell handover is triggered.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48]dB, without Uplink Mapping Feature activated. [less than-117, ... , more than -42] dB, when the Uplink MappingFeature is used.
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Uplink Mapping (TF 876)
Default value : -85 to -84 dB
Type : DP
rxLevWtsList Class 3
Description : Values of weights used for signal strength weighedaverage.
The L1M function first calculates rxLevHreqave arithmeticaverages from raw measurements, and balancesrxLevHreqt averages among those with the weightsdefined in rxLevWtsList.
Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight inthe list. Weight/average associations are set in the orderthe weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmeticaverage is always partnered with the first weight in the list.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
442 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Super-average = [ (averagei x weighti)] / 100,i = 1 to rxLevHreqt
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 100
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The number of weights in the list is equal torxLevHreqt and their sum equals 100.
rxNCellHreqave Class 3
Description : Number of measurement results used in the Power Budgetalgorithm to compute the average neighboring signalstrength.
No weighted average is computed for this category ofmeasurement.
Value range : [1 to 10] number of measurement results
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 8
Type : DP
rxQualAveBeg Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the number of quality measures usedby the power control mechanism, in case of hopping TS orfast MS.
This attribute is modified if the ’handOverControl’ objectinstance is unlocked.
Value range : [1 to 10]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
R 443
rxQualDLIH Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction for intracellhandover, above which a handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %
Type : DP
Release : V12
rxQualHreqave Class 3
Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account tocompute the weighted average bit error rate in handoverand power control algorithms. Each is calculated fromrxQualHreqave bit error rate (BER) measurements on aradio link.
Value range : [1 to 16]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1
Type : DP
rxQualHreqt Class 3
Description : Number of bit error rate measurements performed ona radio link, used to compute arithmetic bit error rateaverages in handover and power control algorithms.
Value range : [1 to 10] number of measurement results
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 8
Type : DP
rxQualULIH Class 3
Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction for intracellhandover, above which a handover may be triggered.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
444 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
rxQualThresholdDistribution Class 3
Description : RxQual threshold for taking into account measurements inRxLev and Interf matrix distributions.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range : [inferiorTo02 / between02and04 / between04and08 /between08and16 / between16and32 / between32and64 /between64and128 / superiorTo128]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V14
rxQualWtsList Class 3
Description : List of up to sixteen weights used to compute the averagebit error rate on a radio link.
The L1M function calculates rxQualHreqave arithmeticaverages from raw measurements, and balancesrxQualHreqt averages among those with the weightsdefined in rxQualWtsList.
Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight inthe list. Weight/average associations are set in the orderthe weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmeticaverage is always partnered with the first weight in the list.
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 100
Type : DP
SsIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition
Description : Gives the TMU and port number bearing the SS7signalling.
Value range : [tmuPos / hardwareSlotPositionNMC / portNumber]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DD
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 445
sIkATerResource
Description : Gives the Ater PCM and TS bearing SS7 signalling.
Value range : pcmRef [0 to 167]ts [1 to 31]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DD
Release : V14
sacchPowerOffset Class 2
Description : Describes the power offset that applies to SACCH frames
Value range : [0..6] dB; step = 2
Object : bts
Type : DP
Feature : Tx power offset for signalling channels
Default value : 0 (no power offset)
Notes : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.
Release : V16
sacchPowerOffsetSelection Class 2
Description : Describes the CODEC selection for applying a power offseton SACCH messages.
Value range : [NULL / FR 4.75 kbps / FR 5.9 and lower / FR 6.7 andlower]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Feature : Tx power offset for signalling channels
Default value : NULL (no power offset for SACCH)
Note : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.
Release : V16
sapi
Description : The Service Access Point Indicator defining the type ofLAPD link use.
Value range : [RSL / OML]
Object : lapdLink
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
446 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
scannerId
Description : The identifier of the mdScanner object describing theobservation.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
"0" identifies the OMC-R permanent manager observation.For a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanentobservation, this parameter must match the referencenumber of an mdScanner object.
Object : Display xxx report
Type DP
Checks : • [A]:If the request concerns a BSS observation orthe OMC-R agent permanent observation, therelated mdScanner object is created.
scannerId
Description : The identifier of the mdScanner object describing theobservation.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
"0" identifies the OMC-R permanent manager observation.For a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanentobservation, this parameter must match the referencenumber of an mdScanner object.
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:If the request concerns a BSS observation orthe OMC-R agent permanent observation, therelated mdScanner object is created.
sCCPRoutingIndicator
Description : Indicated which route the SCCP takes.
Value range : [international/national]
Object : signallingPoint
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Description: Scrambling code of the UMTS cell
Value range: 0...511
Object: adjacentCellUTRAN
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 447
Default value: 0
Type: DP
Release: V17
• [C/M/D]:fDDARFCN or scramblingCodecan’t be changed if InterferenceMatrix feature is activated on thebts
Note: This parameter is onlyavailable for the BSC3000.
securedLoopActivation Class 2
Description : Whether the secured loop is disabled or enabled. Whenenabled and in case of a network transmission failure,signalling links are automatically switched to the redundantpath and ongoing calls are kept up.
Value range : [Disabled, Enabled]
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : Disabled
Feature : GSM-R V15. Customer specific
Type : DP
Release : V15
selfAdaptActivation Class 3
Description : This attribute specifies if the automatic handover adaptationmechanism is enabled/disabled.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute is modified only if the ’bts’ object instance isunlocked.
Value range : [Enabled/Disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : Disabled
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
448 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
selfTuningObs Class 3
Description : BTS mode sending the PwCI distribution on the Abisinterface. This attribute allows the configuration ofCellTieringConfiguration at BTS level.
Note : CellTiering mode must be activated.
Value range : [pwCi distribution not sent,pwCi distribution sent after gathering,one pwCi distribution sent per hour]
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
Note : PWCI distribution may be gathered and sent onto the Abisinterface independently of tiering activation.
sequenceNumber
Description : Tracing the record identification number.
Object : traceFileReady
Type : DP
serial number
Description : Three fields (geographical scope, message code, updatenumber) identify a particular message from the source andtype indicated by the Message Identifier are altered everytime a given Message Identifier is changed.
Value range : [geographical scope, message code, update number]
• geographical scope ..[immediate cell widenormal PLMN widenormal location area widenormal cell wide]
• message code .....[0 to 1023]
differentiate messages from same source and type (sameMessage Identifier)
• update number ....[0 to 15]
differentiate older and newer versions of the samemessage
Object : short message - Display broadcast characteristics
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 449
serial number
Description : Three fields (geographical scope, message code, updatenumber) identify a particular message from the source andtype indicated by the Message Identifier are altered everytime a given Message Identifier is changed.
Value range : [geographical scope, message code, update number]
• geographical scope ..[immediate cell widenormal PLMN widenormal location area widenormal cell wide]
• message code .....[0 to 1023]
differentiate messages from same source and type (sameMessage Identifier)
• update number ....[0 to 15]
differentiate older and newer versions of the samemessage
Object : short message - Display broadcast characteristics
Type : DP
servingFactorOffset Class 3
Description : This attribute defines the offset linked to the serving cell,used to decrease the HO margin, in some specific cases.
This attribute is only modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.
Value range : [-63 to 63] dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : -2
Type : DP
Release : V14
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.
session context saving mode
Description : Session context saving mode.
Value range : [automatic when logout / on user request]
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Release : V10
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
450 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
sGSNRelease Class 3
Description : The parameter is set to ’0’ when the SGSN supports rel’98or older and set to ’1’ when the SGSN supports rel’99.
Value range : "SGSN is rel’98 or older" (SGSNR = ’0’)"SGSN is rel’99 onwards" (SGSNR = ’1’)
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : EDGE Traffic Management (20231)
Type : DP
Release : V15
shelfNumber
Description : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf.
Value range : [0 to 1]
Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu,trm,
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
short message
Description : An identifier (name) of a short message on the OMC-R.
A message name identifies the short message on theOMC-R; it is not relayed to the BSC during broadcasting. Itcan be changed by the Rename command (see the newname entry in the Dictionary).
Setting a short message characteristics does not affectthe current broadcast of the message. The change will beeffective when a new broadcast command is launched.
A short message broadcasting is identified on the OMC-Rby a unique serial number assigned by the systemwhen broadcasting is initiated (refer to this entry in theDictionary).
Value range : [case sensitive, 20 characters max.]
Object : short message
Type : Id
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 451
Checks : • C]:The name of a short message is unique to theOMC-R.
• [M]:The short message is created.
• [D]:The short message is not being broadcast.
sicBoardsInt
Description : The state of the BSC chain SIC boards. Each board isidentified by its type [SICD / SICX / CCS7], along a numberin the type.
Value range : [working / fault]
• working ..........The SIC board was correctlyinitialized.
• fault ............An error has been detected onthe board.
The number of SICX, SICD, and CCS7 boards in aBSC depends on its hardware architecture. Refer to thebscType entry in the Dictionary.
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
signallingLinkId
Description : Identifier of a signallingLink object defined with regard to asignallingLinkSet object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : signallingLink
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The number of signaling links controlled by aBSC is limited to maxSigLPerSigLS (staticconfiguration data).
• [C]:The maximum number of signallingLinkobjects for Lb interface is 2.
• [C/M]:The referenced pcmCircuit object(pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interfaceand depends on the same transcoder object(transcoderId) as the signallingLink object.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
452 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M]:The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitIdand timeSlotNumber) is not already assignedto a signallingLink or xtp object dependent onthe same transcoder object, and the time slotis not mapped on the TS used by the OMCchannel on the Ater interface.
• [C/M]:If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in therange [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link orin the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1link. Since the last four time slots of that linkare not mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the signallingLink object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No mdScanner object refers to thesignallingLink object (no observation isrunning on that object).
signallingLinkResState
Value range : [blocked / inhibited / inhibitedLocal / inhibitedDistant / inhibitedLocalDistant / inhibitedBlocked / notInhibitedNotBlocked]
• inhibited .............state enforced by a userSetInhibit command
• inhibitedLocal .........state enforced by a user
• inhibitedDistant ........state enforced by the MSC
• inhibitedLocalDistant ..state enforced by a user andthe MSC
• blocked ..............state enforced by the MSCfollowing a loss of dialoguebetween MTP2 and MTP3
Object : signallingLink
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 453
signallingLinkSet
Description : Identifier of a signallingLinkSet object describing the route(not the linkset) between the BSC and MSC, or the BSCand SMLC.
Value range : [0 to 1] where signallingLinkSet[0] represents A interfaceand signallingLinkSet[1] represents Lb interface.
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The signallingLinkSet object is not created forthe parent signallingPoint object.
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:The application database of the related BSChas been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
signallingPoint
Description : Identifier of a signallingPoint object describing a BSC-MSClink on the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : signallingPoint
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The signallingPoint object is not created for theparent bsc object.
• [C]:The software object related to the parent bscobject is created.
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:The application database of the related BSChas been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
signallingPointType
Description : Whether the BSC-MSC link acts as an STP (SignalingTransfer Point).
Value range : [STP / noSTP (only value accepted)]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : noSTP
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
454 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"noSTP".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
signallingTerminalNumber Class 2
Description : The number of the CCS7 port used by an SS7 channel inthe BSC = 2 x number of the mother CCS7 board [0 to 1] +port number [0 to 1].
Value range : [0 to 1] (BSC 6000 type 1-2),[0 to 3] (BSC 6000 types 3-5),[0 to 5] (BSC 12000HC).
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The port number is one-of-a-kind to the BSC(a CCS7 port controls one and only one SS7link).
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
sigPowerOverboost Class 3
Description : Reserved for future use.
Value range : [0dB to 1.6dB]
Object : bts
Default value : 0dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:sigPowerOverboost cannot be set to 1.6because bsPowerControl is not enabled or btsis not a BTS18000 or is not operating in 1900MHz frequency band
Release : V16
sigPReserved2 Class 3
Description : This attribute is reserved for future use.
Value range : [-32768 to 32767]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 455
site
Description : Name that identifies the site.
Value range : String [1 to 16 characters]
Object : transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardwaretranscoder 3G
Type : DD
siteGsmFctList Class 2
Description : List of up to 14 elements identifying the GSM functionsconfigured in a site BCF.
Value range : [entityMgt / download / siteMgt / abisSig / abisTraf / rfTrans/ rfRecep / cellMgt / fhMgt / tdmaMgt / tsMgt / gsmTime /car0Fil / freqMgt]
Routing mode
The routing mode of the messages handled by the GSMfunctions, enabling the Abis interface to identify the GSMentity to which the messages are sent, and the maximumresponse time of each GSM function summarized in thefollowing table.
GSM function Routing modeResponse
time
Withoutcentralized
O&M
With centralized
O&M
GSM entity Management relative tei bcf 10 seconds
downloading relative tei relative tei 32 seconds
site Management relative tei bcf 120 seconds
abis SignallingManagement
bcf bcf 120 seconds
abis Traffic Management bcf bcf 120 seconds
radio frequencyTransmission
bcf bcf 120 seconds
radio frequency Reception not implemented none 0 second
cell Management bcf bcf 120 seconds
frequency hoppingManagement
relative tei bcf 30 seconds
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
456 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
GSM function Routing modeResponse
time
Withoutcentralized
O&M
With centralized
O&M
tdma Management relative tei bcf 30 seconds
time slot Management relative tei bcf 30 seconds
gsmTime not implemented none 0 second
carrier 0 Filling not implemented none 0 second
frequency Management bcf bcf 120 seconds
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : site Mgt/abisSig
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:Each function occurs once in the list.
• [C/M]:The "entityMgt", "download", "tdmaMgt", and"tsMgt" functions are included in the list.
• [C/M]:The "freqMgt" function is only allowed for aBTS using cavity coupling.
• [M]:The "fhMgt" function is included in the list ifbts objects dependent on the btsSiteManagerobject are authorized to hop (btsIsHopping).
Notes : • The GSM functions whose routing mode is "notimplemented" must not be included in the list. See thepreceding table.
• The GSM entities managing these GSM functions areBCF and TRX.
siteName
Description : Reference name of a radio site on the OMC-R. It beginswith a letter and is case sensitive.
The name of a site can be used in all MMI commands toreference the site on the OMC-R.
Value range : [30 characters max.]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 457
Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a site is unique to the OMC-R.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.The valid symbols are:
• letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z.
• digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
• minus sign: -
• undescore: _
• space:
slc Class 2
Description : Code of an SS7 channel. It is identical on BSC and MSCends.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The code of an SS7 link is one-of-a-kind to theBSC.
small to large zone HO priority Class 3
Description : External priority of inter-zone handovers from the innerzone to the outer zone in a concentric cell.
This attribute is defined if the associated bts objectdescribes a concentric cell.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 17
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes aconcentric cell.
Type : DP
Release : V9
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
458 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
smoke detector Class 2
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "smokedetector" in S4000 Oudoor, S4000 Smart or S8000Outdoor.
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V9
smsCB Class 3
Description : Whether broadcasting of short messages inunacknowledged mode is authorized in a cell.
Value range : [used / unused]
Object : bts
Default value : used
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The attribute value is "used" if thechannelType of one of the channelobjects dependent on the bts object is"bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH" .
Remark : Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of shortmessages are managed by two separate OMC-R functions.
When a short message broadcast is started, the presenceof a CBCH in the channelType of a channel objectdependent on a concerned bts object is checked.
However, the SMS-CB function is not aware of changesmade to that attribute.
Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from the configurationwill stop any short message broadcast in the concernedcell without the SMS-CB function knowing.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 459
software
Description : Identifier of a software object.
The software object class allows users to manage thesoftware releases of bsc objects (BSC), btsSiteManagerobjects (BCF), transceiverEquipment objects (TRX), andtranscoderBoard objects (TCB). Software objects aremanaged by the OMC-R "Software Management" function.
The software objects have four attributes: sWVersionBackUp, sWVersionFallback, sWVersionNew, andsWVersionRunning. They are managed by the systemaccording to the following user commands: Download,Activate new version, and Return to previous version.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : software
Type : Id
Checks : Checks common to all software objects:
• [C]:The software object is not created for theparent managed object.
• [C]:The sWVersionRunning attribute is defined(nonzero value).
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
Additional checks performed on the software-bsc object:
• [C]:The sWVersionRunning attribute matches thebscType of the bsc object.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the bsc object is locked.
• [D]:All objects dependent on the bsc object aredeleted.
Additional checks performed on the software-btsSiteManager object:
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe btsSiteManager object is locked.
• [D]:All objects dependent on the btsSiteManagerobject are deleted.
Additional check performed on the software-transceiverEquipment object:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
460 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked,the parent bts object is locked, and thetransceiverEquipment object is locked.
Additional check performed on the software-transcoderBoard object:
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe transcoderBoard object is locked.
softwareLabel
Description : This attribute is a comment about the related software.This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changesare notified to the Manager.
Value range : [1 to 80]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Release : V13
source indicator
Description : Select messages according to the source of the operation.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [resource operation / management operation / unknown]
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
specific problems
Description : Selecting messages according to a (cause, fault number)pair.
This parameter allows selection of a fault number with oneor more associated causes. Refer to these entries in theDictionary.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not selected.
Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 461
speechMode Class 3
Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel usemodes in the cell.
The "full rate" value refers to the standard algorithm.
The "enhanced full rate" value only applies when all theTCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards(refer to the version entry in the Dictionary).
Value range : list of [algoid]where:algoid id : full rate, enhanced,full rate, AMR full rate, AMR half rate
Object : bts
Default value : [full rate, enhanced full rate]
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The "full rate" value is mandatory; it must bedefined in the list.
• [C/M]:The "enhanced full rate" value is defined inthe list if at least one of the TCUs linked to theBSC is equipped with TCB2 boards.
Release : V8
speechMode Class 3
Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel usemodes on the A interface.
The "full rate" value refers to the standard algorithm.
The "enhanced full rate" value only applies when all theTCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards.
Value range : list of [algoid]where:algoid id: full rate, enhanced,full rate, AMR full rate, AMR half rate
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : [full rate, enhanced full rate]
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The "full rate" value is mandatory; it must bedefined in the list.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
462 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M]:The "enhanced full rate" value is defined inthe list if at least one of the TCUs linked to theBSC is equipped with TCB2 boards.
Release : V8
speechOnHoppingTs Class 3
Description : This attribute is reserved for future use.
Value range : [true, false]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : false
Type : DP
Release : V12
speechVersionAsscomp Class 1
Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in theASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Release : V12
speechVersionHoperf Class 1
Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or notin the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value :
Type : DP
Release : V12
speechVersionHoreq Class 1
Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used in theHANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages(Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 463
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Release : V12
speechVersionHorqd Class 1
Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in theHANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Release : V12
standard indicator AdjC Class 3
Description : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working.
Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs 1800 / pcs 1900 / R gsm /gsm850 / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / pcsgsm850 / gsm850pcs]
Object : adjacentCellHandover
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Default value : gsm
Type : DP
Release : V10
Note : "gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
standard indicator AdjC Class 3
Description : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working.
Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs 1800 / pcs 1900 / R gsm /gsm850 / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / pcsgsm850 / gsm850pcs]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Default value : gsm
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V10
Note : "gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
464 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
standardIndicator Class 2
Description : Type of network in which the cell is working.
From the value given to this attribute, the OMC-Rdetermines the network frequency band and thefrequencies used by all radio entities (cells and radio timeslots) in the related site.
Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm /gsmdcs / dcsgsm / gsm 850 / gsm850pcs / pcsgsm850 /gsm450 / gsm480 / gsm750 / egsmdcs / dcsegsm]
Object : bts
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)
Type : DP
Note : GSM 900 network (gsm)
The GSM 900 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide andincludes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [1 to124], which are 200 kHz apart:
• Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 890 to 915 MHz
• Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 935 to 960 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
• f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [1 to 124]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
EXTENDED GSM network (extended gsm)
The extended GSM frequency band is 2*35 MHz wide andincludes 174 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to124] and [975 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:
• Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 880 to 915 MHz
• Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 925 to 960 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 465
• f1 = 880.2 + 0.2x(N - 975) MHz where N = [975 to 1023]
• f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
Note : The extended GSM frequency band defined above is thedefinition of the ETSI.
GSM-R network (R gsm)
The GSM-R frequency band is 2*39 MHz wide andincludes 194 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to124] and [955 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:
• Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 876 to 915 MHz
• Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 921 to 960 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
• f1 = 876.2 + 0.2x(N - 955) MHz where N = [955 to 1023]
• f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
Note : The GSM-R frequency band defined hereabove is thedefinition of the ETSI.
GSM 1800 network (dcs1800)
The GSM 1800 frequency band is 2*75 MHz wide andincludes 374 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to885], which are 200 kHz apart:
• Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 1710 to 1785 MHz
• Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 1805 to 1880 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
466 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• f1 = 1710.2 + 0.2x(N - 512) MHz where N = [512 to 885]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
• f2 = f1 + 95 MHz
GSM 1900 network (pcs1900)
The GSM 1900 frequency band is 2*60 MHz wide andincludes 299 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to810], which are 200 kHz apart:
• Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 1850 to 1910 MHz
• Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 1930 to 1990 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
• f1 = 1850.2 + 0.2x(N - 512) MHz where N = [512 to 810]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
• f2 = f1 + 80 MHz
GSM 900 - GSM 1800 network (gsmdcs)
The primary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900Network paragraph).
The secondary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800Network paragraph).
GSM 1800 - GSM 900 network (dcsgsm)
The primary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800Network paragraph).
The secondary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900Network paragraph).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 467
Note : "gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
GSM 850
The GSM 850 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide andincludes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [128to 251],
• Uplink direction = 824 to 849 MHz
• Downlink direction = 869 to 894 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
• f1 = 824.2 + 0.2x(N - 128) MHz where N = [128 to 251]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
Release : V9
standbyStatus
Description : ISO State
Value range : [hotStandby / coldStandby / providingService]
Object : atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRm, trm,
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type DD
Release : V13
start date
Description : The date the first data is recorded in the log (default is thecurrent date).
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : System session log - Filter
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
468 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
start time
Description : Absolute time of first job run (default is the current date andtime).
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
If date matches the current date, set time to a value at leastone minute after the current time.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : job
Type : DP
start time
Description : Start of system log reading on the requested start date(default is 00:00).
Time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not selected.
Value range : [<time>]
Object : System session log - Filter
Type : DP
startAlarmFilter
Description : Condition for triggering an alarm when no counter isinvolved.
The following fields can be combined in the logicalexpression:
Parameter Notification type Operators
administrativeState state change =
availabilityStatus state change =
bsc equipment name alarm =
bsc model alarm =
cause alarm < = >
btsSiteManager model alarm =
bts equipment name alarm =
equipment processor number alarm < = >
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 469
Parameter Notification type Operators
faultNumber alarm < = >
operationalState state change =
perceived severity alarm =
postMortem alarm =
usageState state change =
The following logical operators can be used in the logicalexpression:
• & stands for the logical AND.
• | stands for the logical OR.
• ! stands for the logical NOT.
The "postMortem" field can take two values, either "beforeBSC restart" or "after BSC restart". They have the followingmeaning:
• before BSC restart means that the notification issued bythe BSC was received by the OMC-R agent without theBSC having restarted (nominal conditions).
• after BSC restart means that the notification wasissued by the BSC, then, the BSC was restarted beforethe OMC-R agent received the notification. Thesenotifications do not trigger alarms.
Value range : [logical expression]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if no counter is associated to the criterion.
Type : DP
startAlarmThreshold
Description : The maximum counting value in the reference periodwhen a start-of-alarm message is sent. The value must bechecked by users.
This attribute defines a maximum value read at the end ofthe defined refPeriod.
It must be greater than endAlarmThreshold.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
470 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R isrestarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate"
Type : DP
startAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh)counting value in the reference period, below/above whicha start of "lower threshold/upper threshold" alarm messageis sent. The value must be checked by users.
If thesholdType = "thresholdLow", this attribute defines aminimum value for a one minute reference period (or thecounter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters),below which a start of "lower threshold" alarm message issent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold "low".
If thesholdType = "thresholdHigh", this attribute defines amaximum value for a one minute reference period (or thecounter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters),above which a start of "upper threshold" alarm message issent. It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold "high".
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R isrestarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter"
Type : DP
Remark :
• The threshold limits depend on the associated counter.
• The BSS counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.
startCounterThreshold
Description : Minimum counting threshold when a counter is involved.
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : alarm criteria
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 471
Condition : To define when a counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
startTime
Description : Date and time the files were restored on the OMC-R agentdisks.
Value range : [<date> <time>]
Object : log - Display
Condition : This attribute is significant and displayed only when the logobject describes a log restored on the OMC-R agent disks.
Type : DP
startTime
Description : Date and time the temporary observation started.
This information is provided by the system and indicatesthe exact time when the observation counters are collectedfor the first time.
Value range : [<date> <time>]
Object : mdScanner - Display
Type : DI
stopTime
Description : Date and time the OMC-R agent will purge the restoredfiles.
Value range : [<date>, <time>]
Object : log - Display
Condition : This attribute is significant and displayed only when the logobject describes a log restored on the OMC-R agent disks.
Type : DP
stopTime
Description : Date and time the temporary observation will stop.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : mdScanner - Create temporary observation
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
472 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Checks : • [C]:stopTime - startTime > mdGranularityPeriodminutes
• [C]:stopTime - startTime < 1440 minutes (24hours)
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified. Stop theobservation if necessary by deleting themdScanner object and restart it by creating anew mdScanner object with the appropriateattributes.
subChanId
Description : AGCH subchannel number: Do not fill in when thechannelType of the radio time slot is "tchFull" or"mainBCCH".
Value range : [0 to 7] when channelType = "sDCCH" or "sdch8CBCH",[0 to 3] otherwise
Object : channel - Set channel state
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects areunlocked.
Reminder : A BCCH or a CBCH cannot be blocked.
subject
Description : Identifier (name) of a user message in the OMC-R.
It is displayed in the "Inter-user message manager" windowof the message addressees and allows them to identify themessage before reading.
Value range : [40 characters max.]
Object : user message
Type : Id
suffix
Description : Optional string of characters to add to the name of the callmonitoring data files when saved in the OMC-R.
When a suffix is defined, a call monitoring datafile transferred to the OMC-R by running theTransfer command is saved under the name"SDO_CM_BSCnnn_<suffix>.yyyymmdd ", where
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 473
"nnn" identifies the BSC hosting the data file (if bsc = 5,then nnn is read "005") and "yyyymmdd" is the file savingdate. See to NTP < 07 >.
Value range : [10 characters max.]
Object : Call monitoring - Transfer (SDO)
Type DP
summary
Description : Text explaining the goal of the command file.
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
suspendResumeActivation Class 3
Description : Enables or disables the Suspend/Resume feature.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]. The recommended value is "enabled".
Default value : disabled
Object : bsc
Feature : GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume
Type : DP
Notes : • When disabled:
• The Suspend is still performed.
• The Resume is performed through the Routing AreaUpdate message.
• The new value does not apply to ongoing calls. Itapplies to new calls only.
Release : V15
supportingTransceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of the TRX associated with the TDMA frame bythe BSC.
This dynamic attribute allows the user to know theTDMA-TRX/DRX association established by the BSC. It isdisplayed provided the transceiver object operationalStateis "enabled". Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
If the TRX/DRX is declared faulty because of a frequencyloss, the system takes the following actions:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
474 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• attempt to reconfigure the associated TDMA frame onthe redundant TRX/DRX
• if there is no redundant TRX/DRX, reconfiguration of theTDMA frame on another TRX/DRX if its priority is higherthan the priority of the TDMA frame currently configured
If the associated TDMA frame cannot be re-configured forsome reason, all frames that were using the frequency lostby the TRX/DRX will be disturbed.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Remark : Only BTSs using cavity coupling manage dynamicreconfiguration of hopping frequencies.
sw8kRm
Description : The 8k Subrate Timeswitch Ressource Module, which addssub-track switching capability to the Interface Node.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : sw8kRm
Type : Id
sw8kRmId
Description : Identifier of the ’sw8kRm’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : sw8kRm
Type : DP
Release : V13
sWVersionBackUp
Description : Reference number of the backup software release. It isidentical to sWVersionRunning.
Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 475
Object : software
Type : DP
sWVersionFallBack
Description : Reference number of the previous software release. It isupdated following a version change command.
Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.
This attribute is undefined when the object is created.
As a result of an Activate new version command, thesystem updates the sWVersionFallBack attribute with thereference of the software release previously running in therelated BSS entity.
As a result of a Return to previous version command, thesystem sets the sWVersionFallBack attribute undefined.
Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : software
Type : DP
sWVersionNew
Description : Reference number of the new software release. It isupdated following a download or version change command.
Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.
This attribute is undefined when the object is created.
As a result of an Activate new version command, thesystem sets the sWVersionNew attribute undefined.
As a result of a Download or Return to previous versioncommand, the system updates the sWVersionNewattribute with the reference of the software releasedownloaded or that was presently running in the relatedBSS entity.
Value range : [9 to 12] String
Object : software
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
476 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
sWVersionRunning Class 2
Description : Reference number of the software release currentlyrunning. It is defined by the user at object creation time andis updated following version change commands.
This parameter identifies the type and version of thesoftware currently running in the related BSS entity. Checkthe BSS delivery descriptor file to fill it in when creating thesoftware object.
As a result of an Activate new version or Return toprevious version command, the system updates thesWVersionRunning attribute with the reference of thesoftware release newly activated in the related BSS entity.
For more information on the reference number formats foreach type of BSS entity driven by software, refer to the"delivery" entry in this Dictionary.
Value range : String from 9 to 12 characters
Object : software
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The attribute is defined (nonzero value).
• [C]:The first three letters of the reference numbermatch the type of the managed object relatedto the software object.
• [C]:For a software-bsc object, the version numbercomplies with the bscType of the parent bscobject.
synchronized Class 3
Description : Whether the neighbor cell and the associated serving cellare synchronous, and is attached to the same BTS.
Value range : [not synchronized cells / synchronized cells / pre sync HOwith timing advance / pre sync HO, default timing advance]
• "not synchronized cells": the neighbor cell and theserving cell are not attached to the same BTS
• "synchronized cells": the neighbor cell and the servingcell are attached to the same BTS
• "pre sync HO with timing advance": the handoverprocedure between the neighbor cell and the servingcell is pre-synchronized with the GSM Real Time
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
S 477
Difference between the neighbor cell and the servingcell in the "HANDOVER COMMAND" message
• "pre sync HO, default timing advance": a pre-definedtiming advance is used in the pre-synchronizedhandover procedure between the serving cell and theneighbor cell. Refer to "preSynchroTimingAdvance"parameter.
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : not synchronized cells
Type : DP
synchronizing PCM
Description : Synchronizing PCM choice (on Ater interface).
Value range : [synchro mic 0, synchro mic 2, synchro mic 4, synchro mic6, synchro internal clock]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Release : V10
syntheticFaultNumber
Description : A synthetic fault number assigned to the alarm when acounter is involved.
Value range : [39500 to 39549]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define when a counter is associated to the criterion.
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The number is in the range [39500 to 39549].
systemInfoType2 Class 2
Description : Reserved for future use.
Value range : disabled/enabled
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V15
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
478 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
system state
Description : The state of the configurable BSC boards and state of thetraffic to the MSC.
Value range : The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:
• active - passive link [opened / closed]
• bsc ............. [simplex / duplex]
• chain ............ [active / passive]
• chain ............ [ready / not ready]
• ECI DDTI ALA SWM initialization [allowed / not allowed]
• reset MSCL ....... [in progress / not in progress]
• other chain ....... [ready / not ready]
Object : bsc - Display chain information
Type : DD
Tt3101 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the immediate assignmentprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on transmission of CHANNEL ACTIVATION by theBSC and canceled on receipt of ESTABLISH INDICATIONsent by the BTS.
Value range : [1 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 3
Type : DP
t3103 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the handover procedure. Usethe suggested system value.
It is set on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of either HANDOVERCOMPLETE or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by the MS(intra-bss handover), or CLEAR COMMAND sent by theMSC (inter-bss handover). At expiry of T3103, the channelis released.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3103 < bssMapT8)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 479
Object : bts
Default value : 5 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:t3103 < bssMapT8 (attribute of the parent bscobject)
t3107 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the assignment commandprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on transmission of ASSIGN COMMAND bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of either ASSIGNCOMPLETE or ASSIGN FAILURE sent by MS.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 10 seconds
Type : DP
t3109 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the SACCH deactivationprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on receipt of DEACTIVATE SACCHACKNOWLEDGE sent by the BTS and canceled onreceipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. If thetimer expires, an RF CHANNEL RELEASE message issent to the BTS and an RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK isexpected.
Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when thecounter (S) associated with SACCH messages is assigneda value below or equal to t3109.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3109 ≥ radioLinkTimeout)
Object : bts
Default value : 12 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:t3109 ≥ radioLinkTimeout
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
480 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
t3111 Class 3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the radio resource clearingprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by theBTS. On elapse, the BSC sends RF CHANNEL RELEASE.
Value range : [1 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 2 seconds (1 second in a GSM-R context)
Type : DP
t3122 Class 3
Description : Minimum time that mobiles must wait before issuing achannel allocation request when an immediate assignmenthas failed.
Value range : [0 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 10 seconds
Type : DP
t3168 Class 3
Description : This timer is used at the MS side to define when to stopwaiting for the PUAS message after sending either a PRRmessage or a Channel Request in a PDAN.
Value range : [0 (500 ms)1 (1000 ms)2 (1500 ms)3 (2000 ms)4 (2500 ms)5 (3000 ms)6 (3500 ms)7 (4000 ms)]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 481
t3172 Class 3
Description : Value of the timer started by the mobile on reception of aPacket Access Reject message (in seconds)
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)
Default value : 20
Type : DP
Release : V12
t3192 Class 3
Description : Wait for DL TBF release after reception of the final block.This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MSreceived all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires,the MS releases the resources associated with the TBFand begins to monitor its paging group (DRX mode).
Value range : [0 (500 ms)1 (1000 ms)2 (1500 ms)3 (0 ms)4 (80 ms)5 (120 ms)6 (160 ms)7 (200 ms)]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Default value : 0
Release : V14
target Bda
Description :Target BDA for the On-line reset command
See NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [running / new / old]
• "running" for "BDA Edition" reset on-line (i.e. basic BDAchange without prototype BDA change)
• "new" or "old" for "BDA Version" reset on line (i.e. BSCupgrades with prototype BDA change)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
482 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bsc - On-line reset
Type : DP
Release : V11
tcu2gGroup
Description : This parameter gives the TCU 2G core process id
Value range : Only 4 values are possible: [34, 35 36 and 37]
Object : Tcu2G
Type : DD
Release : V16
teiBtsSiteManager Class 2
Description : TEI address of the site BCF in the LAPD protocol.
In a BTS chain, the TEI addresses must be allocated inascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with theBTS closest to the BSC.
In a BTS loop configuration, the TEI addresses must beallocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.),beginning with the BTS directly linked to the BSC that usesDTI board no.0 for the Abis link input.
The following TEI values 3, 7, 11, 15, and 19 are forbiddenwhen T1 PCMs on Abis interface are used.
The relationship between internal E1 PCM TSs (DTI, PCMIor CPCMI) or BSC (DDTI) and external PCM TSs is thefollowing:
E1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
E1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
T1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 483
E1 PCM TSs 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not mappedonto T1 PCM TSs. The scheduled or "rendez-vous" TSs(=teiBtsSiteManager +1) cannot be defined on theseinternal E1 PCM TSs
Value range : Depending on the BTS type, the value range is:
• [0 to 9] for a BTS 18000
• [0 to 13] for an S12000
• [0 to 15] for all other BTSs
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
• [C/M]:The number of TEI addresses allotted to aLAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh(static configuration data).
Checks :
• [C/M]:Values 3, 7, 11 and 15 are forbidden in T1mode.
teiLapdLink
Description : TEI address of the LAPD link in the LAPD protocol. It isupdated by the OMC-R agent according to the TEI addressallotted by the user to the entity (BCF, TRX/DRX, TCU)using the LAPD link.
Value range : [0 to 127]
Object : lapdLink - Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2
Description : TEI address of the TRX/DRX in the LAPD protocol.
Value range : The value range is:
• [14 to 55], case of an S12000
• [14 to 79], case of a BTS 18000 and a BSC 3000
• [14 to 65], case of a BTS 18000 and a BSC 12000HC
• [16 to 63], in other cases
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
484 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C/M]:The number of TEI addresses allotted to aLAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh(static configuration data).
• [C/M]:The TEI address is not assigned to anothertransceiverEquipment object dependent on thesame bts object.
• [C/M]:HPRM does not support following TEIs:14, 17, 18, 21, 22, 25, 34, 37, 42, 45, 50, 53,64, 67, 70, 73, 76, 79
• [M]:No mdScanner object refers to thetransceiverEquipment object (no observation isrunning on the TRX/DRX or the parent cell).
Checks :
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbts object and the transceiverEquipment objectare locked.
teiTranscoder Class 2
Description : TEI address of the TCU in the LAPD protocol.
Value range : [0 to 126]
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
BSC 2g: The TEI address is not assigned toanother transcoder object dependent on thesame bsc object.
• [C/M]:
Bsc 3000: No check. The TEI address is notused by BSC 3000.
Checks :
• [C/M]:0 ≤ teiTranscoder ≤ 126
temporaryOffset Class 3
Description : Negative offset applied during Penalty Time for re-selectinga cell (C2 criterion).
This negative offset is applied during the entirepenaltyTime duration and allows to preventspeeding mobiles from selecting the cell. Refer tothe cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 70, by steps of 10] dB
Object : bts
Feature : AR 264
Default value : 70
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 485
Type : DP
Release : V8
terminal name
Description : Name of a terminal as defined in its profile (default is thelogged-in user’s terminal).
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : System session log - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:The terminal is known to the OMC-R.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL objectnames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
terminal profile
Description : Identifier (name) of an OMC-R terminal
Value range : [case sensitive, 1 character min.]
Object : terminal profile
Type : Id
• [C]:The name of a terminal is unique to theOMC-R.
Checks :
• [M/D]:The terminal profile object is created.
text
Description : Comment to display before running the next command
The Echo : text = blah blah blah command can be insertedanywhere in a command file, and as many times asnecessary. The text is displayed as it is in session logswhen the command file is run.
Value range : [unlimited number of characters]
Object : commandFile - Echo command
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
486 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
text
Description : Contents of a short message. It is broadcast as it is.
Value range : [93 characters max]
Object : short message
Type : DP
text
Description : Contents of a user message. It is sent as it is.
Value range : [unlimited number of characters]
Object : user message
Type : DP
tFH or RWM Class 2
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "microwaveterminal" in 4000 Outdoor.
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V9
tGMMKeepAlive Class 3
Description : Configures the GMM Keep Alive mechanism.
Value range : [0..64]
• 0: the feature is disabled (the same Keep Alive timer isused for data and GMM procedures)
• [1..63] (1 unit = 100 ms): enables the feature and setsthe GMM Keep Alive timer duration. The recommendedvalue is 5
• 64: the Keep Alive mechanism is disabled for GMMprocedures
Object : bts
Feature : 23038 - Disabling ’TBF Keep Alive’
Type : DP
Release : V15
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 487
thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the BTS to inform the BSC about aCCCH congestion (104 is the only value accepted)
Value range : [0 to 2147483646] dB
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"104".
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
thresholdInterference Class 2
Description : List of four thresholds defined in ascending order, used to sort idle channels onthe basis of measured interference levels.
This attribute, together with the averagingPeriod attribute, allows to manageinterferences in a radio cell. The classification is used by the radio resourceallocator.
The interference processing algorithm for a cell is as follows:
• For each idle radio channel, the BTS permanently measures the signalstrength level RXLEV.
• When averagingPeriod "Measurement results" messages have beenreceived, the L1M function in the BTS calculates interference level averages,sorts the idle channels according to the five defined interference levels (Level0 corresponds to the lowest interference level), and sends the informationto the BSC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
488 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• The BSC tallies the interference levels and, if the temporary "interference"observation is running for the bsc object, sends the channelIdleLevelMaxand channelIdleLevelEch counters every <mdGranularityPeriod> minutesto the OMC-R agent.
Refer also to C1619 permanent observation counters.
Value range : [-128 to 0] dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value: -100 -90 -80 -70
Type : DP
• [C/M]:The thresholds are defined in ascending order.Checks :
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts objectis locked.
thresholdType
Description : Type of thresholds managed
The startAlarmThreshold and endAlarmThresholdattribute values, which trigger permanent BSS observationcounter threshold overflow messages, depend on the typeof thresholds managed by the mdWarning object. Refer tothese entries in the Dictionary.
Value range : [thresholdLow / thresholdHigh]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter"
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 489
timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3
Description : Whether the hoPingpongTimeRejection timer can beused in a BSS when processing handovers.
Refer to bts object bts time between HO configurationand adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongTimeRejection attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.
Value range : [used / not used]
Object : bsc
Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821- V12)
Default value : used
Type : DP
Release : V9
timerGcchNotif Class 3
Description : Time between two FACCH notifications.
Value range : [0 to 65535] seconds
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 2 (recommended)
Feature : ASCI
Type : DP
Release : GSM-R V15
timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3
Description : Time between two location update requests.
Value range : [0 to 255] 1/10th of hour. "0" means that no periodiclocation update is requested.
Object : bts
Default value : 60
Type : DP
Remark : The operator must be aware that the input of low valuesfor this attribute causes an important traffic load duringthe location update procedures. For instance, enteringthe value "1" for this attribute leads to that all Mobiles willexecute an update of their LAC every 6 minutes.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
490 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
timeSlotNumber
Description : PCM time slot used by a LAPD link
Since all radio sites house a switching facility, the BSC candirectly map the LAPD link onto a PCM time slot.
Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900/850 networks),[1 to 31] (other networks).
Object : lapdLink
Note : This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML andlapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.
Note : This parameter is only available for the lapdLink OMLobject on BSC 3000.
Type : DD
Remark : The LAPD link with a radio site BCF always uses TSn =pcmTimeSlotNumber (radio site scheduled time slot).Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
timeSlotNumber Class 2
Description : PCM time slot used by an SS7 channel on the A interface
Value range : [1 to 24]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
• [C/M]:The time slot is not already assigned on theA interface to a signallingLink or xtp objectdependent on the same bsc object and is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channelon the Ater interface.
Checks :
• [C/M]:If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeslot is in the range [1to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link arenot mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).
timeSlotNumber
Description : PCM time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface
Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900/850 networks),[1 to 31] (other networks).
Object : xtp
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 491
Type : DP
• [C]:The time slot is identical to the mscPcmTsNumber component of the xtp object cic attribute(refer to this entry in the Dictionary).
• [C]:The time slot is not already assigned on theA interface to an xtp or signallingLink objectdependent on the same bsc object, and is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channelon the Ater interface.
Checks :
• [C]:If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeslot is in the range [1to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link arenot mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified due toits relationship with the mscPcmTsNumbercomponent of the cic attribute.
tmu
Description : The Traffic Management Unit, which is responsible formanaging the GSM protocol : it provides processing powerfor Call Processing, terminates GSM protocol (A, Abis andAter interfaces), terminates low level GSM protocol (LAPDand SS7).
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : tmu
Type : Id
Release : V13
tmuId
Description : Identifier of the ’tmu’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : tmu
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
492 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
tnOffset class 2
Description : Allows to specify and control Timeslot Number(TN) difference between BTSs in case of networksynchronization by GPS.
Refer also to the fnOffset entry in this dictionary.
Object : btsSiteManager
Value range : [0..7]
Type : DP
Feature : Network Synchronization
Default value : 0
Release : V15
Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.
tNwExtUtbf Class 3
Description : Inactive period timer.
Maximum time of inactivity during which the UL radioresources are not released.
Value range : [0..255] (1 unit = 20 ms)
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Checks : • [M]:tNwExtUtbf value must be greater than orequal to tUsfExt value.
Release : V15
traceConstraintList
Description : List of logical expressions that allow to filter the informationto display. The following filter criteria are used: [bsPower /bssTraceType / bssTraceTypeUsed / establishmentCause/ hoCauseClass / hoClauseValue / hoRrResult / mobileId/ msPower / pcm / recordingEntity / rrCause / timeSlot /timingAdvance / tracedBts / traceRecId / traceReferenceCrit / trStartTime / trStopTime. / trxIdrxId].
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 493
See NTP < 130> .
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
traceControl
Description : Identifier of a traceControl object defined with regard to themd object.
It describes the Call tracing function of a BSC.
A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting data in the related BSC.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : traceControl
Type : Id
• [C]:The traceControl object is not created for themd object.
• [C/M/D]:The application database of the related BSCis not being built.
• [C/M/D]:If the application database of the relatedBSC is built, the BSS/OMC-R link isestablished and no audit is in-progress inthe BSC.
Checks :
• [M/D]:The traceControl object is created.
Release : V8
traceDayAccessed
Description : Date of data recording
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Setting this parameter limits the display to trace datarecorded on the specified day.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
494 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
traceFileName
Description : Name of a call tracing or call path tracing data file on theOMC-R agent disks. The naming rules are described inNTP < 07 >.
Object : traceFileReadyRecord
Type : DP
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL objectnames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
traceInfoRequested
Description : List of information to display with respect to the type.
See NTP < 129 >.
Value range : [abisInfo / bsicInfo / bssMapInfo / btsInfo / ChannelInfo /cicInfo / dtapInfo / handoverInfo / manufacturerExtInfo Aand Ater / manufacturerExtInfo Abis / measurementInfo/ msClassmarkInfo / powerControlIn fo / rrInfo /timingAdvanceInfo / trxInfo / txPowerInfo]
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
traceReference
Description : Reference of a trace message received from the MSC.
Value range : [0 to 63] (Phase I)[0 to 65535] (Phase II)
Object : traceFileReadyRecord
Type : DP
traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2
Description : Allocation priority of a TDMA frame on the covering sitePCMs.
This attribute is used in case of Abis PCM reconfiguration.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : transceiver
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 495
Release : V9
Note : "0" should be assigned to the highest priority frame(s).
transceiver
Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a btsobject.
It defines the parent transceiver object.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : channel
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The transceiver object is created.
transceiver
Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a btsobject.
By definition, a TDMA frame is related to a cell, a cell isrelated to a site, and a site is related to a BSC.
In all MMI commands, a transceiver object can be referredto by the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiver",where siteName and cellName respectively identify thecovering site and cell by name.
A TDMA frame is brought in service on the network atcreation time. It is working when the parent bts object isunlocked.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : transceiver
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]: The maximum number of TDMA framescontrolled by a BSC depends on its type andhardware version, as shown in the followingtable:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
496 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
BSC 12000HC
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
120 120 160 160 160
Checks : • [C]:The number of TDMA frames per cell is limitedto 16, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the cell.
• [C]:The handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the parent bts object.
• [C]:If the parent bts object describes a concentriccell, two transceiverZone objects are createdfor that object.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe parent bts object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
transceiver equipment class Class 2
Description : The class of a TRX/DRX.
The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximumtransmission power. The attribute possible values have thefollowing meaning:
• Class 1 corresponds to GSM 900 class 5 or GSM1800/1900 class 1 (20W to 40W transmitters).
• Class 2 corresponds to GSM 900 class 6 which is notsupported or GSM 1800/1900 class 2 (10W to 20Wtransmitters).
When dual band (concentric cell) is used, the class of aTRX/DRX enables to distinguish which DRX and whichTDMA are used in the outer zone or inner zone.
Class 1 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandcarrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 0(large/outer zone).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 497
Class 2 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandnot carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 1(small/inner zone).
When cell is dualband, transceiver equipment class valuesdifferentiate TRX of the main band (for which the classvalue is 1) and TRX of the extended band (for which theclass value is 2).
Value range : [0 (reserved) / 1 / 2]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:Concentric cell: If the TRX/DRX is partneredwith a TDMA frame, its class matches theTRX/DRX class allotted to the zone to whichthe TDMA frame belongs (refer to the nextentry).
Release : V9
transceiver zone Ref Class 2
Description : Identifier of the transceiverZone object that defines thezone to which a TDMA frame belongs in a concentric cell.
Value range : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)]
Object : transceiver
Condition : To define if the covering cell is concentric
Type : DP
• [C]:The referenced transceiverZone object iscreated for the parent bts object.
Checks :
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.
Release : V9
transceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined withregard to a bts object.
It defines the related transceiverEquipment object.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : software
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
498 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The transceiverEquipment object is created.
transceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined withregard to a bts object.
By definition, a TRX/DRX is related to a cell, a cell isrelated to a site, and a site is related to a BSC.
In all MMI commands, a transceiverEquipment object canbe referred to by the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiverEquipment", where siteName and cellNamerespectively identify the covering site and cell by name.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : Id
• [C]:The number of TRX/DRXs per site is limitedto 24, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the site.
• [C]:The number of TRX/DRXs per cell is limitedto 16, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the cell.
• [C]:The handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the parent bts object.
• [C]:The referenced lapdLink objects (lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef) are created forthe parent bsc object.
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe parent bts object is locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager and bts objects arelocked, and the transceiverEquipment objectis locked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
Checks :
• [D]:No traceControl or callPathTrace object refersto the transceiverEquipment object (the BSCCall tracing or Call path tracing function doesnot monitor that object).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 499
transceiver equipment class
Description : Class of the TRX/DRXs partnered with the TDMA framesof the zone.
The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximumtransmission power. Refer to the previous entry.
When dual band (concentric cell) is used, the class of aTRX/DRX enables to distinguish which DRX and whichTDMA are used in the outer zone or inner zone.
Class 1 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandcarrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 0(large/outer zone).
Class 2 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandnot carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 1(small/inner zone).
Value range : [1 / 2]
Object : transceiverZone
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.
Release : V9
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for btsobjects that describe concentric cells.
transceiverZone
Description : Identifier of a transceiverZone object that describes thelarge zone or the small zone of a concentric cell.
The transceiverZone objects are only significant for the btsobjects that describe concentric cells. Two transceiverZoneobjects are created for each created concentric bts object;one describes the large or outer transmission zone, and theother describes the small or inner transmission zone.
Value range : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)]
Object : transceiverZone
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created and thetransceiverZone object is not created for thatobject.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
500 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [C]:The number of transmission zones in aconcentric cell equals 2. Each transceiverZoneobject is one-of-a -kind to the associated btsobject.
• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe associated bts object is locked.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No transceiver object refers to thetransceiverZone object.
Release : V9
transcoder2GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the ’transcoder2GEqpt’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. Theonly value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannotbe modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 2G.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : transcoder2GEqpt
Type : DP
Release : V13
transcoder3GEqptId
Description : Identifier of the ’hardware transcoder 3G’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. Theonly value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannotbe modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 3000.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : hardware transcoder 3G
Type : DP
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 501
transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject.
It defines the parent transcoder object.
Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network),
[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, T1 PCM network)
Object : pcmCircuit (A interface)
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The transcoder object is created.
transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject.
Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network),
[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, T1 PCM network)
Object : transcoder
Type : Id
• [C]:The number of remote transcoders linked to aBSC is limited to maxTranscdPerBsc (staticconfiguration data).
• [C]:The software object related to the parent bscobject is created.
• [C]:The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bscobject.
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe transcoder object is locked.
Checks :
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
502 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject.
It defines the parent transcoder object.
Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network).
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The transcoder object is created.
transcoderAlarmList
Description : This attribute is relevant only for BSC 12000HC. Activationstate of the internal alarm loops of the transcoder. Themanager may either display it (in French) without previousdecoding, or decode provided raw data for displaying inEnglish. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
Value range : [KO/OK]
Object : transcoder2GEqpt
Type : DD
Release : V13
transcoderAlarmMask Class 3
Description : Configuration of external alarms in a TCU [xx]: Theexternal alarm loop is monitored (not monitored) when bit 0is set to 1 (0), bit 1 indicates whether operating anomaliesof the TCU external clock are notified (1) or not (0) to theOMC-R.
Object : transcoder
Default value : 11
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
transcoderArchitecture
Description : Indicates the TCU hardware configuration. This attributeis modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified tothe Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the BDAis not built.
Value range : [tcu2G / tcu3G ]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 503
Object : transcoder
Default value :
Type : DP
Release : V13
transcoderBoard
Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regardto a transcoder object.
Value range : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900/850 network),[0 to 9] (other networks).
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : Id
• [C]:The number of transcoding boards housed in aTCU is limited to maxTranscdBPerTranscd(static configuration data).
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe transcoderBoard object is locked.
Checks :
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
transcoderBoard
Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regardto a transcoder object.
It defines the related transcoderBoard object.
Value range : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 or GSM 850 network),[0 to 9] (other networks).
Object : software-transcoderBoard
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]:The transcoderBoard object is created.
transcoderBoardIntState
Description : TCB internal state.
Value range : [working / fault]
• working ..........The board is working.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
504 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• fault ............An error was detected on theboard.
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DD
transcoderId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM linkthat carries the SS7 channel on the A interface.
Value range : [0 to 33]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced transcoder object is createdand the pcmCircuit object used by thesignallingLink object (pcmCircuitId) is relatedto that object.
transcoderId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM linkthat carries the terrestrial circuit on the A interface.
Value range : [0 to 33]
Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced transcoder object is createdand the pcmCircuit object used by the xtpobject (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object.
transcoderIntPcmIntState
Description : State of the TCU internal PCM links. Each link is identifiedby a serial number n = [0 to 15].
Value range : [0 to 15] [working / fault]
• working ..........The internal PCM is working.
• fault ............An error was detected on the PCMlink.
Object : transcoder
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 505
transcoderMatrix
Description : Configuration of the TCU switching matrix = mapping PCMAter TS <=> PCM A TS.
This attribute describes the relation between the TSs of thefour PCM A links used by the TCU (A interface) and theTSs of the PCM Ater link used by the TCU (Ater interface).The following tables show the correspondence when PCME1 or T1 links are used.
Object : transcoder - Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.
PCM E1 links
TS PCMAter
PCM A TS PCM A
1 (LAPDchannel)
- no equivalence
23456789
00000000
1591317212529
26101418222630
37111519232731
481216202428
91011121314151617
111111111
26101418222630
37111519232731
481216202428
1591317212529
171819202122232425
222222222
37111519232731
481216202428
1591317212529
26101418222630
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
506 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
TS PCMAter
PCM A TS PCM A
25262728293031-
33333333
481216202428
1591317212529
26101418222630
37111519232731
PCM T1 links
TS PCMAter
PCM A TS PCM A
1 (LAPDchannel)
- no equivalence
234567
000000
159131721
2610141822
3711151923
4812162024
8910111213
111111
159131721
2610141822
3711151923
4812162024
141516171819
222222
159131721
2610141822
3711151923
4812162024
2021222324-
333333
159131721
2610141822
3711151923
4812162024
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 507
transparentSiteAttrib2 Class 2
Description : BSC 2nd class transparent attribute on bstSiteManager MO.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range : String [0 to 129]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V14
transparentTeiAttrib2 Class 2
Description : BSC transparent attribute on bts MO. Transmitted toSUP-TEI AO and then to the bts in LOAD_READYmessage.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range : String [0 to 27]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Release : V14
tResumeAck Class 3
Description : Timer used by the bsc waiting for an MS Resume Ack froma pcu. On timer expiry, the procedure is canceled. A TCHRelease is sent to the MS, requesting this MS to send aRouting Area Update.
Value range : [0..10] (1 unit = 100 ms). The recommended value is 1.
Default value : 0
Object : bsc
Feature : GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : Value 0 is considered as 1 by the BSC.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
508 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
trm
Description : The Transcoding Resource Module, which is responsiblefor GSM vocoding of the voice channels.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : trm
Type : Id
trmArchipelagoCalls
Description : Number of calls per archipelago and per TRM.
Value range : List of 3 archipelagoes. Each of them is a list [coderAlgo,maximumNumberOfCalls, currentNumberOfCalls] with:coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder /ctmEnhancedFullRateCode / amrFullHalfRateCoder maximumNumberOfCalls: 0 to 65535 currentNumberOfCalls: 0to 65535
Object : trm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement
Type : DD
Release : V16
trmId
Description : Identifier of the ’trm’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU3000.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : trm
Type : DP
Release : V13
tSCBNumber
Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 12000HC. Thisattribute indicates which is the number of the TSCB(Transcoder Signalling Concentration Board) board,managing the signalling for transcoders, and the numberof the BSCB (BTS signalling Concentration Board) board,managing the signalling for BTS. This board is redundantat BSC level.
Value range : [0 to 13]
Object : bsc2GEqpt
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 509
Type : DD
Release : V13
tSCBUse
Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 12000HC. 1xSCBBoards Use: indicates the internal state and LAPDmapping for each created TSCB and BSCB board. Thisattribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are notified to the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 14]
Object : bsc2GEqpt
Type : DD
Release : V13
tsConfiguration
Description : Configuration of the radio TDMA frame time slots.
This dynamic attribute indicates, for each time slot, thereconfiguration state, the type of logical channel supported,the frequency channel used (absoluteRFChannelNo)if the time slot does not hop, the list of frequencychannels used (mobileAllocation), the maio, and thehoppingSequenceNumber if the time slot hops.
When frequency hopping is used if "reconfiguration state"is "true", it means that BSC has recalculated the frequencyhopping law following the loss of one or several TRX(defence of TDMA carrying the BCCH. If "reconfigurationstate" is "false", it means that the TDMA configuration is theoriginal one.
When frequency hopping is not used, this boolean has nomeaning and would be set to "false".
Value range : [true / false]
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Remark : Since the time slots are reconfigured after each dynamicreconfiguration of the hopping frequencies, the data can bedifferent from those defined by the user when creating thechannel objects.
Release : V8
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
510 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
tSuspendAck Class 3
Description : Timer used by the bsc waiting for an MS Suspend Ackmessage from a pcu. On timer expiry, the Suspendmessage is repeated. After three unsuccessful attempts,the procedure is canceled.
Value range : [1..10] seconds. The recommended value is 1.
Default value : 1
Object : bsc
Feature : GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume
Type : DP
Release : V15
Note : Value 0 is considered as 1 by the BSC.
tUsfExt Class 3
Description : Throughput optimization timer.
On timer expiry, the USF allocation is optimized in orderto give priority to active MSs that share the TS with theinactive MS.
Value range : [0..255] (1 unit = 20 ms)
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : Extended UL TBF
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:tUsfExt value must be lower than or equal totNwExtUtbf value.
Release : V15
txPowerMaxReduction Class 2
Description : Maximum transmission power level allowed in a TDMAframe (attenuation versus bsTxPowerMax) per transceiver.
Value range : [0 to 30 by step of 2] dB. "0" is the only value accepted.
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is 0dB.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
T 511
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore.
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
• Fault data are stored in the "/MD/notif" partition on theOMC-R agent disks.
• Observation data are stored in the "/MD/obs" partitionon the OMC-R agent disks.
• Trace data are stored in the "/MD/trace_function"partition on the OMC-R agent disks.
• Backup data are stored on the OMC-R agent disks.
• Other data files are defined in the "/MD/config" partitionon the OMC-R agent disks.
Object : md - Archive
Type : DP
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore.
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
• Fault data are restored to the "/MD/restored/notif"partition on the OMC-R agent disks.
• Observation data are restored to the "/MD/restored/obs"partition on the OMC-R agent disks.
• Trace data are restored in the "/MD/restored/trace_function" partition on the OMC-R agent disks.
• Other data files are restored to their source directory onthe OMC-R agent disks.
Object : md - Restore
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
512 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore.
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / backup withouteft / PCUOAM / other data]
• Fault data are stored in the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.
• Observation data are stored in the "/OMC/obs" partitionon the OMC-R manager disks.
• Trace data are stored in the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager.
• Backup data are stored on the OMC-R manager disks.
• Other data files are defined in the "/OMC/data" partitionon the OMC-R manager disks.
Object : omc - Archive
Type : DP
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore.
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
• Fault data are restored to the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.
• Observation data are restored to the "/OMC/obs"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.
• Trace data are restored to the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.
• Other data files are restored to their source directory"/OMC/data" on the manager disks.
Object : omc - Restore
Type : DP
type
Description : Type of observation report.
Value range : [single observed instance / several observed instance]
• single observed instance .......several observedcounters on a singleobject
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 513
• several observed instance .......single counterobserved on severalobjects
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
type of data to be purged
Description : Type of the OMC data to be purged.
Value range : [traceData]
Object : omc - Data purge
Type : DP
Release : V10
type of display
Description : Choice of the observation counter display mode.
Value range : [Chart / Table / Text]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Release : V11
UulBepPeriod Class 2
Description : The parameter is used by BTS to derive the forgettingfactor used in the UL to compute averaged MEAN-BEP andCV-BEP.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : transceiver
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter allows the operator to set the thresholdbetween MCS2 and the next code in the UL GMSK OnlyLink Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
514 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter allows to set the threshold between MCS3and the next code in the UL GMSK Only Link Adaptationtable.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS2and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS3and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 515
ulMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS5and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS5 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS6and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS6 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS7and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS7 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Type : DP
Release : V15
ulMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3
Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS8and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)
Default value : 0 (disabled MCS8 in the Link Adaptation Tables)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
516 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V15
UMTS access min level Class 3
Description : A minimum threshold for Ec/No for UTRAN FDD cellre-selection (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin).
Value range : V15: [-20 / -19 / -18 / -17 / -16 / - 15 / -14 / -13] dBV16: [-20 / -18 / -16 / -14 / -12 / -10 / -8 / -6] dB
Object : bts
Default value : V15: -20 dBV16: -12 dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
UMTS reselection ARFCN Class 3
Description : Neighboring UMTS cell ARFCN.
Although no control is performed on the value, it shallbe indicated on the OMC-R display as a comment thata UTRAN ARFCN FDD is from 10562 to 10838 (3GPPreference: FDD_Qmin).
Value range : [0 to 16383]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : V14
UMTS reselection offset Class 3
Description : Applies an offset to RLA_C for cell re-selection to accesstechnology / mode FDD (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin).
Value range : [infinity / -28 / -24 / -20 / -16 / -12 / -8 / -4 / 0 / 4 / 8 / 12 / 16/ 20 / 24 / 28] dB
Object : bts
Default value : infinity dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 517
UMTS search min level Class 3
Description : Search for 3G cell if signal level is below or above thethreshold (3GPP reference: Qsearch_I).
Value range : [<-98 / <-94 / <-90 / <-86 / <-82 / <-78 / <-74 / Always />-78 / > -74 / >-70 / >-66 / >-62 / >-58 / >-54 / Never] dB
Object : bts
Default value : <-98 dB
Type : DP
Release : V14
unequippedCircuit Class 1
Description : Whether the UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT messages are used(Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 -V12)
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is "false" in V10 andV11.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute inV10 and V11, changing it has no meaning.
Release : V8
unit
Description : The name that identifies the unit.
Value range : String [1 to 2 characters]
Object : transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardwaretranscoder 3G
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is applicable for TCU3G only.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
518 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
unknownNCellWarning Class 3
Description : Whether feedback of measurements performed by mobileson neighbor cells that are unknown to the BSC is allowed.
When feedback of measurements is enabled, notificationswith codano 1260 are generated. These notificationsindicate that measurements are performed on cells whichuse the same BCCH as a neighbor cell of the serving cellbut have different BSICs.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
unmasked users alarms Class 2
Description : Configuration of the user (unprotected) external alarmloops controlled by the BTS. When an alarm is unmasked,it means the relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS.There are 6 user alarms per cabinet.
• on the S8000 Outdoor (up to 18 user alarms = 3cabinets * 6 user alarms per cabinet).
• on the S8002 BTS (up to 6 user alarms = 1 cabinet * 6user alarms)
A user alarm is used when an external equipment isinserted in the BTS (for instance a microwave terminal) anddoes not require a new DLU.
Value range : [All masked, Base 1, Base 1 to 2, Base 1 to 3, Base 1 to 4,Base 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1, Base 1 to 6Ext0 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 3, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6, Base 1to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 6]
For instance:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 519
• Base 1: the first user alarm in the Base cabinet isunmasked
• Base 1 to 2: the first and second user alarm in the Basecabinet are unmasked
• Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1: The 6 user alarms in the Basecabinet and the first one in the Extension cabinet 0 areunmasked
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Release : V9
upAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime)
Description : Defines the DL TBF pre-establishment timer.
Value range : [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for uplink transfer
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12 and TF1220 - V12.4c)
Default value :
Type : DP
Release : V12
upgradeStatus
Description : Stands whether an upgrade is complete, or is whether ornot it is still in progress.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are notified to the manager.
Value range : [notInProgress / inProgress / performed / toBeUpgraded /aborted; duplicateInProgress; frozen; failed; flashUpdated;Unknown]
Object : transcoder, atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, iem, iom,interfaceNode, omu, tmu, trm, hardware transcoder 3G,sw8kRm, btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
520 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2
Description : Channel number used for uplink mapping as the monitoredTS.
Value range : [1 to 7]
Object : bts
Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12)
Default value : 7
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute must contain an even value incase of an extended cell (2, 4, 6). In case of amulti CCCH cell it must contain an odd value(1, 3, 5, 7).
Release : V12
uplinkMappingFreq Class 2
Description : The frequency (f0) used for uplink mapping.
Value range : [0 to 1023]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12)
Type : DP
Release : V12
uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Class 2
Description : This attribute is relevant from V11 BTS.
This attribute indicates if the uplink mapping is active(TRUE) or inactive (FALSE) on the BTS.
Once active BTS sends collected data to BSC.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value range : [disabled/enabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 521
uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3
Description : Whether or not uplink mapping is active on the BSC.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bsc
Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
uplinkPowerControl Class 3
Description : Whether power control in the MS-to-BTS direction isauthorized at cell level.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : powerControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Release : V8
uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA Class 3
Description : Reserved for future use.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bsc
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V16
uplinkReply Class 3
Description : Defines the use of the uplink-reply procedure, whichapplies to VBS and VGCS calls for radio resourcesoptimization.
Value range : [0 to 2] with:
• 0: Disabled (recommended value for non-GSM-Rcustomers)
• 1: Enabled on all group calls (recommended value forGSM-R customers)
• 2: Enabled on all group calls except on emergencygroup calls (optional value for GSM-R customers)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
522 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : bsc
Feature : ASCI
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Release : GSM-R V15
uplinkReplyTimer Class 3
Description : Timer value of the uplink-reply procedure.
Value range : [0 to 65535] seconds, with:
• 0: the feature is not allowed
• 6: recommended minimum value
• 120: recommended value
Object : bts
Feature : ASCI
Default value : 120
Type : DP
Release : GSM-R V15
uRxLevDLP Class 3
Description : Upper strength threshold for BTS txpwr decrease for stepby step algorithm.
It is greater than lRxLevDLP.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : -85 to -84 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevDLP
• [M]:uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevDLP
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard "step by step" power control algorithm.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 523
uRxLevULP Class 3
Description : Upper strength threshold for MS txpwr decrease for stepby step algorithm.
It is greater than lRxLevULP.
Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB
Object : powerControl
Default value : -85 to -84 dB
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevULP
• [M]:uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevULP
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard "step by step" power control algorithm.
uRxQualDLP Class 3
Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce BTS txpwr for step bystep algorithm.
It is lower than or equal to lRxQualDLP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.2 to 0.4
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:uRxQualDLP ≤ lRxQualDLP
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard "step by step" power control algorithm.
uRxQualULP Class 3
Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce MS txpwr for step by stepalgorithm.
It is lower than or equal to lRxQualULP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
524 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Default value : 0.2 to 0.4
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:uRxQualULP ≤ lRxQualULP
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard "step by step" power control algorithm.
usageState
Description : Activity state of the Call path tracing function in the BSC.
Refer to the endSessionCriteriaType entry in theDictionary and the operationalState entry related to thecallPathTrace object which describes the possible stateparameter combinations for this type of object.
Value range : [idle / busy ]
• idle .............The PCM time slot that conveys theterrestrial circuit is traffic-free.
• busy .............The PCM time slot conveys theterrestrial circuit is working andcarrying traffic.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
usageState
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry related to the xtpobject which describes the possible state parametercombinations for this type of object.
Value range : [idle / busy / active]
• idle .............The PCM time slot that conveys theterrestrial circuit is traffic-free.
• busy .............The PCM time slot conveys theterrestrial circuit is working andcarrying traffic.
• active ...........The PCM time slot that conveys theterrestrial circuit is active.
Object : xtp
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
U 525
use default list
Description : Whether the default counter list has to be used.
Value range : [yes]
Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
Release : V11
user name
Description : Name of an OMC-R user as defined in the user’s profile(default is the logged-in user’s name).
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : System session log - Filter
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:The related user profile object is created onthe OMC-R.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
user profile
Description : Identifier (name) of an OMC-R user.
Value range : [case sensitive, 2 characters min]
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Checks : • [C]:The name of a user is one-of-a-kind to theOMC-R.
• [M/D]:The user profile object is created.
username
Description : Name of the OMC-R user, as defined in the user’s profile,who created the job.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Type : DD
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
526 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Object : job
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
username
Description : Name of the OMC-R user, as defined in the user’s profile,who created the associated job.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : jobResult
Type : DD
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
usfGranularity Class 3
Description : The type of granularity supported by PCU when dynamicallocation is available.
Value range : [0]
Object : bts
Feature : EDGE dynamic allocation (20230)
Default value : 0 (granularity 1)
Type : DP
Release : V15
Vversion Class 2
Description : Version number of the remote transcoder TCBs.
Version 1 TCB software only manages the FR (Full Rate)service. Version 2 TCB software manages both FR andEFR (Enhanced Full Rate) services.
The following apply:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
V 527
• All TCBs in a given TCU are the same version.
• All TCUs in a BSS must be equipped with Version 2TCBs for the EFR service to be provided.
Value range : [TCB_1 / TCB_2]
Object : transcoder
Default value : TCB_2
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The attribute value is "TCB_2" if thespeechMode attribute of the dependenttranscoderBoard objects contains "enhancedfull rate".
Release : V8
voiceBroadcastService Class 3
Description : Authorize Voice Broadcast Service.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : (GSM-R V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
voiceGroupCallService Class 3
Description : Authorize Voice Group Call Service.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : (GSM-R V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Release : V12
vSWR meter Class 2
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "voltagestationary wave rate meter" in S8000 Indoor or Outdoor.
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
528 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Type : DP
Release : V9
Wworkstation name
Description : Name of a workstation as defined in its profile (default isthe logged-in user’s workstation).
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : omc - Display workstation markers
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:The terminal profile object describing theworkstation is created on the OMC-R.
Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.
wPSManagement Class 3
Description : WPS feature is enabled or disabled.
Value range : [disabled 0 ; enabled 1]
Object : bsc
Feature : WPS queuing managment (22463)
Default value : Disabled
Type : DP
Checks : • [A]:The terminal profile object describing theworkstation is created on the OMC-R.
Release : V15
wPSQueueStepRotation Class 3
Description : One out of the WPSQueueStepRotation value to first havean evaluation of the WPS queues in the radio resourceallocator.
Value range : [1 to 10]
Object : bts
Feature : WPS public access bandwidth protection (22465)
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
X 529
Checks : • [A]:The terminal profile object describing theworkstation is created on the OMC-R.
Release : V15
XX25 port 0 operational
Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 0.
ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : omu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
X25 port 1 operational
Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 1.
ISO operational state (enabled/ disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : omu
Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1
Type : DD
Release : V13
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
530 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
xSCBConfiguration Class 0
Description : Number of TSCBs and BSCBs concentrating LAPDsignaling in the BSC.
The TSCBs are used for TCU signaling on the Aterinterface. The BSCBs are used for BTS signaling on theAbis interface.
A BSC which manages BTS LAPD signaling concentrationcan control up to 138 radio sites with redundancy, or 147radio sites without redundancy.
When a BSC does not manage BTS LAPD signalingconcentration, the number of radio sites it controls is limitedto the number of SICD ports available, minus 1 (which isreserved for TCU LAPD signaling), that is 39 sites.
Value range : [2 to 14]
Object : bsc
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Release : V8
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
xSCBNumber
Description : Number of the TSCB that concentrates TCU LAPDsignaling in the BSC
This dynamic attribute is managed by the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 13]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.
xSCBUse
Description : State and assignment of the BSC TSCBs and BSCBs.
This dynamic attribute indicates, for each TSCB and BSCBhoused in the BSC, its operational state and the list of theLAPD links it concentrates.
Value range : [working / fault]
Object : bsc
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
X 531
Type : DD
Release : V8
xtp
Description : Identifier of an xtp object (eXchange Termination Point)defined with regard to a bsc object.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : xtp
Type : Id
Checks : • [C]: The number of terrestrial circuits linked to aBSC 12000HC is limited to 1288 if PCM E1links are used and to 1440 if PCM T1 links areused.
Checks : • [C]:The software object related to the bsc objectis created.
• [C/M]:The referenced pcmCircuit object(pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interfaceand depends on the same transcoder object(transcoderId) as the xtp object.
• [C]:The time slot used by the xtp object(timeSlotNumber) is identical to themscPcmTsNumber component of the cicattribute.
• [C/M]:The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitIdand timeSlotNumber) is not already assignedto an xtp or signallingLink object dependenton the same transcoder object, and the timeslot is not mapped on the TS used by the OMCchannel on the Ater interface.
• [C/M]:If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in therange [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link orin the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1link. Since the last four time slots of that linkare not mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).
• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe xtp object is locked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
532 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.
• [D]:No traceControl or callPathTrace object refersto the xtp object (the Call tracing and Call pathtracing functions do not monitor that object).
Restrictions : • [M]:The cic and timeSlotNumber attributes of anxtp object cannot be modified.
ZzI bss
Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest.Enter "all" to include all the BSCs created on the OMC-R.
If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill inthe list as follows:
• The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list.
• The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs fromthe list.
A BSS terminal zone of interest allows users to filter theunsolicited messages (output domain) that can be outputon the terminal outside users’ work sessions according tothe BSS entities that send them.
Object : terminal profile
Type : DP
Note : The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet.When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the otherBSCs already created.
zI bss
Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest.Enter "all" to include all the BSCs created on the OMC-R.
If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill inthe list as follows:
• The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list.
• The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs fromthe list.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
Z 533
A BSS user’s zone of interest defines the BSS entities theuser is entitled to work on. It allows to filter both the MMIcommands they can enter (command domain) accordingto the objects managed by these commands and theunsolicited messages (output domain) they have access toaccording to the BSS entities that send them.
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Note : The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet.When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the otherBSCs already created.
zone frequency hopping Class 2
Description : Whether frequency hopping is authorized in the zone.
If frequency hopping is not allowed in a zone, the channelobjects that describe the radio time slots of the TDMAframes used in the zone cannot be allowed to hop.
Value range : [hopping / not hopping]
Object : transceiverZone
Default value : not hopping
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Release : V9
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for btsobjects that describe concentric cells.
zone frequency threshold Class 2
Description : Minimum number of frequencies needed to allow frequencyreconfiguration in the zone.
Value range : [1 to 64]
Object : transceiverZone
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
534 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
Release : V9
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for btsobjects that describe concentric cells.
zone Tx power max reduction Class 2
Description : Attenuation vs bsTxPowerMax that defines the maximumTRX/DRX transmission power in the zone.
Value range : [0 to 55] dB
Object : transceiverZone
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : • [C/M]:zone Tx power max reduction equals zeroif the transceiverZone object describes thecell outer zone. It is greater than zero if thetransceiverZone object describes the cell innerzone.
• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Release : V9
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for btsobjects that describe concentric cells.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
535.
Appendix AObjects and parameters evolution
This appendix categorizes new configuration parameters and objects byrelease.
A.1 New V16 parametersParameter Object
aterLapd lsaRc
bckgDLLayer3WindowSize bsc
channelReleaseonAbisFailure bts
eGPRSlrUlActivation bts
enableRepeatedFacchFr bts
facchPowerOffset bts
frPowerControlTargetModeDl PowerControl
hrPowerControlTargetModeDl PowerControl
interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts bts
interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc bsc
minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain transceiver
monitoredObjectClass mdWarning
nACCActivation bts
packetFlowContext powerControl
packetSiStatus bts
pcuCellState pcu
pfcActivation bts
pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection powerControl
pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection powerControl
pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection powerControl
pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection powerControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
536 Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution
Parameter Object
pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection powerControl
pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection powerControl
pfcFlowControlActivation bts
pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs transceiver
pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate
transceiver
pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold powerControl
pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold powerControl
pfcPreemptionRatioGold powerControl
pfcPreemptionRatioSilver powerControl
pfcRtDowngradeAllowed powerControl
pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold powerControl
pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold powerControl
pfcT6 powerControl
pfcT8 powerControl
pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl powerControl
pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl powerControl
privilegedCell bts
sacchPowerOffset bts
sacchPowerOffsetSelection bts
sigPowerOverboost bts
tcu2gGroup tcu2g
trmArchipelagoCalls trm
uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA bsc
A.2 New V15 parametersParameter Object
allocPriorityTable bts
allocPriorityTimers bts
amrUlHrAdaptationSet bts
amrDlHrAdaptationSet bts
amrUlFrAdaptationSet bts
amrDlFrAdaptationSet bts
available synchronizationsources
bts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A.2 New V15 parameters 537
Parameter Object
beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence
btsSiteManager
batteryRemoteControllerPresence
btsSiteManager
bEPPeriod bts
bscHighSwitchingCapacity bsc
bssSccpConnEst signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet
bssSccpInactRx signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet
bssSccpInactTx signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet
bssSccpRelease signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet
bssSccpSubSysTest signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet
btsSMSynchroMode btsSiteManager
callDropActivation bts
concentricCell bts
cpueNumber btsSiteManager
css7LocalSubSystemNumber signallingLinkSet
css7RemoteSubSystemNumber
signallingLinkSet
current synchronization mode bts
dARPPh1Priority transceiver
degradedCause bts
degradedCause transceiver
delivery bts
distributionActivation bts
distributionDuration bts
distributionQualityThreshold bts
distributionTime bts
dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold bts
dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold bts
dlMCS2UpperThreshold bts
dlMCS3UpperThreshold bts
dlMCS5UpperThreshold bts
dlMCS6UpperThreshold bts
dlMCS7UpperThreshold bts
dlMCS8UpperThreshold bts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
538 Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution
Parameter Object
edgeDataServiceType transceiver
edgeFavor transceiver
eDGEMixity bts
egprsServices bts
emergencyThreshold signallingPoint
agpsTimer bsc
estimatedSiteLoad btsSiteManager
extUtbfNoData bts
fERThreshold1 bts
fERThreshold2 bts
fERThreshold3 bts
fERThreshold4 bts
filteredTrafficCoefficient bts
floor bts
fnOffset btsSiteManager
fullDlKa bts
gprsNetworkModeOperation bts
gprsState bts
gprsState transceiver
initialMCSDL transceiver
initialMCSUL transceiver
jokerPerMainTarget transceiver
mainNetworkBand bsc
masterBtsSMId btsSiteManager
msPowerClassToggle bts
nbLargeReuseDataChannels bts
numberOfJokerDS0 transceiver
nUsfExt bts
nwExtUtbf bts
onePhaseAccess bts
onePhaseDnMsCapability bts
onlyExtUtbf bts
reportTypeMeas bts
rLCPolling bts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A.3 New V14 parameters 539
Parameter Object
sGSNRelease bts
securedLoopActivation btsSiteManager
standardIndicator bts
suspendResumeActivation bsc
systemInfoType2 bts
tGMMKeepAlive bts
timerGcchNotif signallingPoint
tnOffset btsSiteManager
tNwExtUtbf bts
tResumeAck bsc
tSuspendAck bsc
tUsfExt bts
ulBepPeriod transceiver
ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold bts
ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold bts
ulMCS2UpperThreshold bts
ulMCS3UpperThreshold bts
ulMCS5UpperThreshold bts
ulMCS6UpperThreshold bts
ulMCS7UpperThreshold bts
ulMCS8UpperThreshold bts
uplinkReply bsc
uplinkReplyTimer bts
usfGranularity bts
wPSManagement bsc
wPSQueueStepRotation bts
A.3 New V14 parametersParameter Object
peakThroughputLimitation powerControl
upQoSCriterion powerControl
dwQoSCriterion powerControl
minThroughputGold powerControl
minThroughputSilver powerControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
540 Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution
Parameter Object
minThroughputBronze powerControl
preemptionRatioGold powerControl
preemptionRatioSilver powerControl
voicePreemptionGold powerControl
voicePreemptionSilver powerControl
voicePreemptionBronze powerControl
admissionCtrlGold powerControl
admissionCtrlSilver powerControl
admissionCtrlBronze powerControl
frPowerControlTargetMode powerControl
hrPowerControlTargetMode powerControl
powerIncrStepSizeDL powerControl
powerIncrStepSizeUL powerControl
powerRedStepSizeDL powerControl
powerRedStepSizeUL powerControl
gsmToUmtsReselection bts
uMTSSearchLevel bts
uMTSReselectionOffset bts
uMTSAccessMinLevel bts
uMTSReselectionARFCN bts
amrAdaptationSet bts
hrCellLoadEnd bts
hrCellLoadStart bts
selfAdaptActivation bts
hrAmrPriority transceiver
nbOfFramesForFER bts
rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation
bts
rxQualThresholdDistribution bts
transparentTeiAttrib2 bts
amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL handOverControl
amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL handOverControl
amrDirectAllocRxLevDL handOverControl
amrDirectAllocRxLevUL handOverControl
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
A.3 New V14 parameters 541
Parameter Object
amrFRIntracellCodec handOverControl
amrHRIntercellCodec handOverControl
amrHRToFRIntraCodec handOverControl
amrReserved1 handOverControl
amrReserved2 handOverControl
amriRxLevDLH handOverControl
amriRxLevULH handOverControl
capacityTimeRejection handOverControl
enhCellTieringConfiguration handOverControl
nCapacityFRRequestedCodec handOverControl
offsetNeighbouringCell handOverControl
nFRRequestedCodec handOverControl
nHRRequestedCodec handOverControl
pRequestedCodec handOverControl
minTimeQualityIntraCellHO handOverControl
rxQualAveBeg handOverControl
servingFactorOffset handOverControl
adjacentCellReselectionId adjacentCellReselection
adjacentCellHandOverId adjacentCellHandOver
hoMarginAMR adjacentCellHandOver
bscCapacityReduction bsc, signallingPoint
frAmrPriority transceiver
lcsType bsc
sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition signallingLink
sIkATerResource signallingLink
transparentSiteAttrib2 btsSiteManager
dynamicAgprsAllowed pcu
cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel bts
agprsFilterCoefficient bts
t3168 bts
t3192 bts
flowControlMaxDelay pcusn
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
542 Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
543.
Appendix BParameters per feature
This appendix presents BSS parameters per feature.
B.1 AMR based on traffic• filteredTrafficCoefficient (bts)
B.2 AMR Optimizations• amrDlFrAdaptationSet (bts)
• amrDlHrAdaptationSet (bts)
• amrUlFrAdaptationSet (bts)
• amrUlHrAdaptationSet (bts)
B.3 BSC/TCU 3000• administrativeState (atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, hardware bsc
3G, hardware transcoder 3G, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu,sw8kRm, tmu, trm, )
• operationalState (atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, hardware bsc 3G,hardware transcoder 3G, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu,sw8kRm, tmu, trm, )
• cTU cable (iem)
• hsaPcmList (hsaRcTcu, iom)
• hsaRc Reference (iom)
• interOmuEtherlinkOper (controlNode)
• lsaPcmList (iem, lsaRc)
• lsaRc Reference (iem)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
544 Appendix B Parameters per feature
• mmsUsage (mms)
• numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts (iem, tmu)
• port Ethernet operational (omu)
• port Ethernet status (omu)
• port 0 X25 status (omu)
• port 1 X25 status (omu)
• positionInShelf (atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm,tmu, trm)
B.4 BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing• associatedTMUPosition (btsSiteManager, signallingLinkSet,
transcoder, pcu)
B.5 BSC 3000 switching increase capacity• bscHighSwitchingCapacity (bsc)
B.6 BSC overload management• processorLoadSupConf (bsc)
B.7 Dualband cell management• biZonePowerOffset (adjacentCellHandOver)
• biZonePowerOffset (handOverControl)
• concentric cell (bts)
• msTxPwrMax2ndBand (bts)
• standard indicator AdjC (adjacentCellHandover)
• standard indicator AdjC (adjacentCellReselection)
• standardIndicator (bts)
B.8 EDGE dynamic allocation• eDGEMixity (bts)
• usfGranularity (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B.11 GSM-R V12 545
B.9 EDGE traffic management• bEPPeriod (bts)
• edgeFavor (transceiver)
• egprsServices (bts)
• initialMCSDL (transceiver)
• initialMCSUL (transceiver)
• jokerPerMainTarget (transceiver)
• sGSNRelease (bts)
B.10 EDGE link adaptation• dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlMCS3UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlMCS5UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlMCS6UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlMCS7UpperThreshold (bts)
• dlMCS8UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulBepPeriod (transceiver)
• ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulMCS3UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulMCS5UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulMCS6UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulMCS7UpperThreshold (bts)
• ulMCS8UpperThreshold (bts)
B.11 GSM-R V12• additional supervised PCM 0 (btsSiteManager)
• additional supervised PCM 1 (btsSiteManager)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
546 Appendix B Parameters per feature
• additional supervised PCM 2 (btsSiteManager)
• additional supervised PCM 3 (btsSiteManager)
• additional supervised PCM 4 (btsSiteManager)
• additional supervised PCM 5 (btsSiteManager)
• additional unmasked users alarms (btsSiteManager)
• eMLPPThreshold (signallingPoint)
• nCHPosition (bts)
• preemptionAuthor (signallingPoint)
• preemptionConfiguration (signallingPoint)
• voiceBroadcastService (signallingPoint)
• voiceGroupCallService (signallingPoint)
B.12 GSM-R V15• emergencyThreshold (signallingPoint)
• msPowerClassToggle (bts)
• timerGcchNotif (signallingPoint)
• uplinkReply (bsc)
• uplinkReplyTimer (bts)
B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12)• administrativeState (pcu)
• associatedInterface (lapdLink)
• availabilityStatus (pcu)
• availabilityStatus (pcusn)
• bscGprsActivation (bsc)
• bscRefList (pcusn)
• bsCvMax (bts)
• btsSensitivity (bts)
• btsSensitivityInnerZone (bts)
• channelType (channel)
• codingScheme (transceiver)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12) 547
• drxTimerMax (bts)
• dwAckTime (transceiver)
• geographical coordinates (pcusn)
• gprsCellActivation (bts)
• gprsPermittedAccess (bts)
• gprsTimerWaitPUAM (bts)
• gprsTimerWaitRLC (bts)
• lapdConcentration (lapdLink)
• lapdTerminalNumber (lapdLink)
• longTbfLossThroughput (bts)
• longTbfSizeThreshold (bts)
• maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone (bts)
• maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold (bts)
• maxDnTbfPerTs (bts)
• maxDwAssign (bts)
• maxNbrPDAAssig (transceiver)
• maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange (transceiver)
• maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock (transceiver)
• maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold (bts)
• maxUpTbfPerTs (bts)
• msCapWeightActive (bts)
• muxNumber (pcusn)
• n3103 (bts)
• n3105max (transceiver)
• nAvgl (bts)
• nAvgT (bts)
• nAvgW (bts)
• nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation (bts)
• nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation (bts)
• nbrTch (pcu)
• operationalState (pcu)
• operationalState (pcusn)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
548 Appendix B Parameters per feature
• panDec (bts)
• panInc (bts)
• panMax (bts)
• pcmCircuit (pcmCircuit)
• pcmNbr (pcu)
• pcmType (pcmCircuit)
• pcu (pcu)
• pcuLapdEqptRefList (pcu)
• pcusn (pcusn)
• routingArea (bts)
• speechOnHoppingTs (bts)
• t3172 (bts)
• upAckTime (transceiver)
B.14 GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I)• gprsNetworkModeOperation (bts)
B.15 GPRS (TF1121 - V12)• gprsPreemption (bts)
• gprsPreemptionProtection (bts)
• gprsPriority (transceiver)
• minNbrGprsTs (bts)
• radioAllocator (bts)
B.16 GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access• onePhaseAccess (bts)
• onePhaseDnMsCapability (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering 549
B.17 GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume• suspendResumeActivation (bsc)
• tResumeAck (bsc)
• tSuspendAck (bsc)
B.18 PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC• bscPcuPcmRefList (pcu)
• gprsPcuCrossConnectList
B.19 Network Synchronization• btsSMSynchroMode (btsSiteManager)
• dARPPh1Priority (transceiver)
• fnOffset (btsSiteManager)
• tnOffset (btsSiteManager)
B.20 BTS Synchronization• available synchronization sources
• current synchronization mode
• masterBtsSMId (btsSiteManager)
B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering• btsReserved3 (bts)
• hoMarginTiering (handOverControl)
• interferenceType (adjacentCellHandOver)
• intraCell (handOverControl)
• numberOfPwciSamples (handOverControl)
• selfTuningObs (handOverControl)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
550 Appendix B Parameters per feature
B.22 Handover for traffic reasons• hoMarginTrafficOffset (adjacentCellHandOver)
• hoTraffic (bsc)
• hoTraffic (bts)
B.23 Handover decision (adjacent cell priority and load)• offsetLoad (adjacentCellHandOver)
• offsetPriority (adjacentCellHandOver)
B.24 General protection against pingpong handover• bts time between HO configuration (bts)
• directedRetryPrio (bts)
• hoPingpongCombination (adjacentCellHandOver)
• hoPingpongTimeRejection (adjacentCellHandOver)
• timeBetweenHOConfiguration (bsc)
B.25 Intracell handover enhancements• lRxQualDLH (handOverControl)
• lRxQualULH (handOverControl)
B.26 AR 264• cellReselectOffset (bts)
• penaltyTime (bts)
• temporaryOffset (bts)
B.27 Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs• btsWithCavity (bts)
B.28 Call drop analysis• callDropActivation (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support 551
B.29 Extended CCCH• channelType (channel)
B.30 CPU/BIFP load sharing• cpueNumber (btsSiteManager)
B.31 Distribution on Radio measurements• distributionActivation (bts)
• distributionDuration (bts)
• distributionTime (bts)
• distributionQualityThreshold (bts)
• fERThreshold1 (bts)
• fERThreshold2 (bts)
• fERThreshold3 (bts)
• fERThreshold4 (bts)
• nbOfFramesForFER (bts)
B.32 Extended UL TBF• extUtbfNoData (bts)
• fullDlKa (bts)
• nUsfExt (bts)
• nwExtUtbf (bts)
• onlyExtUtbf (bts)
• tNwExtUtbf (bts)
• tUsfExt (bts)
B.33 Broadcast of PSI 13• maxRACH (bts)
B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support• measurementProcAlgorithm (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
552 Appendix B Parameters per feature
B.35 Fast power control at TCH assignment• new power control algorithm (bts)
B.36 Data Backhaul Evolution• numberOfJokerDS0 (transceiver)
B.37 Disabling TBF Keep Alive• tGMMKeepAlive (bts)
B.38 PCM error correction• enhancedTRAUFrameIndication (bsc)
• pcmErrorCorrection (bts)
B.39 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block• circuitGroupBlock (signallingPoint)
• unequippedCircuit (signallingPoint)
B.40 Uplink mapping• rxLevULIH (handOverControl)
• uplinkMappingChannelNumber (bts)
• uplinkMappingFreq (bts)
• uplinkMappingProcessingMode (bsc)
B.41 WPS public access bandwidth protection• wPSQueueStepRotation (bts)
B.42 WPS queuing management• allocPriorityTable (bts)
• allocPriorityTimers (bts)
• allocWaitThreshold (bts)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context 553
B.43 BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement• aterLapd (lsaRc)
• trmArchipelagoCalls (trm)
B.44 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS• nAccActivation (bts)
• packetSiStatus (bts)
B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context• packetFlowContext (powerControl)
• pfcActivation (bts)
• pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl)
• pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl)
• pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl)
• pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl)
• pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl)
• pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl)
• pfcFlowControlActivation (bts)
• pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs (transceiver)
• pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate (transceiver)
• pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)
• pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)
• pfcPreemptionRatioGold (powerControl)
• pfcPreemptionRatioSilver (powerControl)
• pfcRtDowngradeAllowed (powerControl)
• pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)
• pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)
• pfcT6 (powerControl)
• pfcT8 (powerControl)
• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl (powerControl)
• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl (powerControl)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
554 Appendix B Parameters per feature
B.46 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading• bckgDLLayer3WindowSize (bsc)
B.47 Optimized Agprs cell allocation• privilegedCell (bsc)
B.48 EDGE Dynamic Agprs• dynamicAgprsAllowed (pcu)
• minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain (transceiver)
B.49 Switch Interference Matrix• interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts
• interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc
B.50 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure• channelReleaseOnAbisFailure
B.51 PM1270 - TDMA based counters• monitoredObjectClass
B.52 Tx power offset for signalling channels• facchPowerOffset
• sacchPowerOffsetSelection
• sacchPowerOffset
• hrPowerControlTargetModeDl
• frPowerControlTargetModeDl
• sigPowerOverboost
B.53 Tx power overboost for signaling channels• enableRepeatedFacchFr
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
B.56 Smart Power Management 555
B.54 U-TDOA support on the BSS• uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA (bsc)
B.56 Smart Power Management• smartPowerManagementConfig
• smartPowerSwitchOffTimer
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
556 Appendix B Parameters per feature
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
557.
Appendix CPCUSN components
The PCUSN components are described in the following NTPs:
• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component -PcGtl (241-5701-060_PcGtl)
• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component -Psusa (241-5701-060_Pcusa)
• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component -Psusn (241-5701-060_Pcusn)
For more information on the PCUSN components, refer to:
• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 ComponentOverview (241-5701-060)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
558 Appendix C PCUSN components
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008
Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks
.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
Nortel GSM BSS Parameter ReferenceCopyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel NetworksAll Rights Reserved.
Release: 16.0Publication: 411-9001-124Document status: StandardDocument revision: 16.14Document release date: 28 May 2008
To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.
www.nortel.com
Sourced in Canada, France, and the United States of America.
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writingNORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSOR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, S2000, and S8000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.